•a: & a <§ ^ $
AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE KOREAN SPOKEN LANGUAGE
BY
HORACE GRANT UNDERWOOD
IN TWO PARTS : PART I. GRAMMATICAL NOTES PART II. ENGLISH INTO KOREAN
SECOND EDITION
REVISED AND ENLARGED WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF HORACE HORTON UNDERWOOD, A.B.
EUROPE AND AMERICA The MacMillan Company, New York THE FAR EAST Kelly & Walsh, I/td., Yokohama, Shanghai The Korean Religious Tract Society, Seoul, Korea (all eight reserved) 39fb ■-
7?5. 5
PRINTED BY THE FUKUIN PRINTING Co., L'id., YOKOHAMA, JAPAN. K ■
PREFACE.
It was hardly expected when this volume saw the light of day in 1889 that so many years would pass before it was supplemented by something more elaborate and better and it is only the fact that nothing else has been prepared to take its place and that the author has been so beseeched for a new edition that has led us to issue this second edition. "We have sought advice and help and suggestions for changes on every hand and regret very much that the press of work has hindered others from giving to us the assistance that would have made this book of much more value to the studenj of Korean. In the present edition the author i3 glad to say that he has had the assistance of his son who went over the revision of the book with the enthusiasm of a new student of the language. We regret that more changes have not been made because we feel that the imperfections of the book would have warranted a more thorough revision of the book, but ■ a careful review of all the parts with the assistance of some of the best Korean scholars available did not result ■in more than what is seen in this new edition. There are one or two appendices that have been added which will contribute not a little to the study of the language The use of the book we believe will be very much enhanced by the alphabetical indices ; one, a general index in English and the other an index of gram matical forms in Korean. O 81271 IV PREFACE . Special credit should be given to Mr. Sang-Kyu Pack, Ph. B. of Brown University, U. S. A. who has assisted me throughout. As before, so again the author would gladly welcome any criticisms or suggestions either as to form or matter with which the student of the language may kindly favor him. Seoul, Korea, January 1914. H. G. U. PREFACE.
To Fiest Edition. In this introduction to the study of the Korean spoken language, a systematic grammar, in the strict sense of the word, has not been aimed at. It has been attempted simply to introduce the student to the study, to clear away some of the obstacles and difficulties that present them selves, and to show him the way by which he can become a proficient speaker of Korean. Passing through Japan on my way to Korea, Dr. Imbrie's " English-Japanese Etymology " was brought to my notice ; and, the plan of study there presented appealing to me as best suited to my individual needs, I decided to adopt it in the study of Korean. In carrying out this idea, I was greatly aided by ob taining the Korean translation of Dr. Imbrie's sentences prepared by Mr. Song Soun Yong, (who had become my teacher) at the direction of Lieut. Bernardo (U.S.N.) After correcting, arranging and adding to them, I found them of so great advantage to myself, and they proved of such valuable assistance to the many to whom I loaned them, that I determined, to carry the classifica tion still further, to formulate rules of which the sentences should be illustrations, and to throw the whole into a form similar to Dr. Imbrie's book. Most of this was done over three years ago, but various circumstances hindered its publication, and, in the mean time, realizing that such a work Was in a measure one VI PBEFACE. sided and approached the language merely from the English standpoint, a first part, which has been called " Grammatical Notes," and which views the subject from the opposite side has been prepared. From the very nature of the case, the second part taking English idioms and phrases and showing their Korean equivalents, assumes more of a practical than a theoretical form. On the other band, the first part taking Korean phrases, idioms, sentences, showing their use among the Koreans, their structure, and their various forms, becomes more theoretical than practical. This complete division of a work on a language into two parts, each of which approaches it from a different standpoint, has, it is believed, never been attempted in one book before, and yet it is felt that such a division will materially aid the student in obtaining an accurate and well systematized knowledge of neat distinctions, and idioms, and enable him more speedily to speak a pure and not an Anglicized Korean. It is true that at times, the one naturally overlaps the other, but is equally certain, that each has its own especial place, which the other can in no way fill, and a true conception of any language can best be obtained by viewing them separately. The author takes pleasure in acknowledging valuable suggestions made by Prof. Homer B. Hulbert of the Eoyal Korean University, concerning some of the uses of the compound tenses, and also his indebtedness to Mr. A. Stewart Annand who kindly corrected much of the proof, and whose friendly assistance in many ways has greatly aided him. Credit also is due to the pioneers in the language, the French missionaries, from whose work the author gained PREFACE. VII his first ideas of Korean grammar. To more than any one else, however, thanks are due to Mr. Song Soun Yong (5jc?¥ 3§t) whose sound ideas on the use of the language as it is spoken to-day, and whose intimate acquaintance with the Chinese classics, combined with his thorough knowledge of the use of the native Ernmun have been of invaluable assistance. The author will gladly welcome any criticisms or suggestions either as to form or matter, with which students of the language may kindly favor him. H. G. U. Seoul Korea, November 1889. TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART I.
GRAMMATICAL NOTES.
CHAPTER I. Introductory remarks on the study of Korean.
1, * Difficulties surrounding the study. — 2, A Korean teacher. — 3, Approach the study from two sides.— 4, Use of this book. — 5. Korean written language. — 6, Necessity for the study of Chinese. — 7. Onmun and Chinese rarely if ever mixed. — 8, Pronounciation.— 11, Arrangement of chapters. — 12, Honorifics Page 1.— 10. CHAPTER II. The Korean alphabet and its Sounds.
13, An alphabet.— 14-22, Vowel sounds.— 23-27, Diphthongs and triphthongs. — 28, The consonants. — 29, The part euphony plays.— 30- 38, Simple consonantal sounds. — 39, Aspirated consonants. — 41, Names of simple consonants Page 10-23. CHAPTER III. The Noun.
42, Korean noun indeclinable. — 43, Distinctions of number, subject, object not made. — 44, Postpositions. — 45, Methods of expressing gender. — 46, Ambiguity in regard to number.— 48, Reduplication of words. — 51, — Compound nouns and the use of a knowledge of Chinese. — 52, * These numbers refer to the paragraphs. X TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Uses of i, 3J«1. 2 etc. — 53, Verbal nouns.— 54, Surnames.— 56, Korean titles.— 57, No names for women.— 58, The wrong and proper use of the term -f$l : Page 24—39. CHAPTEE IV. Pronouns and Pronominal adjectives.
59, All pronouns really nouns.— 60, Personal Pronouns.— 62, Personal pronouns and postpositions united, — 63, No third personal pronoun in Korean. — 65, Keflexive pronouns. — 66, All Korean inter rogates also indefinite.— 67, '1 \, Si "9, and J£.-£ used adjectively. — 69, Use of f>\3.. — 71, Demonstrative pronouns.— 72, Words derived from these.— 73, The relatives 7% and «} '. Page 40—53. CHAPTER V. The Numeral.
74, Two sets of numerals. Adjective and substantive forms. — 75, Sinico-Korean numerals have only an adjective form. — 77, Specific classifiers. — 79, Money. — 81, Oriental numbers. — 82, The months of the year. — 83, Days of the month. — 85, Hours of the day — 86, Fractions. — 87,— Multiples,— 88, Interest on money.— 89, The Korean word (fl. — 90, Weights and measures. — 92, The peculiar use of ■£ and the meaning of 3.£ Page 54—71. ' CHAPTER VI. The Postposition.
93, Kinds of postpositions. — 94, Simple postpositions. — 95, Eupho nic changes that may creep in. — 109, v| and ^ considered as post positions.— Ill, Composite postpositions, — 113, Verbal postpositions. Page 72—86. CHAPTER VII. The Verb. 114, Difficulties; terminations and conjunctions not distinguished. — 115, Verb impersonal and no number.— 118, A few so called " personal TABLE OF CONTENTS. XI
forms.— 119, Two kinds of verbs, active and neuter; active verbs. — 120, Neuter verbs. — 121, Three voices ; active, causative and passive. — 122, - Method of forming the passive voice. Method of forming the causative. — 123, Causative in xl]. — 125, But one conjugation. — 127, The Basal Conjugations. — 128, Each part divisible into three parts. — The stem.— 129, The tense root— 132, The particle *|.— 133, Simple and compound tenses.— 134, The use of the simple tenses. — 135, The use of the compound tense. — 13G, The form ^J defective and pick of discrimination between terminations, and conjunctions. — 137, Different kinds of terminations. — 138, Declarative terminations.— 141, Interrogative terminations. — 144, Propositi ve terminations.— 145. Imperative termination. — 14G, The parts of the Basal Conjugations. — 147, Indicative mood. — 148, Volitive mood. — 149, Two kinds of parti ciples. — 150 Verbal participles. — 151, Different forms of past verbal par ticiple have caused discussion.— 153, Postpositions may be affixed. — 155, The use of the verbal participle ; As connectives.— 156, Introducing cause, manner, mean3. — 157, Used also with object of principal verb. — 158, In making compounds. — 159, The future verbal participle. — 160 f Belative participles.— ,161, The four most common. — 162, The present, its form and use.— 163, The past, its form.— 164, It uses.— 165. Past relative participle of neuter verbs. — 166, The future relative participle. — 167, Future past relative participle. — 166, Progressive participle. — 169, Each tense has its relative participle. — 170, The Former Supine. — 171, Verbal noun in o, — 172, Verbal noun in t| — 176, The desidera- tive base.— 177, The negative base.— 178, The principle parls. — 179, The paradigm of the basaliconjugation — 180. Other verbs to illustrate. - Page 87,-142. The Verb {Continued).
181, The verb with conjunctions.— 182, Li?t of these conjunctions, — 183, Their union with indicative tenses. —185 to 203, The use of these conjunctions considered individually. — 204, The desiderative form. — 205, Another desiderative form. — 206, Negative particles. — 207, Formation of negative verbs. — 208, The negative verb Dhi. — 209, Certain other negative forms. — 210, Auxiliary verbs. — 211, A list of some of them. — 212 to 219, The uses of these auxiliaries. — 220, Modifications produced by nouns forming new verbs. — 221, List of these words and their uses.— 227, Adverbial effect produced by nouns with postposition when used with the verb. — 228, Verb in indirect XII TABLE OP CONTENTS. discourse. — 229, The imperative verb. — 230, Contractions and ellipses. —242, The principal parts of some verbs Pages 142 — 193.. CHAPTER VIII. The Adjective*
243, True adjectives. — 244, Adjectives used attributively and pre- dicatively. — 245. Distinctions attainable through adjectival verbs. — 246, Formation of adjectives, — 247, Adjectives in £.^j —248, Adjectives formed by reduplication of stem. — 249, Nouns used as adjectives. — 250, Comparison of adjectives — little used.— 251, How formed.— 252, Use of iLcf— 253, Use of &U*J — 254, Superlative how formed. Page 194-199 CHAPTER IX. The Adverb. 255, Primitive adverbs. — 256, Derived adverbs. Those derived from verbs. — 257, The future verbal participle used as an adverb. — 258, Distinctions between these two classes of adverbs. — 259, The Korean past verbal participle used as an adverb. — 260, Adverbs derived from nouns and pronouns. — 261, Comparison of adverbs,— 262, Primi tive adverbs used with postposition. — 263, Numeral adverbs. — 264, Position of adverb in sentence. — 265, Korean responsives. — 266, Answers to negative questions Pages 200 — 204. CHAPTEE X. The Conjunctions.
267, Two classes of conjunctions — Co-ordinate and subordinate. — 268 and 269, Uses of co-ordinate conjunctions. — 270, Subordinate con junctions etc Pages 205 — 207. CHAPTEE XI. Honorifics. 271, Importance of use of honorifics. — 272, Persons spoken of, how honored.— 273, Honorific form of verb how constructed.— 274, Hodo- TABLE OP CONTENTS. XIII
rific verbs honoring the subject. — 275, Honorific verbs honoring the object.— 276, The two honorifics combined. — 277, The use of honorific nouns, postpositions etc. — 278, List of some of these nouns. — 279, These honorifics not the same in all the provinces. — 280, Terms for address ing servants etc Pages 208—212. CHAPTEE XII. The Structure of the sentence.
281, The general rule.— 282, Position of the different parts of speech in relation to the words they govern or are governed by. — 283, Position of the parts of a sentence. — 284, Several verbs connected. — how used. — 285, Indefiniteness of Korean sentences.— 286, Use of two negatives. -^-287, The use of elliptical forms. — 288, Constant absence of postpositions — verbal modification etc. — 289, Use of conjunctions ; the sentence and paragraph the same. — 290, Need of practice. Pages 213-217. XIV TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART II.
ENCLISH INTO KOREAN.
Chapter I. The verb. ?I. The verb"Tobe" Page 221 1 II. The verb "To have" „ 225 I III. Auxiliaries. Am, Is and Are— Wa«, Were— Do and Did— Have, Has, and Had —Shall and Will— Should and Would— Can and Could— May and Might— Let, Make, Have and Get — Must — Ought and Should— Think and Suppose— Intend — Want — Wish and Hope —Need— Seem and Look Pages 227 to 257 I IV. The Infinitives „ 258,, 262 §V. Passive Construction , 262 „ 266 \ VI. Conditional Sentences , 267 „ 268 Chapter II. The Noun , 269 Chapter III. The Article „ 270,, 271 Chapter IV. The Pronoun 272,, 279 \ I. Personal Pronouns. Simple and Compound „ 272,, 275 |II. Belative Pronouns , 275 „ 277 I III. Interrogative Pronouns „ 277 „ 279 Chapter V. Pronominal Adjectives. This, That, and Such— Either, Neither and Both— Each— Some — Any— Every — No, None and Nobody — All — Several — Few — One, Ones — Other, Another— Same — Much— Many — Most — Enough Pages 280 to 319 Chapter VI. The Adjective. J I. Used Attributively, and Predicatively Pages 320 to 322 \ II. The Comparison of Adjectives. Comparative degree— Superlative degree Pages 322 to 325 Chapter VII. The Adverb. \ I, .Adverbs of Place. Here— There— Where Pages 326 to 331 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XV
I II. Adverbs of Time. Always — Whenever — Usually — Often and Frequently— Sometimes — Seldom— Never and Ever — Again — When— While — As — Then — Now — Already— Formerly — Recently, and of Late — Ago— Just Now— Still and Yet— Till and Until— By and By- Soon — Directly— Before — After and Since — Long Time — Some time— Finally and At Last Pages 331 to 359 | III. Adverbs of Cause, Manner and Degree. Why — Accordingly, Consequently, and Therefore— How — So — Like and As —Very— Only — Too— Even — Almost — About. Pages 359 to 368 Chapter VIII. The Numekal , 369 to 370 Chapter IX. The Preposition. At— In— On— To— From, Out of and Off— By— Through— With — Without — Of— For — Across, Over, and Beyond — Among — — Around — Before — Behind — Between — During — Except, Be sides and But — Instead of— Over and Above — Under and Below —According to— In accordance with Pages 371 to 391 Chapter X. The Conjunction. And — Both and — Too, Also — But— Though, Although, and Still— Either, Or, and Whether— Neither Nor— If, and Unless— Because— Then— That— Than Pages 392 to 4C6. PART I.
GRAMMATICAL NOTES.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON TEE STUDY OF KOREAN.
1. — The study of Korean is as yet in its infancy, ways and means are few, and good books written in the native character are still fewer. Despite the fact that twenty odd years have passed since the first edition of this book was published and that new Missionaries have many facilities provided in the form of organized language classes and several very helpful books ; the difficulties are still many. Obviously even in that part of the language which we get through books we must have the assistance of native teachers, and Koreans with an accurate knowledge of the rules of grammar or with any idea of the real functions of a teacher are still rare. Under these circumstances, the difficulties which sur 2 INTBODUCTOBY BEMABKS round the student are numerous, and while in these pages the writer tries in part to systematize the language, and to aid the student, it must be remembered tbat no language was ever learned entirely from books, and from the very start he must accustom his ear to accurately bear, and to retain every variety, of sound, and by unremitting effort train his tongue to reproduce them exactly. The test of exactness in pronunciation is the ability to make oneself understood, not merely by one's own teacher and native associates, who will soon become ac customed to the wrong pronunciations, and mistakes of a foreigner, but by strangers and outsiders. The writer would therefore strenuously urge upon the learner the necessity of daily use among the people, of what he learns. Let him not be afraid of mistakes, by mistakes he must learn. Let him from the very first day, though he knows but one or two words, go out and begin to use them. We have said that the test of exactness in pronuncia tion, is the ability to make oneself understood by strangers and outsiders. Here we must remember that another element besides that of the individual word enters in, that of the rate of pronunciation of the combinations of sylla bles and words which make up, what is in fact the unit of effective speech, the sentence. Let each word be pro nounced ever so correctly if the rate of speech in the completed sentence be not at least approximately correct, the result if understood at all, will be stilted and laugh able. 2. — A Korean teacher is of course indispensable, but he cannot be expected to teach in any sense of the word as we understand it. He is to give the exact pronunciation, to assist in reading the character, to explain forms of ON THE STUDY OF KOEEAN. 3
expression and idioms, if possible give distinctions between synonyms, and to correct tbe mistakes of tbe learner. From him the student is to get all he can, and upon him to practice at every opportunity. He should be a good Chinese scholar ; as the Chinese enters so largely into the composition of words, and as far as possible, a man well acquainted with the native Korean character, and having no knowledge of English, so that the student shall from the start be thrown upon his own resources. 3. — It must be borne in mind, that not only are the characters and words different from those to which we have been accustomed, but also the forms of expression and the idioms. The surroundings of the Korean are entirely different and his habits of thought are necessarily as unlike ours as his surroundings ; hence " Put yourself in his place " should be the motto of the student ; he must early learn to put himself in the place of the Korean. He must learn to hear with Korean ears, to see with Korean eyes, to enter heartily into the life and sur roundings of the Korean, to appreciate fully all their circumstances, and as far as possible in fact, to think Korean. Until this is done at least in part, no one can become a speaker of Korean, and as long as the student continues to think in English, and to translate word for word into Korean, he will not be speaking Korean at all, but simply an Anglicized jargon of words, almost as unintelligible to the uninitiated, as Pidgin Eng lish is to the foreigner when he first lands on Chinese soil, and in many cases he will convey a meaning directly opposite to what he intends. 4. — To accomplish this end and think in Korean, we t must approach the language from two sides, the Korean 4 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS and the foreign. This has been the object in this work. In the first or grammar part of the book, the effort has been made to present Korean from the Korean stand point. That is to say ; to take the Korean as it is, sys tematize it in part, divest it of everything foreign, show as far as possible how the Korean thinks and how he constructs his sentences. In the second part, on the other hand, we have tried to approach the language from the foreign standpoint, and taking English ideas, English thoughts and English methods of expression, to show how they would be expressed by the Korean. These have been named for convenience Part? I and II, not because the one should be studied before the other, or is of more importance, for they should be studied together, and we should try to approach the language from the two sides at once. I would particularly emphasize this last as many, even among those who teach the language, seem to consider Part I proper for the beginner and Part II a fitting study for the second year, As a matter of fact Part II would be better for the beginner, if the two parts are to be studied separately, but really the two must be taken together if the student would secure the greatest benefit from the use of this book. In the study of the second part, the student is urged to take each sentence and analyze it carefully, ascertain the " whys " and " wherefores," notice its structure and memo rize it ; at the same time reading carefully Part I, and comparing what it says with what he finds put in practice in Part II. Of course the chapter on The Alphabet and its Sounds, must be mastered first, but as soon as this is done let the student begin on the sentences in Part II, ON THE STUDY OF KOBEAN. 5 while he is at the same time reading carefully, and learn ing all there is to be learned in the chapter on the noun. He need not wait till he has studied the verb but simply glance at such words and terms as may be necessary. 5. — This work does not enter into the study of the Korean written language, which differs from the spoken, largely in verbal terminations and a few expressions never used in the colloquial. A little careful study, will soon acquaint one with these and their meanings, and while much hard work would be needed to make one a proficient and exact writer of " the book language," one may soon with comparative ease understand it. 6. — In the writing of Korean, two forms of character are used, the native Onmun and the Chinese, In all official correspondence, philosophical books, and in fact in nearly all books of real value, the Chinese character was used in the past, the native Onmun being relegated to a few trashy love stories and fairy tales. This difference in the written language, led to the assertion that there are two languages in Korea, and we sometimes hear foreigners talk of " speaking in the Onmun." There are not two languages and this expression is wrong, for the " Onmun " is simply a system of writing, and it would be as sensible to talk of " speaking in Munson's system of short band." The idea that there are two languages in Korea is strengthened by the fact, that foreigners, who are perhaps tolerably well acquainted with words purely Korean, have, when they heard conversations carried on between officials and scholars, been unable to understand what was said. They have been on their way to the houses of the officials and passing through the streets and hearing the merchants the middle classes, and the coolies, talking among them-
/■' 6 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS selves, have been able to understand, while when they came into the presence of the officials, they have been unable to comprehend the meaning of statements and ques tions addressed directly to them. At once they have said " There are two languages " while the truth is that the officials have simply been using those Korean terms which have been derived from the Chinese. Chinese may be called the Latin of Korea. It is more polite and scholarly to use " Latinized " Korean ; but among merchants, middle classes, and in common daily conversation this is not largely used : the learner does not hear it, hence the difficulty. This however being the case, it becomes neces sary to make a study of these Sinico- Korean terms, for which be will find frequent and important use. In connection with his use of these terms one thing must be borne in mind, that if a Sinico-Korean noun is used, the adjective or pronominal adjective used to qualify or limit it, should also be Sinico-Korean and vice-versa. All such words however undergo inflection and change as though pure Korean. This rule is more apparent, and is more necessary of observation in connection with the formation of compound words. 7. — Reference was made in the previous paragraph to the two forms of writing used. They were however for the most part, kept entirely distinct, and unlike the Japan ese, the two were seldom mixed. Now and then in a letter written in the Chinese, Korean particles might be inter spersed to assist the reader, or in a letter written in the " Onmun " the names of persons, places, etc., might be written in the Chinese. A few books were to be found witten in both the Chinese and the " Onmun " but for the most part, the Chinese character was written on one page ON THE STUDY OF KOBEAN. ■ 7 with its equivalent in Onmun on the other, The rale was, as we have stated, not to mix the two characters, and the almost universal practice to use either the Onmun or Chinese alone. 8. Before leaving the subject of Chinese and " Onmun we would call attention to the fact that the great majority of the students of Korean utterly neglect the study of the Chinese characters on the ground that they cannot study two languages at once and prefer to study Korean." Nothing could be more ridiculous or more short sighted. The study of the Chinese character is not the study of a different language but the study of Korean derivations carried on in Korean and opening up new etymological avenues leading the student to a clearer understanding of the language which he hears, and nearer to a mastery of elegant and scholarly speech. It will bring him the respect and regard of scholarly Koreans and broaden his vocabulary with astonishing ease and speed as new words will appear as merely new groupings of old friends. This lack of vocabulary on the part of missionaries is often remarked among Koreans and indeed it would be laughable were it not rather disgraceful to notice how corapletly at sea many even of the older missionaries are when a conversation takes a turn not directly religious or domestic or when any but a religious book is taken up. It may be claimed that a perfect knowledge of a foreign language is impossible, but whether we dispute this point or not, we ought simply to bring our knowledge to a point where we can join intelligently in conversations outside the ordinary domestic and religious lines and read with a fair amount of ease literature more difficult than the Bible and translated hymns. 9 . INTRODUCTORY BEMABKS
9.— Great care must be exercised in the matter of pro nunciation.* An effort has been made in the chapter on the alphabet and pronunciation, to give rules to aid in this, but do not be satisfied with these, test each rule given, for yourself, try them with your teacher, and prove the result by conversation with natives, who have not accustomed themselves to your peculiarities and mistakes. There must be from the start systematic drill of both ear and tongue. Which of the two is most important it is not easy to state, but certainly if one does not manage to distinguish with the ear the different sounds it will be im possible to repioduce them with the tongue. One must as far as possible daily go where he will hear the Koreans talking among themselves. He should do this from the second day of his arrival and note-book in hand mark down the sounds as he hears them. This should be his constant practise. He should never allow himself to get to the place where words and sounds pass him unnoticed. Get aquainted with some Korean who is popular, and has a large circle of friends, become a regular habitue of his Sarang at the hour when you know the Koreans will be assembling. At the start, it will seem as though the Koreans speak with unusual rapidity until your ear be comes more accustomed to the sounds. The tongue also must be drilled. Various .are the exer cises that may be suggested but the best the writer knows, is to take a good long Korean sentence learn it off by heart, practice clause by clause until the whole can be repeated at least as fast as by the fastest Korean speaker. In order to secure this, time yourself with a watch and be sure you reach some standard, such for instance, as that suggested by Prof. *See Appendix on phonetics. ON THE STUDY OF KOREAN. 9
Cummins of 5 syllable? per second. After such a sentence has been thus learned, begin again with another until it becomes one's habit to speak and talk as fast as the ordinary Korean. In this drill however from the very start one must articulate clearly and correctly, or the speed will be worse than useless. 10. — As has been observed above, Koreans think along entirely different lines from the foreigner, and we would here warn the learner against a few mistakes into which, on this account, he is apt to fall. As will be stated further on, in many cases Koreans do not use Ihe terminations, signifying number, case, etc. unless ambiguity would be caused by their absence. It is not a universal rule, but it is so common that one is almost safe in adopting it as such, and saying : " Never use such terminations unless a true interpretation of the sentence requires them." Foreigners are apt in their efforts to speak correctly to use postpositions wherever possible, and thus to speak in what the Korean must consider a stilted manner. This almost laconic conciseness of speech is much more observ able in the use, or rather neglect of use of the personal pronouns, and here more than anywhere else the foreigner is most apt to blunder. 11. — Native grammarians make but three parts of speech, namely ; Nouns, Verbs, and Particles : and, while it might have been well in some respects to have confined ourselves to this division, it has been deemed best for the sake of convenience, to classify and arrange these three divisions under nine heads, namely : Nouns, Pronouns, Numerals, Postpositions, Verbs, Adjectives, Adverbs, Con junctions, and Interjections. 10 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
As all pronouns are in reality nouns, the chapter, on the former, immediately follows that on the latter. As nearly all true Korean adjectives, are really verbs, the chapter on verbs precedes that on adjectives. 12. — Finally we would urge that much care and pains be taken in the study of Korean honorifics. At first sight they appear so numerous and varied that the student is almost discouraged, but he will soon learn that with some trifling exceptions, the whole matter is governed by but a few rules. It is important that he address servants and attendants in low terms, and speak of himself in higher terms ; while in the presence of officials and men of high rank, he must always speak of himself in low terms and address them in the highest forms. While this in theory is so contrary to the Christian idea, in practise in Korea it is almost a necessity, uuless one desires to be considered entirely ignorant of both language and propriety. THE KOBEAN ALPHABET 11
CHAPTER II.
TEE KOBEAN ALPHABET AND ITS SOUND.
13. — Unlike most languages of the East, Korean has neither a syllabary like the Japanese, nor a system of characters representing individual ideas, like the Chinese, but a true native alphabet. The writing is always in syllables, each syllable forming we might say a separate character, but divisible into its component parts. 14. — The Korean alphabet contains twenty-five letters, of which eleven are vowels and fourteen consonants. They are as follows : — ~ Vowels. t\ a, Y ya, ■] 6, =J y<5, J- o, Ji yo, T u, T yu. U | — eu, 1 i, * a. Consonants. ' / 7 k, ri m, l- n, if p, a x or 1, >'s or final t, rt,^ j, o rig, -7 hk, at hp, S ht, ' 5e tj or ch, and o" h. As is stated in all books on foreign languages, it is an impossibility to" give the exact pronunciation of all the letters of one language in that of another, but a few words here concerning the pronunciation and use of the above alphabet, may be a help in the study of Korean. Of the vowels, it will be seen at once that the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth are simply modifications of the 12 THE KOEEAN ALPHABET first, third, fifth and seventh, and it will be noted that this modification is shown in the writing, by the reduplication of the characteristic sign of the vowel, and expressed in the speaking, by the interposition of the sound of 'the English consonant y before the vowel sound. If then we give the sounds of the first, third, fifth and seventh, we will at once have the sounds for all of the first eight vowels. Note. — No vowel can stand alone at the commencement of a Korean syllable, but if it has no consonant of its own must be preceded by the consonant 6 > which is then mute. Pronunciation of the Vowels. Whereas English vowels may have a glide such is not the case as a rule with the Korean vowels even though final. C\ 15. — b\. This vowel has two sounds. (1) That of the Italian a found in the English words father, arm, etc. Ex. |£, al, (egg) ; tf^, an-gyeng, (spectacles). £ (2) That of the regular English short a found in mat, add, etc. ■Sj-^-c], mak-ta-gi, (a stick). ) 16. — *\ . This vowel has two sounds. (1) That of the regular English short 5 seen in not, odd, etc. Ex. ^5,', 5l-hpit, (quickly); 6j*l, 5-dai, (where); ^j>5t, op-s<5, (to carry on the back). (2) That of the German 6, or the English ur of urn. Ex. 6-)s./*l>^, 6-r5-si-nai, (father) ; *]%, 6-run, (adult), and ^ 4» , 6p-s5, (to be lacking, to be not). 17. — .£>.. Here we can use the regular long and short English o sounds. ■ > _ • * See Appendix on phonetics. . , '• • ■ j AND ITS SOUNDS. 1:3
(1) Long o, of old, etc. is for the most part found in open syllables. Ex. SL^el, ho-rang-i, (a tiger); £., 6, (five). (2) The short 6 of lot, etc. occurs generally in closed syllables. Ex. 4, pong, (an envelope) ; ^Jv*», kSng-sa, minis ter) ; £.£. &-nel, ((to-day). IA 18. — f-. From this vowel we get the sound of either the long 65 of moon, or the short bo of wool. (1) Ex. =f-7%, koo-gyeng, (a sight); Jj-V], poo-ri, (a beak) ; ^, noon, (snow). (2) Ex. %, hpbol, (herbage); ^, noon, (eye). 19. — As has been said above, the compound vowels *>\, ^ . j£L. ■%•> bave respectively the sounds of the above four simple vowels with y preceding. Ud Then, ftfc will be either ya or ya. uo «*} will be either y5 or German yo. v\0 iL will be either yo or y5. And /* •%■ will be yoo. 20.— *.- Here we have the sound of the French eu, as in/fw (fife) Ex. a, keu, (that); a-f, keu-neul, (shade); &■& o] , neulk-eun-i, {an old man). 21. — 6\. This vowel has two sounds. (1) The sound of i in the words machine, pique, Ex. tt|, pi. (rain); />], si, (hour); *>]■$•$&., i-sang- ha-o, (to be strange). (2) The sound of the regular English short* of ill, hit, etc. Ex. 7]^^]Sl, ki-da-rt-o, (to wait); ■$, sip, (ten). 14 THE KOBEAN ALPHABET
22. — § , This vowel has really four sounds. (1 & 2). The same two sounds as given for *J\ <* <3- Ex. ' <1) ■£■$■.£., han-ha-o, (to hate) ; A-Q, sa-sin, (am bassador). (2) 7] ^ e-J SL. ki-da-ri-o, (to icait). (3) Most con,m mly the sound is that of the short Italian a seen in staff. Ex. § , (horse) ; $ $] , a-hai, (boy). (4) The sound of e in cable, £. |s , 8-nel, (to-day) ; SL ^ , ko-rem, (pus) ; 7] § , ki-rem, (oiZ). Note —In spelling the Koreans distinguish between &r and $ by a reference to their position in writing, (calling t>\ " upper a " and $ " lower a." 23. — Before we turn to the consideration of the con sonants it would be well to linger a little while over a few v . combinations, of vowels. In the following diphthongs and ' triphthongs it will be seen that .£. and -^- placed before other vowels in the syllable generally give the sound of the English w. The combinations most commonly used with their pronunciations are as follows. 1st. o)j , has the sound of the ai before r in air etc. Ex. 7H, (a dog) ; Mf, (I); t)f 7% (Jor); % (new). 2nd. §], has the same sound as the preceding : , Ex. -?1>*1, (instead); *!-?-, (very). 24. — 3rd. <*], has the regular long sound of the English a in day. Ex. Mj, (you) ; /JJ, (three). Sometimes also it has the sound of the short English e in end. Ex. wfj V 9f , (a daughter-in-law) . AND ITS SOUNDS. 15 It has also though very rarely, the", sound of i in ma chine. Ex. 'Hls.B-j, {hempen sandals). 4th. «>)), properly has the sound of the English word yea. Ex. Tfl^h (eggs) ; o»]tf|"§" £., ffo mafe ready). However, after consonants where it would be hard to pronounce the y, the sound is the same as *l|, though perhaps a Utile prolonged. Ex. -OIl&J , ,{the first) ; #1] $, (the world). 25. — 5th. S\, has the sound of tea, the a being the long Italian a which is seen in father, etc. Ex. SJ-'SJi (excessively); $|\i, {flowers); Q$\, {fruit,). 6th. 5lj. Here we have No. 1 preceded by St. which having the effect of w gives us the sound of wa in ware. Ex. $1]-5f, {Japan); JJ, (a torch). 7th. £} . The exact sounds that this diphthong may have, can only be learned by practice. Sometimes it may have the sound of ice in were, as SjJL. (to ^become); sJ-g-Ji, (to 6e troublesome);- sometimes that of wa in way, as \f i|, (husband and wife) ; sometimes almost this same sound with the w less distinct, as £j , (sin) ; and sometimes also the sound of French eu, as £| , (metal). 26. — 8th. 41 1 consists of -f* placed before t>], and may therefore have either of the two sounds which are derived respectively by placing w before the two sounds of the latter vowel, Ex. 1st, -^, (moon). 2nd, ^ •§■£., (to desire); ^ ■§".£.. (to exhort). 16 THE KOREAN ALPHABET
At times also it may have the sound of ivo in won. Ex. ^ , (a mandarin) ; ^, (a volume). 9th. $|, may have any of the sounds of
iW- 5th; y. This commonly has the sound of the unaspirated p in English. \ Ex. *j-, pap, (rice) ; JtJi.. po-o, (to see). Sometimes it may have the sound of b. Ex. of-ti}*!, abaji, (father) ; ■£'$■•£, poul-ga-boul, 1. (of necessity). Before n (m), or U- (n), or E-(r), it generally has the Sound of m. Ex. *)■£•, hy8ra-mun, (side gate); ^J"H> am-ni, (front teeth) ; ^5], sim-ni, (ten ri). V~^ 35. — 6th. s • This consonant may have the scunds ot / I, n, or r. It has the sounds oil: — (a). At the end of a word. Ex. £, malr (horse) ; •£, pul, (fire) ; fJ, mil, (ivax). (b). When it is followed by another consonant in the same syllable. Ex. §|J|ii, ai-dalp-so, (to hate); >
It generally has the sound of r, when coming between two vowels, or between a vowel and -$•. Ex. ^g^ii, a-ram-tap-so, (to be beautiful) ; ^^, ir-hom, (a name). Sometimes before J ( and the compound vowels, it has the sound of y. oxLxf e\ y Ex. t\, yi, (profit); £«<$=, yo-ryang, (deliberation). 5 36 7th. /, . At the beginning of a word this letter has the sound of s. Ex. ■Qil £., sam-kao, (to take care) ; <$, sak, (pay). ■ At the end of a word it has the sound of t. Ex. 3J-, kat, (hat); ^J, nat, (mid-day); 3$, met,- (how many). The sound of this final J» is however sometimes modifi ed by the initial letter of the syllable which follows it. Before another J* it becomes s. Ex. 3$-^3L« kas-sa-ro, (with a hat). Before 7 , it has the sound of k. .x-JV- Ex. #7l, sak-ki, (young); ^SL, chak-ko, (fre- ■, * ' quently). v Before "n, it becomes n. Ex. TfcS., kan-mo, (hat covering)^ ^ When the compound vowels |i, =f , ■»*-, T, are preced ed by % , the y is mute, and they have the sounds of the corresponding simple vowels. Ex. ^Jft, sang-gwan, (importance) ; >M] #, se-sang, (the world). C y 37.— 8th. TT. This letter has generally the sound of t, in told. AND ITS SOUNDS. 21 Ex. *$*£, tap-jang, (answer); "%££., tal-so, (to be different). Sometimes it may have the sound of d in dance. \ Ex. "^1 ''J "$".£.» tai-dap-hao, (to answer); 3i"S].&., kyun-dai-o, (to endure). Before ] , or any of the compound vowels, the y sound of the compound vowels disappears, and TT has the force of ch. Ex. ^l^J, chi-gyung, (territory); £.4i, c'to-so, (to be good). Note. — This rule does not hold in the province of Pyang An Do where tr always retains the sound of c and the y sound is retained in the double consonants. t s At the end of a syllable TT becomes /* , although retain ing the sound of t. but in some ancient books it is still found as c v \^J&£— 9th. % . This consonant for the most part has the sound in ch in choose. Ex. *J"Jx, chap-so, (to catch) ; $, chwi, (a rat). Sometimes it may have the sound of/ in joy. Ex. -3- *>].£.. ju-gi-o, (to hill). < As in the case of /> so also in the case of this con- 0 if sonant, when followed by the compound vowels, the y sound is lost and that of the simple vowel only, remains.
Aspirated Consonants. 39. — The aspirated consonants are. ^ , Xt, ■£■, ^, "£". 22 THE KOREAN ALPHABET
As has already been said the exact pronunciation of these aspirated consonants cannot be expressed in English. Suffice it to say that, each one has a rough explosive sound of the corresponding simple consonant. zf , is aspirated k. I<^ Ex. ?t, hkal, (a knife)? 3\, hkeui, (height); 3., hkS, (nose). 31, is aspirated p. Ex. i§., hpeura, (rank) ; #, hpool, (grass) ; ig-, hpal, (eight). ■£•, is aspirated t. Ex. -ej-Q, htam-sim, (envy); jg. "§".£.» hto-ha-o, (to vomit) . $Z, is aspirated ch. Ex. 3z, cha, (tea) ; *l"§"JLi chak-ha-o, (to be honest). o", being & aspirated has the effect of h in house. Ex. *}■"$".£., hap-ha-o, (to unite) ; :££!, hon-in, (marriage) ; "f ^, hang-sang, (always). Doubled Consonants. 40.— It is no easy task to properly reproduce the sound given by Koreans to the doubled consonants, much les3 to describe them accurately. It may be said however that as a rule the effect of the " twin siot " or doubling is to change the natural surds k, p, s, t, to the sonants g, b, z, and d, j. These sounds like all others must be obtained from the Koreans direct, and ear, and tongue drilled and drilled till they are distinguished and can be reproduced. A7[.^.e] gatouri, (female pheasant) ; ^•■cj- gata, (to peel) AND H?!^ SOUNDS. 23 *fl $tc]" bai-at-ta, (to seize) -tfj-vj ballai, (washing) ^■-^•■^■■c]- Zapsalhata (to be bitterish); Wrf zeuta (to be bitter) #\ da, (Wie earth) ^ «}■ dwita, (to jump) l$fc\ Jata, (to 6e salt) %*Y Jotta, (to pursue) 41. — The Koreans have given names to the nine simple consonants, but the vowels and aspirated consonants have no distinctive names, and can only be expressed by the sounds they represent. The names of the nine simple consonants are, 'Ac 7 — 7j^, ki-ok.: r vw. D — 13 ■%■, mi-om. H U- — H-&, ni-eun. ^ U— «]-fr, F-op. Q, a— e]-§-> li-eul. ■S /.—<*]&, si-ot. t tr— c|^, ji-keut. C X— 5fc. jat. J 6 — ol^.i-haing. It will be noticed that for the most part the name gives the initial and final sound of the consonant it represents. Enough has now been said to enable the student to gain an idea of the true sounds of the Korean alphabet, and some of the various modifications that they undergo. No book can ever tell him when and where long and short sounds should be used. These he must learn by practice. 24 THE NOUN.
GHAPTER III.
THE NOUN.
42- — Heretofore it has been the custom to consider that the Korean noun is declinable, and grammarians have variously classified the noun as belonging to, from one to five declensions, each having a number of cases varying from six to ten. There have been two causes for this, first the intimate acquaintance of those who have tried to systematize the language, with Latin and Greek, and the tendency that would thus naturally arise to make the languages conform. Secondly, on coming to Korea they found different nouns with various endings to express the same idea, and losing sight of the fact that they were but euphonic changes of various postpositions, called them cases. The Korean noun is however indeclinable. In what has heretofore been regarded as declension, the noun itself is not declined, undergoes no change,* remains the same
* Note. — There are probably only three exceptions to this rule Jj, J^ 3} and o^ ej which may really be considered as one, since &1 ?} and *£• 51 are tut contractions and were originally s^ ^ 3j and •?■ "4 S- In all these words the final t, or s, is taken from the stem and prefixed to the postposition. At times also, still further contractions are made and we can have 'g for i] £, Jf- Q for Jf- «i -J, etc. THE NOUN. 25
throughout, and the particles affixed, which have been \ considered as representing various cases, are rather distinct words or postpositions. These postpositions undergo a variety of changes according to the final letter of the noun to which they are affixed, but in no case do they change the noun itself. They represent the English preposi tions. 43. — The distinctions of number, subject, and object, of a sentence etc, may be designated by postpositions or may be left to the context. For Ex. a Af^ SJfl] *4 -?-M*h lit. that man to book give. The exact meaning of this sentence can only be under stood by a knowledge of the circumstances. It may mean, give a book, or books, to one man or two. The man, (Aj-jf), may be man or woman, boy or girl. This indefiniteness of expression, which is a characteristic of most eastern languages, is more apparent in Korean than in Japanese. It would have been perfectly correct to have omitted the SJ71) from the sentence given above. In the case of tbe subject and object of a sentence we find the same difficulty. As has been said before, the general rule is to omit the postposition unless the sentence taken with its context and circumstances would be ambiguous without them. The use of the postposition giving definiteness to the sentence, often has the effect of the English definite article ; and, where ambiguity would arise without them, they may be used to express this. In the example given above, the accusative postposition is not expressed, but if we desired to be definite we would say. 26 THE NOUN.
which would be " Give that man the book." As also. ^1 %&. ^ 7\ #4x A soldier has come. The soldier has come.
The gateman has called the chair coolie3. 44. — For a full account of the postpositions, and the ■various euphonic changes that they undergo, see Chapter VI. For convenience, however, we give in this place the postpositions representing some of the various case relations of the noun. I Nominative or subjective by. t>] or 7r. ■•" "!' Genitive by &\. i Dative by £\7\] or <{];£-)]. Accusative by -§■. '. Instrumental by £.£■ Ablative by «], *<]^,or ti.5f. These postpositions are added to the noun and give the various ideas given by the above arrangement of cases, but undergo a variety of changes according to the final letter of the noun. 45. — Gender where necessary may be expressed by employing particles denoting male and female, or by the use of distinct words. Thus we have in the case of human beings : — A man, Afvf$], y-^, tffl. A woman, ^|^, uf*L ^^M]. A child, $ tl ; a boy, *}\J-f\ ; a girl, TjJ^ § -fl. In the case of relations, different words are used. *>} v} *1, Father; 61DH, Mother. U" 61" ty*l » Grandfather ; tt v\ H . Grandmother. THE NOUN. 27 The gender of animals also is distinguished by particular names or by the prefixing of ^ male and &J- female. §, a fowl ; -fr^- a cock ; SJ-^, a hen. J», a bull or cow ; 7l }a bull ; Q 4s, a cow. , , -fr^\a male Q ^ \a female ^' a Pheasant ; ^*| /pheasant; ^ej /pheasant.
%£, a horse; ° ' >a,stallion ; ^ |a mare.
The particles &> and ^- are not employed alone and are never applied to human beings except as terms of ex treme contempt. If then we desire to speak of the gender of an animal without repeating its name, we say for the male ^--^- or -fr^j, and for the female, Q^ or ^Jj. i 7? A] * § *] H= S § 6H=. (Z7ior£
(me — to choose-order horse three (accu) brought.) " They brought three horses for me to choose from." o. ^^n H-M i^J £6r*l 51*. «l*!i- (that magnolia tree on five hundred blossom must be.) " There must be five hundred blossoms on that magnolia tree."
Note. — Must is not always rendered in this way. For its various renderings see Part II Chap. I. \ 3 Sec, 10. 47. — At times however, either for the sake of emphasis or to avoid ambiguity, it is desirable to express a plural idea ; and this may be done by the use of the particle ■§• affixed to the nouns, to which in turn may be affixed any one of the postpositions. *4i , Brother. *«. , Brothers. ■a:. Eye. Eyes. I. Horse. s*. Horses. * Flower. *#. Flowers. 6JS Sheep. tft> Sheep. AS": , Deer. *£#. Deer. This particle ^- may also be used without the noun, and is then generally affixed to an adverb in the sentence, and gives a plural idea. As:—
quickly {plur) come. Please come quickly. THE NOUN. 29
well (plur) do. Do it well. The particle ^f- used in this way, generally pluralizes the subject of the verb ; and in both the above sentences it shows that the request in the first case, and the com mand in the second, was addressed to more than one. 48. — Students in Korea soon begin to notice the con stant reduplication of nouns, verbs, syllables etc. In verbs it has the effect of signifying continued action, and is found frequently in onomatopoetic words, to designate sounds and the like, and in nouns it gives the idea of universality, or variety, As:— ^J ^ , Every house. £} Q , All colors or sorts. 3J-3S All places or everywhere. vfej-wj-ej-, All countries. 49. — These then are the various ways of expressing case, gender, and number, which may be employed if desired, and are at times used by Koreans even when ambiguity would not exist without them. It cannot however be too carefully borne in mind that as a rule Koreans do not express these distinctions. 50. — In a few cases there are distinctive word3 which have a plural sense. They are, for the most part, com pound words of Chinese origin, and to them again, if special emphasis is desired the plural ending |F may be added. 30 THE NOUN. As:— -TT.E. or Jf-S.# (rare), Parents. 4}^*- or ^Jt1-^-, Members of a family. ^ -tsl], Brethren.
Compound Nouns. 51. — There are of course a large number of compound nouns, and these by the use of Chinese may be formed at will. They may consist either of nouns alone, nouns and adjectives, nouns and verbs, or of verbs alone. A know ledge of the Chinese characters and their sounds in Korean, will enable the foreigner, not only to recognize these and understand their meaning at once, but also to form them for himself. We would then urge the student not only to learn these compounds whenever he meets them, but to analyze them, ascertain their derivation, learn the Chinese character and its Korean sound and thus be able when next he meets the same characters, though perhaps in different combinations, to recognize them at a glance. This study of words and their derivations will also be a great help in giving definiteness and precision to his style. 6t^, " Spectacles " from ©1 " eye " and ^ " a glass." &1*J, "Ophthalmia" from # "eye" and *I " disease." *i^I^. "Telescope" from ^ "thousand," ej, "li," and 7% a " glass." t!°l^- "Microscope" from *|, "exhibiting," p], " smallness " and 7§ a " glass." $}-*f, "Chemistry" from $}- "change" and if, " study." No attempt can here be made to give all, or even the most important of the words belonging to this class. The THE NOUN. 31 few that have been given above are sufficient to enable the student to understand this method of forming compound words, so that he can go forward and analyze these words for himself. A little care in this line will be a great help to him in his study of this class of words, and if from the beginning he makes a systematic study of all such words, in but a short time he will be able to understand without difficulty most, if not all the Sinico-Korean terms so much used in polite discourse. 52. — There are also a few words which are joined to verbs and sometimes to other nouns, making compound nouns having the sense, of "the work of" " doer" etc. Among these are ^, *£t>], Q, etc. The first two of these refer to the maker or doer of something, both have nearly the same meaning but are restricted in their use. *■&&], the more restricted, has properly the sense of " the worker in," " the maker of" and is affixed to the name of the thing made, or the work done. \J", the more generally used, is a termination equivalent to the Latin " ator," or the English " er," and may be added to almost any word with which work of any kind is connected. Neither of these terms are respectful and are only applied to artisans, coolies, or people whose actions have, in the eyes of the Koreans, brought them to that level. H "5"> Workman, coolie. n| *J t>] , A mason. jn.-g:-£, A chair-man. 7fl -^r XJ »1 , A tiler. £.% -3S A walker. 5:'Se,l> A pencil-maker. ^ ^t\£> A player, a trifler. ^■'SJo], A hooper. •fr^^t, A guard. "3?" 'S 61 > A charcoal-burner •%•:=£•, A farm-hand. •^'Sj-^o], A hotel-keeper. 32 THE NOUN.
4x^1 it. A (noiser) singer. &^ *J e>] , A cabinet-maker. vf 22,-jJ-, A woodman. 2J- *£ 6] , A hat-maker. ic^g 5. A gambler. .S.*^ *<£ 61 . A dissolute-fellow. With reference to the termination ^J, it may be said that its use varies greatly with the locality. It has properly the sense of " the work of," and is com monly joined to the name of the tool or instrument with which any work is done. By certain people, and in certain places however, its use has been very much enlarged and in the province of Kyeng Sang Do it may be heard affixed to almost any noun or verb. The following examples illustrate its proper use : — M\ V ^ , Needlework. ■^fMSL Ironing. ^j|*{ x^ Whipping. 3.U. Kowing. ^^l^. Fanning.
Verbal Nouns.
53. — In Korea there are two regular ways of forming verbal nouns. They are formed by adding n and 7] to the verbal stem. With the verb "§".£.. they will then be ■g" and ~t> 7] and we designate them verbal noun in "§", and verbal noun in ~$7]. While a large number of Koreans have come to consider these as synonyms, and to use them interchangeably, they are not the same, and good scholars never consider them so. The distinction made by the French missionaries in their admirable •'Grammaire Coreenne " should always be maintained. The noun in "g", is an abstract noun referring to th3. quality or attribute as love, hate, and fear. THE NOUN. 33
The noun in "$"7l, retains more of the verbal idea and is rather, the act of loving, hating, fearing, and would be used where we would employ either the infinitive of the verb, to love, to hate, to fear, or the present participle. It is about equivalent to the Latin Supine, being a verb in force and a noun in form and inflection. It can both govern and in turn is governed. In use it is generally employed as we would employ the ablative Supine. An examination of the following sentences will make this distinction plain. Illustrating the use of Verbal noun in ■§" : —
Fear belongs to cowards.
Honesty is a virtue.
Anger brinys trouble. Illustrating the use of verbal nouns in "$• 7] : — ,
It is hard tn forgive an enemy.
Now, it is easy to go round the whole world.
Loving such a man as that, is not hard. Illustrating the use of both verbal nouns together : — V S«l *^£*l Slfe *rl £-§■ *^3-r7i -fl*. It is easy for a man who has love in his heart to love others.
As death is before us, to avoid dying is impossible. 34 THE NOUN.
. . Names and Titles. 54. — A few words here about Korean given names and titles, may be a help to the student. The Korean sur names are but few and for the most part consist of but one syllable. A few, but five or six at the most, consist of two syllables. The total number of surnames in Korea, being under a hundred, can be learned with comparative ease. In writing their surnames they seldom use any but the Chinese character, and it is a necessity for almost any one who expects to have much dealing with Koreans, to learn these eighty or hundred characters. The ending 7r may be added to the surnames with the sense of the family, tribe, household of ', as 1]7r "The Min family" of'theMins," ej7r " The Yi family" "the Yis" etc. While it is perfectly proper, and no act of disrespect to use this ending in speaking of any family or person ; in their presence or in addressing them, it is not polite. Note : — This ending ?)- is also used in speaking of servants. It would not be proper in sending for your gateman to i&y — «M# ^ ivlar or "Call Mr. Sak." but— •T7T -£*>! £v|2r. "CallPak." It may be well here, however, to state that the ordinary Korean way of summoning a servant, is not to use the surname at all, but the given name or the office that they fill. To these surnames may be prefixed or affixed names of towns or places. If the name of the town precedes the surname, it signifies that the place mentioned was the original home of the branch of the family spoken of. In a country where surnames are so limited, this becomes a necessity. When the names of the place follows the surname it may have one or other of two significations ; that most THE NQDN. 35
common is, that the party referred to, is now, or was lately the magistrate of that place. Among travelling pedlars however, this same method has been adopted to designate their domicile. # ^ ^ ?r The " An Dong Kims," or the Kims of An Dong. 3* 3?r The " Chyeng Pung Kims." The " Chyeng Ju Yis." *\7\ The "Yern An Yis"
.1 f 3"tt 1 Cho Chuk San " means the Cho who is now, or was lately, magis trate at Chuk San. ef uL $* " Yi Ko Yang," the Yi who was, or is, magistrate at Ko Yang. Among pedlars — e| "?M1 " Yi Rang Gay " means that Kang Gay is Mr. Yi's home. ■S£ 2] -?f " Han Eui Ju," that Eui Ju, is Mr. Han's home. 55. — In connection with the Korean given names there appears to the foreigner an almost unlimited amount of confusion. He hears a man with whose name he is acquainted called by a name entirely differ ent, and is told that it is still his name, his given name. A boy whom he has known for years, marries ; and coming to pay his respects, sends in a card bearing a name that he has never before seen. This too, the foreigner learns is his -given name. This apparent confusion arises from tne fact that each Korean has several given names, and that by which he was known ■as a boy, is entirely put aside on his attaining manhood. 36 THE NOUN. We shall here speak of but three classes of names: the civil name, the name held during boyhood, and that given at marriage. The civil name is properly only found among the nobility and upper classes. It is the name by which the individual is legally known from boyhood up, and continues with him throughout life. It always consists of two characters, one of which will have been settled generations before, and all the members of the same generation of any one family will have this same character and will be called brothers. As:- 3^J£, 3 ^£, W£ Here the presence of the same character ;£., as the last half of all' their names shows that they are of the same generation. Their sons will be —
Here the second character Ȥ, is the same throughout. In the next generation it will again be the third character that will be the same and it will be <*]. As:- 3-S-3. ^^*|. 3**T And thus it alternates from the second to the third character of their names, the surname of course as in all Eastern languages coming first and the remaining character being left to the option of the parents. In common use among friends, however, this civil name is seldom used. As a boy, he has a boyish name, given him by his parents at his birth, which remains with him until his marriage." On this occasion, his parents again give him another name : that by which he was known as a boy is no longer used, and his friends now call him by his j$, or name given at marriage. At times, THE NOUN. 37
also, friends give complimentary names and nicknames of which we need not speak here. Here as in other things the times are making great changes. The old habits are passing away and the ad vantage as well jis necessity of maintaining one's individual ity is causing people more and more to use one name and that the civil. 56. — The titles by which Koreans are known and addressed : with the officials, follow th^ office held ; with those who are not officials, they are ^ *§■ (Mr.) /^ ^ (Esq.) A$ ^ (Eevered Sir) and many others. To these at times are added the honorific particle ^ , and we have tf ^ ^ , or *J $} ^ . More lately the terms -$= and ^*- have been used and we hear tJ -$=, ?} ^, etc. All these are affixed to the surname, and when used, the civil, or given name must be dropped. In addressing or speak ing of old men or those whose rank gives them the right to wear the jade button, we use the word ^} t£: and those whose rank gives them the right to wear the gold button, are spoken of ast|J^. But when these words are used, it is as independent titles without the surname. The use of the surname with either of these words is habitual among certain classes ; but is not considered good Korean and should be avoided. . 57. — One of the surprising facts which met the "Westerner on his arrival in Korea, was that the girls and women of the land had no names. Parents give a pet name to little girls as well as to boys, at their birth ; but after they have reached the age of ten, this name is no longer known. From this time on, they were known as "Mr. Kim's daughter " or even " Mr. Kim's girl baby ; " and strange to say the latter term is the more honorific. 38 THE NOUN. When there is more than one daughter in the family, they are distinguished by such words as : " big " (for the eldest), "second," "third," " fourth," etc. After marriage, they are still, o' en known by their hus band's name and title, with the word ^ or ^} (house) affixed. As:— 3 sl\ ij}- % Mrs. Kim. .V\ # ^ 'ij Mrs. Yi Champan or Lady Yi. ■Q M # *J Mrs. Han. Of these two, 1} is the more honorable. They may also be designated by the name of the place from which they came when marrying, prefixed to such words as nj- \j or n]- i|L ej- ^ , if the person is old ; or to t>} 7] v) or *} #] , if young. As:— jo.^ nj-^ or ja. ^ tfj- e. 9} vj , The old lady who came from Ko Yang. ^ 4 oHor^i b}7] *], The young lady from Kong Ju. It should always be remembered in connection with the names for women and girls that it is not customary in Korea for any except relatives or those extremely intimate to ask concerning the female members of another's family. Christian civilization has however been changing all this. The baptismal names are more and more being used. The individuality of the woman as distinct from her husband is being asserted. All over the land it is more and more becoming the custom for the women to have their distinct names. In fact now the new laws of the Empire require it. 58. — Before closing this subject, a remark or two on the Korean employment of the word J£-$l that has come into THE NOUN. 39 Each common and erroneous use by foreigners, should be given. This term Jf £1 was properly equivalent to the English title, — " Lady " : and if strictly used could only be applied to the wives of high officials. Even then it was not in common use, and the official himself would not use it in speaking of bis own wife ; unless perhaps in addressing a foreigner, who, he feared might not under stand another word. It would however have been proper in speaking of the wife of a high official to. use this term where in English we would use " Her Ladyship." A change has been brought about of late years and it is now proper to refer to the wife of another as -^£1 but never to use the term in speaking of one's own wife. In speaking of one's own wife the terms ^i tj» ^t ^|"» Sb etc., would be used ; or in addressing an inferior, t>\ #J , &]■ 7] 4*} , "J- -10 PRONOUNS AND
CHAPTER IV.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
59. — With reference to Korean pronouns, it is doubtfur whether such in the true sense of the word really exist. It is so easy, with most of the words used for pronouns to trace out their original meaning, and to show that they are really nothing but nouns which have either become restricted in use to one or other of the three persons, or else are convenient words, either by the designation of one's self or others, for rendering honor or its opposite to the person spoken to or of ; that we are tempted to believe that by diligent research we should find that all the pro nouns were originally nouns. We are strengthened in this idea by the fact that the native grammarians arrange their words into but three classes, including all pronouns under the head of nouns. For the sake of convenience, however, it has been deemed best to treat of these words by themselves ; and in the consideration of Korean pro nouns and pronominal adjectives, we will divide them into Personal, Keflexive, Interrogative, or Indefinite, Demon strative, and Distributive. peonominal adjectives. 41
Personal Pronouns. 60.— The First Person. The word most commonly used to render the first person is vf, M|, or tfl y\ ; many other words, however, are also used, as, >£ J\, *fl 7r, & vl> el Af If -£ $1. as well as many others. ^ 3\ is properly " one's self " ; XI] 7r, " this one," & Q " the little man." ■f- e| or -f- e] 7r, is used to express the first person plural ; and to this may be added the plural ending §■ which hardly makes a plural of a plural, but simply emphasizes the we. -$• ej is not restricted in meaning, to the first person plural, but is a somewhat more polite way than uf , of expressing the first person singular. For Ex : — f- v\ ^3, lit. "our house," means, "my house," " home." ■f* *\ tt $!» " our wife," means, *' my icife." It would hardly be considered proper to say ifl ^ $} . 61. — The Second Person. The equivalents of a pro noun of the second person, from the very nature of the case, are extremely numerous : the most common is *^, vi| or M| y\. This word however has a low or disrespectful meaning, and while itis applied for the most part, tononebut inferiors it is still the nearest to a true personal pronoun of the second person. When we come to use any other word, it at once assigns a rank or grade, which 1^ doe3 not, and hence it has been used for the second person in addressing the Deity, as in the form used in the Lord's Prayer by some. A study of the true, meanings of any of its equivalents, some of which are given below, will at once make plain the impossibility _of„ using any one of them, 42 PEONOUNS AND and the necessity of either using vj in this case, or of not translating the word thou at all, but of replacing it by some other word, such as ■$■ {Lord). Other words that may be used to represent the second person are >£ H|, -^, "^ 41. 3. ^, (Elder brother), ^ JjL -$m, (Aged father). The plural of the 2nd Person is uj $\ to which, like -^ V], may be affixed the plural ending -g-, and with the same effect. 62. — As in the case of nouns, so also in the case of these pronouns, they may be followed by postpositions ; but, like other nouns, the postposition need not be affixed un less the sense demands it. Euphony has played more than its accustomed havoc with the postpositions when affixed to the pronouns vf , -^ V\, *1> ^ $J. Various contractions have taken pkce, so that it may be said that the personal pronoun and post position have become one ; and no matter what may have been the condition of affairs originally, the contractions as they exist to-day, present us with what may be termed a declension. For the convenience then of the student, we give these pronouns with their postpositions affixed, and the contrac tions they have undergone though it must be remembered that in many cases the uncontracted form is preferable. Stem. uf- I. Norn. MjorMj7> I. Gen. vffij contr. into. ^ My. Dat. 4*1*1 » » ^...Tom Accus. vf {| „ „ ^ Me. Instrurn. vf .£. S. »» .. ^ 2c... -By me. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 43 Stem. -^-ej We. Nom. -f^7> We. Gen. *f-^JS| contr. into. -f-e]...Our. Dat. 4^1^71] „ „ -f ej7l]..To us. Accus. "f^H Us. Instrum. -f-^JS. ~.By us.
Stem. vf Thou or 3'ou. Nom. M] or U]7r Thou or you. Gen. i=| SJ contr. into. vi| Thy or your. Dat. v] 2] 7i] „ „ n| 7i] To thee, or to you. Accus.' i-i !§ Thee or you. Instrum. t]s By thee or by you.
Stem, 1.-JJ] You. Nom. t13£l or i^3q-7|- You. Gen. m\S\ contr. into. *--] $]...Your. Dat. ^J]S]71] „ „^J|7fl...Toyou. Accus. ^UJJ You. Instrum. ^JJS. By you.
63.— Third Person. There is in Korean, no third personal pronoun ; and we are safe in saying that this language has no equivalents for he, she, it, they, etc. The words and phrases that foreigners are apt to use in the place of these pronouns are in no sense their equivalents. We do not mean to say, that the phrases and sentences in which those equivalents are used are not good Korean ; but we do mean to say that they are not true translations of the sentences which they are meant to represent. 44 PRONOUNS AND For Ex : — Among the words, most commonly used by foreigners, and by Korean students of English, to re present these terms, are the. Korean demonstrative pronouns either with or, without an additional word as 3J, or A]-g, and , ,.., has been taken as the equivalent of . . He has come. The sentence given above is correct enough Korean, but it does not mean \" he has come ; " and never can be properly used where we would employ those words, it means simply. That man has come. Again ts| 3J 7r *J JL M *h does not means. " Bring it ; " but " Bring that ; " Where in English we use the personal pronouns of the third person, it is .always when immediately speaking of the person, thing, or place represented by the pronbun ; and when in Korean we do this, the pronoun is not translated. ■'-.". ■■■■-• He has come becomes then simply, 5J-4«. Bring it is simply, 7r^ ■£.*=! ^)-. In places where special emphasis is needed, or where in contrast, one party or thing is spoken of with the personal pronoun, a circumlocution such as " the person spoken of," or either a demonstrative, or reflexive pronoun may be used. The few examples given below will help to illustrate this point: — PEONOMINAL PDJECTIVBS. 45
Mr. Song came yesterday and said he could not let me have the money.
If you give me money don't let him know about it. Wife ^Fjlji H"Hfe ^-ta. He ridicules his father but he loves his mother. ■%-S. A7^ i^Jt **]£. B>7l| H^V^^ t^
J/1 2/ott see the Amah tell her to come ; she has forgotten the baby, and he's been crying a long time. »J*61 2^#-t- JiSte 'Hi n^SL 7\M *>}*!
Have you seen Mr. Kim lately i No, he went to Chemulpo and has not come back yet. M-fe ell QQ ** #5133 "tts ^& *l^ ttfl
I mtcK ^ay you all this month, but he won't pay till next month. >
Wo, my brother is the merchant : he is the teacher. 64. — These then are the various ways thart Koreans have of expressing the first, second, and third persons ; but it must not be forgotten that their use is much more restricted by the native thau by the foreigner. For the most part it is left entirely to the surrounding circum stances, or to the context, to decide what may be the subject or object in the sentence. Throughout this work, in many places where we have translated I, it might equally well have been he or you, or vice versa. Of 46 PKONOUNS AND
coarse with reference to the second person, one is so often desirous of being polite or of assigning to the person spoken to his proper station, that words are much more frequently used to represent the second person, than any other. Eeflexivb Pronouns.
651 — There are a few words in Korean that are used with or without the personal pronouns given above and have a reflexive sense. They are :— *1, *fl, m\-, and ^^. These words have properly the sense of self, one's self, himself, etc. There are several other words that also have this same reflexive idea : 3&t] (properly), -£.^S (of itself ), £ -ft- or]^3. (with his own hand), -3^*]-^, (of itself), and *f ic (by nature). These latter cinnot be called reflexive pronouns, those first given, only are such. Bat these which are really adverbs or nouns with the postposition jg. are given here as they have the same effect. The word A^S. (mutually) may b3 termed a reflexive pronoun, and will be rendered into English by each other or one another. The word 3j ^ may in a sense be termed a reflexive pronoun. It has the sense of " either this or that," " both," and is used largely when comparing two people or things etc. It can sometimes be translated by the English " each other." * 39 6l U- Xl X\ 6l u. f ^S ^ar as use 's concern6^« th& 2Ki'!_«ijfc^-» V"^ i suver dollar and the paper <£7|^ *j* X4t- [ dollar equal each other. I'RONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 47 6MA!" ^^^l 13'5?- [As for the Emperors of Ger- ^"^|7l- ^Q-fe- $\ ;J; | many and Kussia, in rank, X &• I ^e orie equals the other. This same reflexive idea is given to certain verbs derived from the Chinese, by prefixing ;$ as .^^l "$".£.> (to sell one's telf ) ; ^*J "§".&., (to lance one's self); ^^'1F£L, (to obtain by one's self) and many others. (For examples please see Eeflexive Pronouns. Part II.) Interrogative or Indefinite Pronouns. 66. — All Korean interrogatives have also an indefinite sense : hence, what would be two classes in English, form but one in Korean. They are : — if-, ^=f-, ^p-7r, -ft, -H7r, Who, some one. t>] V , Which, a certain, some. 51 "^i, Which, what kind of, a certain. $J, What kind of, a certain. -^•-*, What, some. ■¥"$i> What, something. Of these Jf, in its various forms, and Jf-§| having more of a pronominal than an adjectival use, may be joined to any of the various postpositions, and when this is done like the personal pronouns they undergo various contractions. For convenience, then, they are given below with the various postpositions and their contractions. Stem, -T1- or ^=| Who or some one. Nom. y?!- or ^7}- Who or some one. Gen. JrSj contr. into ^=] Whose or some one's. Dat. ^=-^71] „ „ -^J71| ... To whom or to some one. Ace. "t- § or yt1 % Whom or some one. Instr. -r^S or -^ic By whom or by some one. 48 PKONOUNS AND Stem. JpSJ.. What or something. Nom. J^fcj or Jf-6}*] What or something. Gen. -^-6^1 Of what or of something. Dat. ^.a^j7i] To what or to something. Ace. -^ t>] •§ contr. into ■^■^•- What or something. Instr. -^-6^s » » -t^-Ic. By what or hy something.
67. — &]ir, $1^ and -^r^, being always used adjec- tively, cannot be united with the various postpositions. If it is desired to use these as pronouns it can only be done by joining them to such words as A}g, 6], jj{, etc. The distinctions between these are not always observed by Koreans. $3^ means rather, what kind of, or indefinitely a certain. fr) V> Means rather, which of a number. ■?■•£, Has the idea of what.
As:- 5J^ Arg *]&. What kind of a man is he t HV *rf oli. Which man is it * ^ ■¥■£ *rS ol£. What man is that ? The answer to the first would tell whether the man was good or bad, rich or poor ; the answer to the second simply decides which one of a number ; while the answer to the third states whether he is a farmer, labourer, or what bis business is. In using these words indefinitely an adherence to these distinctions should be aimed at, though it is not always possible. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 49
68. — These interrogatives, may be made still more indefinite by affixing to them the Korean equivalent of the English either or whether. As -T-^vf, JfTt'^.*], (A contraction of -^t1 *>1 ^1 *1 ) > ^P'S'^d*!. (A contrac tion of Jp^f- <£ ^ A ) . W «FS. These really have rather the sense of any one whatever, whoever, and the other pronouns may be treated in the same way, with a like result. 69. — It has been said above that the interrogative pronouns take the place of the indefinites ; but the pro noun t>\3. (any) has an indefinite sense only, and may be used both adjectively, and pronominally. When used pronominally it may be joined with any of the various postpositions. Like the other indefinites it may be made more indefinite as in If 68. 70. — Some of the numerous distributive pronouns are as follows. ■ej 3j . (some) signifies a part or portion of anything. ""^...■ci^ or 'e|3Jh:..."eJ2j$2: are equivalent to the English " some one " or " some others." 'Jj, (other, others, another) applies to people generally, as distinguished from oneself. ■^h 3. Si jI-tE-, -&, (all) may be used almost inter changeably. *J- and J2.3E are employed substantively, and at times we can use them with one or other of the postpositions, J2.:g. can only be used adjectively, and cannot therefore be united with postpositions ; -£, signifies all in the sense of the whole, with reterence to extent or duration. It is used solely as an adjective, and can only be used as a pronoun by the addition of some such word as ^, becoming then -g^ (the whole, the entirety). °4si> °i5J > °4®1 *], (several, a good number, many). 50 PEONOUNS AND The first form alone can be employed as an adjective ; and to the other two only, can the postpositions be affixed. v\-c}, ^| (every), 7$ (each separate) and <*] (apiece) are all distributive indefinite pronouns and may at times be used interchangeably. They differ, however, in their use in some respects. oj-t:]- and 9] are, respectively, the pure Korean and Sinico-Korean equivalents for the same idea. oJ-r|> should then, properly, be only used in connection with pure Korean terms, and always follows the noun which it distributes. 9) On the other hand can only be used with Sinico-Korean terms, and ' precedes its noun.
Note. — While with most words this rule is rigidly observed, there are exceptions with these terms, and we do find °}tfr at times acting as distributer for a Sinico-Korean term, and ?| , for a pure Koreau ; but this is not elegant. ?} and nj-i:]- have properly the sense of every, and refer to the separate individual parts constituting a whole, regarded one by one. ?] precedes while of-c}- follows the word it limits. Zj- on the other hand, refers rather to each separate individual ; and denotes every one composing a whole, considered separately from the rest. £\ generally means at a time, together; but used with the pronoun "$"vf , has the sense of one at a time or each. Quite often we find this used together with Z|r, oft:]-, or *|. It may also, at times, have the sense of eich when standing alone. PBONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 51 Give three each,, /JJ4J 4^«h • or Give three of each.
,, . /That CSubst. and t>] , This (Subst. and Adj) x^..(near). *>(M\ Adj).
G^.ThistSubst). ^7A JX^J, That(Subst). , . \ fTodo it in .3. 21 Till thatw way. -al . (|To be thai *>]^4i JlTobeso. ^X^ J I way, thus. e]eJ*UThiskind of. }••• O.Bi*WThatkindof. t>]£\ JJSuch as this. •7 €\ J \Sach as that.
<"]21 Hln this way, .3.31 Win that way, oleWl thus- ^*mi * a 3J^1 A thus c]^j. Here. ^ 1*1, There. {By this way, ^^-1 a. a^s{ By that way, t] elS. I hi ,ther. thither.
Note.— From these three words again, have been derived three ex clamatory demonstrative pronouns expressing disgust. Tiiey are, &, 2. and SL. They are much used, but only as exclamations of disgust, «nd cannot be called elegant Korean. Ex. &%, This fellow. PBONOMINAIi ADJECTIVES. 53 73. — In Part II. it is stated that there are no relative pronouns in Korean, There are, however, two words tbat have, by some, been classified as demonstrative pro nouns, and that in a sense hold this place. They are the words 7$ and v\. They are only used with relative par ticiples, and may be said to express that which, he who, etc. The " which " or " who" being then considered the subject of the verb contained in the preceding participle. It must be remembered, however, that the employment of these words is largely restricted to books. 54 NUMERALS.
CHAPTER V.
NUMEEALS.
74. — From the very nature of the case, the conditions of the Korean language present us with two sets of numerals. The one pure Korean, the other Sinico- Korean. The pure Korean numbers carry" us only as far as ninety-nine, and above this we are forced to rely entirely upon those derived from Chinese. The pure Korean numbers may serve either as substan tives or adjectives, and a few of them have two forms, which may be termed, respectively " substantive form," and " adjective form." With the number "frvf the sub stantive form can never be used adjectively, in all the others it may ; but the special adjective form can never take the place of the substantive. To the substantive forms may be affixed the various postpositions, but this of course cannot be done with the adjective forms. Com monly the adjective forms are only used as high as six. Of course the rule given before, concerning the use of Sinico-Korean and pure Korean terms, holds here also : and properly the pure Korean numerals can only be used qualifying pure Korean nouns. NUMEBALS. 55 When the substantive form is used substantively it does not qualify the noun as an adjective ; but stands in apposi tion to, and follows it. This being the case, when this is done, we may often find a Sinico-Korean word standing in apposition to a pure Korean numeral substantive. . The adjective an J substantive forms from one to six are given below.
Adjectives. Substantives. § f M- One. ^- it Two. >M] /JJ Three. M| ^j Four. 5t *}± - « Five. SI <4± • Six- 75. — The numerals derived from the Chinese have but one form, and that adjectival. Until we get above ninety- nine they may only be properly used with Sinico-Korean words, and must always precede the words which they qualify. When a substantive form is desired, it can only be rendered by the use of some other Sinico-Korean word, or one of the numerous " Specific Classifiers " some of which will be given further on, which word will then stand in apposition to the noun. As in the case of the pure Korean numeral, so also here, when this is done we may have a Sinico-Korean numeral, qualifying a Sinico- Korean noun, which latter stands in apposition to a pure Korean noun. In paging, figuring and numbering, the Chinese characters themselves are used, and one seldom meets with the Korean numerals spelled out in the On- mun. Even in Onmun books, the paging will be in 56 NUMERALS. Chinese characters, and quite often in letters written in the native character, where numbers are mentioned, the Chinese characters may be used. 76. — We give below a list of the Korean cardinal numbers, giving first the Chinese character, then the pure Korean, and lastly the Sinico-Korean.
Korean. Sinico-Korean. — tM- ^ One. — ;f ....*] Two. = 3J ...... # •• Three. \S SI •• * ...... Four. 2 ^2 A Five. * *S * • Six. ■t "£ ^ ^ Seven. A *J& % Eight. % ■** =7- Nine. -f- ^ •$ Ten. -f — ^"^H- -y y Eleven. +n % # •$ °1 Twelve. Etc. H+ £.fs 61 -$ Twenty. Zl-f — £. "§• -f M- — 61 -$ S2 ...Twenty-one. ~+H £.■£# °1 ^ 61 ...Twenty-two. H+ ^£ #^ Thirty. Ba-f- «F £... •• •* ■$ Forty. 5+ ^ i>3 Fifty. ^C+ <*1 *..-.'. $■ >a Sixty. -tl+ ^ £ ^^.. Seventy. A+ ^ ^ *J- >3 Eighty. %■+ 61"£ =f-^ Ninety. NUMERALS. 57
U SJ or &J ?J One hundred. ~ "g" o] ?J Twohundred. = U # ?J ...Three hundred. |2Jff .../$» SJ .Four hundred. 3£"g ! £. *J Five hundred. ■f- ^ or ^^ One thousand. ^=f- °1 ^ Two thousand. $§ tft or &J 'Jt Ten thousand. -* 6l ni (Twenty — « "*; .'"■' ^ \ thousand. , -.„ ,, „, ». *j (One hundred +^ -Stt ««**■•■{ thousand. "gfjfl SJ ft or ^2. ...One million. =fM ^ ^ oi- M ^ ...Ten million.
Specific Classifiebs.
77. — As has been said above, the Korean numeral has both an adjective and a substantive form. Its adjective form may be used in direct connection with the word which it limits, when it precedes it; but the Korean much prefers to place the numeral with some other word, which stands in apposition to the noun limited, after the noun. As in English, we speak of so many "head of cattle" so many "sheets of paper," so also in Korea is this form used. It is, however, carried much further here ; and we find a large class of words that are used for this purpose. They have been variously termed " numerals," " auxiliary numerals," "classifying numerals," and "classifiers;" but it seems to us that the term "specific classifiers," answers more nearly the demands of the case. The following list of those most commonly in use, will greatly aid the stu 58 NUMERALS. dent ; and we would urge that he take pains to make himself intimately acquainted with all, and with their use, as a mistake in this line is extremely ridiculous in the eyes of the Koreans.
7fl> ©> Numeral for almost all small things, or of things of which a number may be used. 3J, Piece, roll, bolt. Used for all piece goods. 2j , Set as of books. ■^, Volume, numeral for books. Also a measure of paper consisting of twenty sheets. 9^9], Pair, numeral of all things that are made in pairs. oj-e], Numeral for all animals. «$. Numeral for men. }J-, (A grain). Used for almost all extremely small things. ^J , Numeral for hats, mats, etc. ■»J , Suit, suite, a complete set, an outfit. Numeral for
JJ-, The same as TfBf, used for things made in pairs and also for books. *$ , The same as *J-3,. Numeral of things that one grasps in using. Jg, Numeral for horses and oxen. Also used for %q.v. sQ, Slice. Used of dried beef and fish, etc. Also, Page, chapter, book. ■*$•, Brace, couple, pair. Of animals and things that go in couples but whose usefulness is not impaired when used singly. -^ or z^, Bag, sack. Used of grains, etc. NUMERALS. 59
n$, Numeral for flocks, broods, crowds, etc. A company, a crowd, a flock. *g t>] , Measure of paper.' ' 100 ^f. Numeral of all large tound things, as,— pumelos, loaves of bread. ^., Bundle. Numeral of things bound together. X}3L The same as ^ . Numeral for all things that are grasped in using. ^, Numeral for one of pairs. *J, Sheet, leaf. Numeral for such, and for letters and notes. Used also for chapters of a book. Sf., Numeral for houses, tables, chairs or anything that sets firmly on a broad base. Q, Piece, numeral for parts of anything. ^, Numeral for boats, and ships.
78. *— The following are a few examples of the use of the above words. A- *1 "£ 7fl*r JL^ef" Buy a pear. H ^J ■ ^ 4l ^ ^ M *kv& You nad better buy a pair 5.^j4i, of straw shoes. ofe|. 7iJ ^ n|-e}7]. Ajs. Two dogs are fighting ,yj-3r£.. together. °J. fcJ_jL ^f^^f 3} °$ How many Japanese sol- o] £.. diers are there ? . ij"- -^"^-S" £ U H ^H Do not drop a single grain *J t»|-5|-. of corn. ^•. "^ ^J **] *| S °] •¥■ ^ There are two pair of «>] §l4i- pigeons on that house. ^ *+.2. £ ^-«| #>M ti What is the price of a v\£.. bundle of wood ? *}5L- 3£<*] "£ *1"S 3c There is not a single pen 4£- 7j aj^,. _ that can be used. 60 OTJMEBALS. *
Kobean Monet.
79. — When foreigners first came to Korea the Koreans had only, what is known in the East as " cash " as a cir culating medium. Around the capital the " five cash piece " and in the interior the old one cash piece were in use. The unit of currency, however was not the cash. Foreigners coming from China had taken this as the unit, and had thus made for themselves and others much con fusion. The native unit was the ^j= (nyang) or one hun dred cash, this was divided into ten § (poon) or ^J (nip) This last stood simply for " one piece " (of money) and ^ might as a consequence, referring to the old cash , mean either simply " one cash " or referring to the new cash mean one fiva cash piece. On account of this difficulty, it was quite customary, when speaking of prices of small things which cost only a few cash, when the word § was used, if the " five cash piece " was meant to precede the price by the words ■«£.£..
•$£. *§, meant five cash.
«J-.£. tSi meant ten cash.
In the reading of old books this must be kept in mind as well as the fact that before the introduction of money, barter was commonly assisted by the use of gold and silver according to weight in ^ and ^. NUMERALS. 61
80. — After the advent of foreigners, the yen and Mexian dollar came into constant use. Now of course the monetary system of the whole Empire applies equally here. The old Korean terms are still sometimes used and confusion has arisen from a lack of uniformity. In certain sections the ^j= is used to designate twenty sen, in Seoul it most commonly means two sen and in most of Korea ten sen. More and more however the terms ^J for yen and ^ for sen are coming into vogue all over the country.
Ordinal Numbers. 81. — Just as there are two sets of cardinal, so there are two sets of ordinal numbers. They are formed from the pure Korean by affixing XI) to the substantive form. In the case of the first, generally the term ?ft replaces "f"vf . They are formed from the Sinico-Korean by prefixing the term tS|| From one to one hundred then they are as follows : — Korean. Sinico-korean. ^Xfl •eflfcj First. •3fX|} ts|]«>] Second.
Korean. Sinico-kokean. «g-t*fl tfl^o] Twelfth. *£.#*fl -cfff]^ '• Twentieth. £.#£*H ^l6l^y Twenty-first. ^.H-l*fl ^M^vM Twenty second. ^^X|) ^l^ Thirtieth: «j-:£Xfl -eU^ Fortieth.
the month it is, the inquirer would again ask " Which seventh ? " and the reply would be, " The first seventh," " the seventeenth," " or the twenty seventh " as the case might be. This practice is not universal, but quite common and follows out the Korean custom of using as few words as possible. We have then the following as the days of the month.
Korean Sinico-korean. ^.-$•3. i^^J The first. ^.6l#or SJ3P, 2.6]^ „ second. 2,Af$ JL#^J third. j£.Vri|f 3.^"^ i fourth. J^*I ii6J fifth. ^$J*| A^r^ sixth. ^*1l 3.^ „ seventh. 3^H?| j£.^aj „ eighth. '£ftfi*l if^ , ninth. 3,%% J^|J tenth. %-$£. ^QQ eleventh. J£§ ^SlQ fifteenth. ^.^•^ *>]$<£ „ twentieth. <£.-?■ 1fS 6l"y^^J ». twenty-first. <£.-?-'»|^f "l'SM^T- » twenty-second. ^£ #-3&J „ last day of the month.
84. — If we drop off the ^., which precedes the first ten of the above days of the month ; the names of the days may also be used to express duration of time : and "$".3L, or &J &J, may mean either one day or the first day ; NUMEEALS. 65 ^$, or ^£|, may mean ten days or the tenth day ; i|, or -^ &.Q, fifteen days or the fifteenth day. Often when used this way, they will affix such words as ~Q, •^■^h meaning space, duration. -Z&-&, meaning the last day of the month, cannot of course be used in this way. 85. — Until recently Koreans divided their day into twelve, instead of twenty four hours ; and, in speaking of the hour, they did not as we do, refer to the end of the hour, but to the whole time covered by it. Thus i*], which is the Korean hour which comes in the middle of the day, and corresponds to our time from eleven a.m. to one p.m., means neither, eleven, twelve, nor one o'clock, but the whole time from eleven to one. To say then, that you will meet a person at jSs.*]> or noon, is extremely indefinite. If one desires to be more definite the terms ^ " the beginning," -§• " the middle," and ^ or 3J- " the end" may ba used: Ji.-*1.£., will then be a little past eleven, £.*] ^*, about twelve, and Sl*\ $$, a little be/ore one. The times of the night were known throughout the country, by the five watches ; the beginning of which were signalized at each magistracy, either by drum beating or horn blowing. In the farming sections, where sun dials and anything resembling a time-piece is unknown, such primitive terms as " sunrise " and " sunset," " when the sun is high in the east " or " low in the west," the " first " and " second cock-crowing," are used to mark the time. The introduction of foreign time-pieces, however, has changed all this ; and the foreign hours are marked by the use of the adjectival numerals, either pure or Sinico 66 NUMERALS.
Korean, with the word />] (time, or hour). It should he noted that while the Sinico-Korean numerals may be used ; the pure Korean are more commonly heard. The minutes are represented by the word .g. together with generally the Sinico-Korean numerals ; but either may be used. In speaking of the time then, the hour preceded by its numeral come3 first, and then the minute preceded by its numeral. As:— The difference between " a.m." and " p.m." can only be marked by such words as, " before noon " and " after noon," " morning " and " evening." Fractions and Multiples. 86. — Fractional numbers are not used by Korean to the same extent as by foreigners. We find such words as «}■ and *J# to express half, and ## or "half, half," to express a quarter. Other fractions may be expressed by the use of -g- "a part," which being Sinico-Korean generally requires corresponding numerals. <*-§■ *1^J» " Four part-of, one " =One fourth. .£.-§■ *1 tf, " Five part-of, three " =Three fifths. •$-§• X]%r> " Ten part-of, six " =Six tenths. . NUMEBALS. 67 These same quantities may be expressed by the use of Pure-Korean numerals ; but if such is done, the post position must be used, and the result is clumsy and awkward. We would then have : — ^|-& "l -^-S- " Three part-in two part " = two thirds. *}%■& **] ^4- " Five part-in four part " =four fifths. -S- °*| "£-§• "Two part-in one part " = one half. 87. — Various words such as, "#, Cg.?}-, 7J*£, ^, ^f%, y] , etc., hold the place of multiples in Korean, and are affixed to the various numerals. y] , being Sinico-Korean, must be used with the corresponding numerals ; the others, for the most part, being restricted to pure Korean numerals ; %-T£, ^fSf and -^-^ , may be used in dependently, without any numeral, and have then the sense of double. The following examples will illustrate the use of these words : — t>] jfej1 $i$\ 7\f^ Bring three times as much i.i--fe}-. as this. -?M] #^1 S) $!■&• The price is twice as much. 61 7}<*1 3.7& jfe]" 3.7] This is twice as large as %■# *]&.. that. ^1 ?!■*!-& 7f-& JL§ What you brought yester- %^~ b]SL- day was ten times what you have to-day. 88. — Interest on money is, for the most part, reckoned per month ; and the rate is expressed by so many cash per nyang, though the word nyang is universally left to be understood. The word «j (interest) is affixed to the amount and, "g^Mj, means one. cash interest or 68 p NUMERALS. "one cash per hundred" and equals one per cent. Interest at less than one per cent is seldom spoken of in Korea, and when it is, the term s| (equivalent to one tenth of a ^ or cash) is used. We hav3 then the following : — -£ej«i or ajej«i ^%. i^^ &°/oOt\o/o. "£€U or ^^^ 1%. ■£=.,§ or tfl^ 10%. Discount on bills or prices is expressed by the use of tjf-ej (^JjfiJ) prefixed of the numerals and means "tenth . discount " and we have the following : — |J"f}e| equals ^ or 10% discount. »1*^ » ^sor20% „ ^tel » isor40# AIM ., A s or 50% St^l .. A s or 80% „ 89. — The Korean word «J, which has by some been termed a multiple, has the sense of the English word time or times ; and is affixed to numerals of either kind. Then Weights and Measubes. 90. — To the student of Korean, a knowledge of all the weights and measures used in Korea is unnecessary; NUMERALS. 69 but a few words concerning those most commonly used may be of service. The one main difficulty everywhere was, that there was no one authorized and regularly acknowledged standard. In measures of small length, carpentering, etc., the %\ or what we might call foot, is the unit ; but the •^•:*f or carpenter's 7\, varies considerably from that used to measure cotton goods ; and this again from that used in measuring silks, satins, etc. Whatever the *]■ used, one tenth will be one *1 or inch, which is again divided into ten -g ; the *| and § varying of course with the *}. The -^-^ exactly equals the English foot of twelve inches. The 7\ used in measuring cloth goods, varies from eighteen to twenty-two inches, but the usual length is about twenty inches. In measuring cord, wire and the like, the *> (fathom or brace), the distance from hand to hand with arms outstretched ; in measuring depths> the Zj (man's height) ; and in measuring small lengths* quite frequently, the /*j (span) , the distance from thumb to middle finger, are used. The measure of distance, or 9{, has been said to be about one third of a mile, but the e| itself varies so much in different localities, that no definite comparison can be made. It is short among the mountains and long on the plains; and.it has been aptly remarked that the Korean ^f is hardly a measure of distance, but should rather be called a measure of the time taken to travel the distance ;( as, in ordinary Korean travelling with coolies and pack ponies, it averages an hour for every ten B] whgther they be long or short. 91. — The Korean weights were the same as the Chinese, and the t* or catty, was about one and one third English "70 NUMERALS. pounds. It is divided into sixteen % (nyang;, or ounces, which' are again divided into ten ■%', the ^ into ten §, the § into ten V{. In the measuring of grain still greater confusion existed. "The system used in the- country districts differed entirely from 'that used in' Seoul. The measures U3ed in the country were as follows : — ■Jen >*.=one 4£ or about one handful. Ten qgp=one S| '. Ten £|=one ^.' _;' ; Twenty ^=one ^ or S^ or one bag. Note.— The A is only used in computing government taxe3. The measures used in Seoul differed largely from these. It took three of the above €\ and a little more, to make one Sf^lS}. Ten jSj-SlS^, (commonly spoken of as ten ^ ) =One ^h Four ^"=one ^ or bag. This latter ^, contained about one and a half pecks. All tbis has however been now changed : standard weights and measures have been introduced throughout the whole land and correspond to those in use in Japan proper. Land was measured either by the amount of grain taken to sow it, (and from the above we get the measures -*| ^ t>] , oJ-*J »] , Sj 3} t>\ ) : or, as in some parts of the United States, by the number of days it will take to plough it. 92.— In closing this chapter on numerals, we would notice a peculiar use of the adjectival numeral "J, It is often placed before other numerals, or nouns signifying quantity, distance, amount, etc., to give an indefinite sense ; and may then be translated by the English word numerals.:;::: 7 J "about." >»-§■! placed after the numeral, has also this same effect and may often be used in conjunction with ■£, following the numeral or quantity which ^ precedes. Ex. :— , . J. ^el "£ '5">*J ^S) A- That house contains about sixty kan. *f *I £ £-■*& 2|^9 S His age is probably some- "$".£.. where about fifty. Note. — In the Chapter on nouns, as well as elsewhere, attention was called (to the fact, that the plural ending §, like the postpositions, was only to be used when its absence would cause ambiguity. We would here remind the student, that when numerals are used, (according to the rule] then given) unless special emphasis is desired, ¥ should not be used. Let him then, when talking Korean, not speak of five houses but five house, etc 72 THE POSTPOSITION. CHAPTER VI. THE POSTPOSITION. 93. — There is a large class of words, which are affixed to nouns, and show their relation to some other word or words in the sentence. Some of these have arbitrarily been taken and made to stand as case inflections or parts of the noun. For such an arbitrary selection, there can be no authority. If some are case inflections all should be taken as such. Such a method would, however, compli cate matters greatly, and it is far more simple to consider all these, as separate words or postpositions. Most of them were originally nouns or parts of nouns ; this, how ever, is not the place to enter upon a study of derivations and the original meanings of words, since we are neither making a language nor trying to force one that exists at present to conform to ancient and now obsolete rules, but taking a language as we find it to-day, and trying to systematize it and show how it is used. In this connec tion, it may be well to note that certain compound postposi tions, and other words; have in the course of time undergone changes ; and the form of the original simple postposition, from which these compounds were made, has been lost. Some have desired to change this and go back to the original and correct form. This, however, is not the part of a gram the postposition. 73 marian, who must take facts as be' finds them, and show perhaps the order of the change, but can go no further. We find three classes of postpositions which we will call Simple, Composite, and Verbal: Composite being made up of a noun and a simple postposition. Simple Postpositions... 94. — The simple postpositions are : — "]» 7rj *W Signs of the Nominative. »| The man who. S\ Of ; sign of Genitive case. SJ71], tt^Ii "*^>\Tot from, at, unto; Signs of the >a\ J Dative case. ^ In, into, to, at; called by some the sign of Locative case. -§• ... *.. Sign of Accusative case. 3. or ,£.2...... By, with, by means of, for ; Sign of Instrumental case. . ■ '_ ■*>} Sign of Vocative case. *f Mi, JL*| • From, at, since ; Sign of Ablative case. ^ ,., . ; As for, as far as, regarding ; Sign of Oppositive case. A?*1* To, up to, as far as. ■'■. e>y ...... Only, but, merely. 95.— Before we speak of all the various postpositions and their uses, it may be well to mention a' few of the rules governing the euphonic changes that these particles undergo, in uniting with the nouns. * The Korean word W*| is more than the English equivalent here given and means up to and including heing always used thus inclusively f the word it modifies. ... . -. 74 -THE POSTPOSITION. Nouns ending with tf or > generally interpose an|/» before the postposition : A few nouns in /- may inter pose 3z, but when this is done, it will be generally found that there are two forms, and that either the form in /<■ or % can equally well be used. Note.— We are pretty safe in saying that this difference between a| and *1, arises from what was originally a difference in the final letter of the word. No word can end in tt ; no 'word ending in A is pronounced as though it were an s ; consequently the distinction be tween words ending in A aid tr, was lost. It re-appears, when a postposition, beginning with a vowel is affixed. For example 3fc (&»0 pronounced now kat, was evidently originally pronounced with the sound of s. S (field) on the other hand evidently ended originally in c, which being unable to stand at the end of a word became A. When the postposition is added, however, the old difference of sound re-appears, and we have Jt*| for hat with the nominative ending ; and yfc *|for field. The Korean does not like to have the vowel £. (eu) in a syllable preceded by ,A, %, or 2 ; consequently in all _such places, this letter is replaced by § (" lower a"). In a fewcases of nouns ending in vowels, and some, ending in \3 , the letter o" is interposed and becomes the initial letter of the postposition. In many cases of nouns ending in vowels, contractions occur; but for the most part, these are not allowable in writing. 96. — »], 7J-, tytf- These three postpositions are all signs of the Nominative case, but (like all postpositions, as has been said before) are only used when the sense requires it. ft] may be joined to any noun ; and, according to the rules given above, may become X\, *], or *J. When preceded by a vowel the initial o may be dropped, and. without any initial consonant, it may be placed below its noun. THE POSTPOSITION. 75 7\ can only be used with nouns ending in vowels. With such, the postposition y\ is more commonly used than «>] , though the latter rnay always be used. tyM is an honorific, and is commonly used, for the Nominative case. At times, it is used to represent other cases ; but such a practice is wrong and should be avoided. a1*fl JLVi Arf b] ^^A- All the men you sent yes terday have come. 2M1 t^T^e'] Ml^fi.- The hats are terribly dear. 2 -ft*1] i-IM^r SSMs. Tigers are plentiful in Korea. y-i* <*sj|^ £.£ Tj^f-lT A- The King goes out today. 97. — The postposition «>] has also another use : it is added( to Kelative Participles in the sense oi—the man who, he who. Used in this sense, it is probably derived from §1, the W- having been elided ; and when so used, it can be followed by any one of the other postpositions. s^l-g-oj. He who came yesterday. 98. — S\ . This postposition means of, and denotes the Possessive case. According to the rules given above this may become JJ, or *], or, when preceded by a vowel, a contraction may occur. While, for the most part, any such contractions would not be allowable in writing, in certain words, prominent among which are the personal and interrogative pronouns, they are both allowable and common. ^fl Q £!"4t' My books have come. .£.£-£• yoS) ^itJ^lA- Today is the King's birthday. •3-^*1 >! -t •#$! °4 "§"-£.. I don't like the color of these clothes. 76 THE POSTPOSITION. 99. — S]7l], <£&], ^a], &\. These four all mean— to, from, at, unto, etc., and denote the Dative case. £]7i] may become $] 71] , *| 71] , and at times, simply 71] . ThiB last, although quite common in speaking is, with a few exceptions, not allowable in writing. S] 71] can be replaced by ^e] or "^ Sf , which have exactly the same effect, or te\, which is honorific. While these words originally meant to, unto, at, they are also used with verbs of receiving, in the sense of at the hand of, ot/rom. o]*l e]A]^J- 2] 71] ■^•H^- Give this book to Mr Yi. ^J"*]^ im ^Tr -&^i I received ten dollars from ^^J ^Skfc. Mr. Pak. •#^]^L A]^6] £]7l] *461 Books are valuable to one ^1 "§".&.• who wants to read. P^S-M S]7l] *f$l«>] ^ There are a great 'many ■=£ «>] >?t J» . servants at Min Pansa's. With Passives and Intransitives, S] 71] and ^t a] often correspond to the English word by. 3LSL $m ^j-^i. They were arrested by the police. 2^ -fe- S] 7^ -3? $J 4i- He was killed by robbers. (Here the Koreans use the intransitive, he died). 3- *k 5 tt ^ ^ 5$ A.- I was cheated by that man. 100.- — §■ is the sign of the Accusative case. It may become according to the rules given above g or •§, etc. After nouns ending in a vowel, it commonly becomes J . In many places where we would suppose it necessary, it is omitted : and its presence in a sentence where it is not really needed, has the effect of the definite article. j. A> f t>] 731 71] i 3- 5| £.. That man killed his dog. THE POSTPOSITION. 77 S] ^J o] 5f -§■ 4- 5J 4s.- The doctor gave the medi cine. Sometimes this postposition may also be translated by the English, for, about, of, to. ■a. A> f -§■ *f ^ Al 1 71 * (or he) waited five homB ■^ ^ 4:,. for him. *1 ^ a. A} f •#■ ^ *] «f- As for the book» Sive Jt to that man. S"3j ftl H^lf "$"tl 7^ We were talking about what "3" "$" M 4x- y°u *°ld us yesterday. *$■ <*i*8-:?-§' tt *$"$3^- We were BPeaking of. yQ1i just now. 101.— «i| The original sense of w) is in, into, to, at, and it may consequently many times be used for Si 71], It may be changed for euphony into "9J or *] . The distinction between «] and S\ 71] , is, while not always rigidly adhered to, that S] 7»1 cannot be used of any but animate objects. Thus you would not say *l S] 71] Jpqvf- ; but *l *i| -f- H e> (Put u in the book) ' you would not say *} S] 71] 7r 71 «]- but *} ll 7r 7l «H (^-^l H" **] "fsi A- My ring fell into the river. 51 S] ^ M **| pl "^ Ar S Do any Americans live in *te 61 7r5l<& V H 51 7r- your neighbourhood ? *l «fl 51 it- *' *s m tbe k°°k- _ -j ^i *| <,)] ijj 4. . There is plenty of that at home. =fl] Afl t] *l «]-. I*ut tnerQ in*° tbe box- «>] 5.^15 -^ U- ^l Jt^ Send tbis 3uck to the ojej-. kitchen. 78 THE POSTPOSITION. With intransitive and passive verbs, at times *f| cor responds to the English words by or with. ^k *"1 "^ 5J &• -^e was killed with a knife. •^T ^} 5 Ji- It was burnt by fire. Note— The distinction made in the use, on the one hand of ofl, H\ Til or ^t 6(| ; and on the other hand of g. ; with the Passive or Intran sitive verb is not always adhered to. Where the instrument is considered as the instrument in the hands of some one else, 3. may he used; but when it is considered as the agent accomplishing the result 6fl or 6] Til must be used. On this account we cannot say — 2 Bl^S £■ > DUt as seen above we may say — £ 51 $] Til ■$ S &• (he was arrested by the police). Of'course the distinction between ofl and S\ Til mentioned above 13 maintained here also. 102. — S. This postposition has the sense of- — by, with, by means of, for. It generally denotes that by which anything is accomplished — the instrument used. When joined to a syllable ending with a consonant, it becomes £l. 3,. This, again, according to the rules given above, may become j£, 3, A- 3> or jji 3.- When preceded by the consonant 2 , there is no need for the interposition of the vowel : 3 becomes 2c, and the e and U coming together have the sound of double I. Following a vowel, this becomes fe , and according to the rules given at the beginning of this chapter, it may also become :£., or £, or ^. ^flTr ^1^4: b}£ &4i- Now I am quite well. (I have been sick). t>] -f-iJ'.g: ?1-?- bjA. These apples are much nicer. ^SJ ^1*1 fe 2*5! &■• With regard to your letter it will do. *£% ^l^6,l 3&3145.- As far as the flowers are concerned, next month will do. This same postposition may be added also to verbal participles, when it has a conditional effect ; and may be used either of the present or future. Sometimes its effect is simply temporal. THE POSTPOSITION. 81 3e:61 & *} Mv: *1 *£ When my eyesight was Jt$t4i- good, I could read books (LiUEyes having been clear as far easily, as, books well I read). "twJ wr*r -His ^51 A- If you were to fall into the (Lit. Water in, having fallen, as for water, you would drown, will die). •lStH^J^fe-^aiA. If you don't take this, you (Lit. This thing not having eaten, will die. as for, will die). This postposition also may be, and is quite frequently, added to other postpositions. It emphasizes thereby, not the postposition, but the word to which that post position is joined. 106. — £.■=}. The postposition Ji^f has the sense of from, since, and refers to either time or place. In many cases, it takes the place of **|/^. It may be written Kote. — This word will often be found written with a T instead oft— but the best authorities write .we), and -t-bj is seldom met with to-day. ifc.|5 J,*? sJ^-"$'03Br- From to-day on, do your work well. ,3.*1<%»j ,JL«l 5.-9S 6]"H I have not eaten a morsel ^$j4i. since the day before yesterday. "^"^161 Q H 3L^ ifciSi He has been getting worse "5! ^ 31" &■• from the time you left. $£3i- It*] -f-Jr *?*] ^-g- From Hwangju to Chung- Q-^r "t£0]JL- wha there was nothing but mud. 107. — A?*] is the opposite of jfci and means, up to, as far as, to. It is inclusive. 82 THE POSTPOSITION. The English words to, up to, till etc are not the exact equi valents for A? *] , for it must always be remembered that the Korean word means up to and including. Thus -Q # ^A?^| jL^J- means read up to and including the thirteenth chapter. tfl7r 'S ^ ^7*1 -S.B1"H I offered, up to ten yen '6I"H ^i$t4i- bu* ne woa^ not take it. j^^ei" -*?*] 7\tf 5f >J"Jt We went as far as Oricole, and met them there. •g-o] || 7J--* A? /:] ^4i- The water came up to the horse's chest. iL^t^-s^ ^ 'S-*?*! Jt^- Rea<* to the eighteenth chap ter of John's Gospel. ^■^/^IS^^J-jL'S'^^i- He asked me to stay till the end of the seventh month. In a few cases, but rarely, this word is found written A?-3f- but it is not elegant and should not be imitated. 108. — e>y This postposition has heretofore been over looked as such. It may be joined to nouns, adverbs and is largely found added to verbal participles. It is exclusive in its use and has the sense of, — only, merely. With a verbal participle, and followed by the future of "§■ .£. and ^i it has the effect of the English word must. Followed by the future of any other verb it has the effect of stating what must be done in order to ac complish the act, or bring about the state expressed in the principal verb. tflJE.?]- $1*1 H 4J'°l6t: As there are cannon, is 4s"*l SIVH1- there any use in mere ' . bows? .... THE POSTPOSITION. 83 3. AJ-f e>J «£aJ ^-$J Since that man has been *H ^ 7]-^>»}.6|: 4-"?1 dead for some time, the ^4t- mere bringing of medi cine is useless. a^} 7J& *fg ^]6l= $J Such as that can only be 51 4i- found in the Palace. *1 *}<* U^i 3iM One must have a boat to 21 4x. cross the sea. 416] 1} 6} e£ -^ 5J 4. . Man must eat to live. ^ f ^^ 'if-tr ^7»)4i. You must work, to receive wages. S.i\y\- SIM^Y iz'Ml d£ I must have paper to write 31 A- on. ■^•fr7r Sfa> ^-^ /£7> The carpenter must come, *] S. "$"3! 4i- if we are to work together. ^■^«»1 M}7|- ^^f. 7r*> I must go to Ham Heung <2s2l4t- next month. 109. — vf . This word is properly a conjunction, but in many cases it takes the place of a postposition. It may be written o]vf and corresponds to the English "or," "either." Eepeated it is " either... or." Use'd alone as a postposition joined to a noun; it has the sense of, at least. Joined to verbs it has a concessive force. In this place, however, we have but to deal with it as a post position meaning, at least, even. M- M- 7r5l4t- I at least will go. *1 7? >*1 4 ^51 A- , Even this will do. • 7J-. This word, also, can hardly be called a postposi tion as it is not added to nouns. It is joined to almost any verbal form, and asks a question. It is not used so 84 THE POSTPOSITION. much in asking questions of another, as in soliloquies where one is in doubt or in hesitation. ^7> Qv\- Shall I go? ■y\ 7^ 7>e|$l7|.. Shall I take it away ? i§ n] -§-7|-. Will it rain to-day ? TS.^-71-. Is it good ? Sf ^o.'d *9 '41:71- If I take the medicine shall I get better ? ^-§■71- ^7r- Shall I eat it or not ? 100. — In many cases one or more postpositions ; may be combined, just as in English we use one or more pre positions. In these cases, for the most part, the effect of all the postpositions is manifest. The following sentences will illustrate this : — a *}^9\ *Ji S.fe -5- I can't doit with such skill "f"5j4i. as that man shows. c] *l en] aj *r ^ _£ ^J- That's something I have not t>] £.. seen in this book. ^-g- *o\tf fe ?]-T- *t As far as the king is con- - "$£.- cerned, he is a good man. ^J-£ £.£.tf $&£■■ He .'came from Japan. 9\M{ # S\ 7l]3. JL^ oj ej-. Send it to Mr. Yi. ^■ii- ^S. 7r7l7r £.$ It is well worth taking ^.^}4s,. great care, in paying a visit to the king. Composite Postpositions. 111. — The composite postpositions are nouns to which are affixed simple postpositions, and which are now in turn affixed to other nouns in a sentence and hold the same place as simple postpositions. A few of them are THE POSTPOSITION. 85 given below. It will be noticed that in some cases the simple postposition has slightly changed its form. ^^1. 1 Lower part of, Inside of, inside. or {Outside of, out I below. side. {This side of, on rOn the top of, this side, +«, 1 above. {That side of, on (Below, under that side. 5131. neath. {Instead of, in rAt the side of, place of. ^31. \ beside. Inside of, inside. Behind. {Outside of, out {Front of, in a*. side. front. After. On account of. Before. ^^-S'lBecauseof. At the end of. At the side of. 112. — In the use of these composite postpositions, originally the simple postposition S\ was placed after the noun before the composite postposition ; but this is no longer done except in a few very rare instances, the composite postposition directly governing the noun. fin front of the j. a}**" On account of * **•{ house. *3 *T°*1> J that man." Outside of ^] 4=.*i}, Inside the box. S ^t3]' thought, un expectedly. m. Jf-$|, On the table. ^'Sl-Sl6*], Instead of you. {Beneath the , . , f " On this side box. a"W1'{ of the road. 86 Verbal Postpositions. 113. — There are a number of verbal, participles that are now used as postpositions. They can follow a noun, or at times are preceded by a simple postposition. When met with, they can generally be recognized in a moment, but a few are given below as examples. ^f6>. " In behalf of," " For the sake of." ^l^a]:, "Because of," " On account of." !jj t>] , " HaviDg gone over," beyond. %m, " Having crossed," across. THE YEEB. 87 CHAPTER VII. THE VERB. 114.— It has been said, and that rightly, that the verb presents the greatest difficulty which the student has to meet in the study of Korean. This difficulty arises not so much from the great variety of forms to express time and mood, through which the verb may be carried : as from the number of nouns, adverbs, conjunctions etc., which may be joined to it, slightly changing its meaning, or from the way in which any verb can play into almost any other. No fully adequate classifica tion of these various words and forms has as yet been made. They have been joined to the verb, and most of them classed under the general head of terminations. Admitting, as all those in the verb form do, of being put in turn through a complete conjugation, the whole subject has presented to the student, an almost impas sable barrier. If, however, we can take these various forms, separate them into their elements, and show rules by which they are joined, matters will be greatly sim plified. An attempt to do this has been made in the follow ing pages, and while the writer realizes how inade 88 THE VEEB. quately this has been done, he trusts that the classification aimed at and begun, will enable the student not only to carry it to its completion, but to gain a firm grasp of the verb in all its forms. 115. — One thing to be remembered in connection with the Korean verb is its absolute impersonality, and its entire lack of number.. This was hinted at, while speaking of the Korean personal pronoun. The same form is used for first, second, or third person, singular or plural, and, as has been said before, these distinctions are left to the context. 116. — There are a few forms, which from the very nature of the case, can only belong to one or other of the persons. In such cases, however, the person is expressed rather in the sense of the verb than in its form. For example, in the expression for direct command, one does not " command " oneself, nor can the " command " be said to be in the third person, it can only be in the second. As :— a} /^ ■ v\ 7f *%. (Go quickly). Here of course this can only be in the second person ; and as in English, it may be addressed to one or more. If one is desirous of showing that the direction is addressed to more than one, it may be done by the insertion of the plural particle ^f-, immediately after the adverb, and we have. •W # 7\7M- [Go ' (plur) ' quickly) . This last shows that the command is addressed to more than one. THE VEEB. 89 117. — Again in what we have termed Volitive mood, first person, the first person exists in the very meaning of the word. It is a proposition, that the speaker, together with the person or persons addressed, shall act. We can then hut call it, " first person plural," making it equivalent to the English " Let us." As . tftf ^.4 %A]r*. {Let us go up Nam San). 118.— There are also a few forms which have been said to designate the first person, but these too, as was re marked above, get their first person rather from their sense, and may be termed forms of assent, or compliance. Thus we have the termination oj-, which is affixed to the stem of the verb giving it this sense. Note. — Sometimes euphony requires that .£. shall be inserted between the stem and this ending. Then, in reply to a request, in assenting, we have : — i 21 *d 7r "h {Then I mil go) . or S 1 *} (I will make it). We have also a first personal termination 2c. ^\, which may replace the termination of any one of the simple tenses, and can then only refer to the person speaking. This is commonly a book form. .3. 7& "§" 2c ej-, I am doing that. » » "I" 3| 2c «]-, I will do that. » „ "§• S| 2c «h I did that. 90 THE VEBB. With these exceptions, which in reality can scarcely be called such, we repeat ; " There is no such thing as person or number in Korean verbs." Different kinds of Verbs. ;■ 1 19. — We divide Korean verbs into two classes, Active I and Neuter, giving to these terms not the sense in which they are used by most grammarians, but that given in the ** Grammaire Coreenne." All verbs that express action, whether the subject acts or is acted upon, whether the action does or does not terminate on some object, we call active verbs. From the standpoint then of foreign grammarians, the Korean active verb may be either, active or passive, transitive or intransitive. 120. — Neuter verbs are those which predicate a quality of the subject, and have been termed by many, " Adjec tival verbs." As will be seen further on, there are but few true adjectives in Korean, and even these few were origi nally nouns. For the most part when a quality is predicated of a noun, a verb is used ; and if the adjectival form is desired, the relative participle must be em ployed. 121.— It may be said that Korean verbs, have three distinct voices, Active, Causative and Passive. From the very nature of the case, many verbs do not admit of all three voices, and in some we find but an Active and a Causative, in some simply an Active and a Passive, but in some again, all three. A large number of Korean active verbs have a passive sense as ^ 4» (to be cheated) and these when put in the causative voice give us THE VERB, 91 naturally the equivalent of the English transitive verb. Such verbs admit of no passive voice, and although ac cording to rule, it might be formed, from the nature of the case it is useless. Some neuter verbs on the other hand, forming a causative give us the effect of the English transitive verb. A passive of these causatives may be formed, but the Korean prefers to return to his neuter form. For example the neuter verb ?H4, To be dry. becomes § vj £., To make to be dry, or to dry. The passive of this can be formed and we would then have 1 H o] &., To be dried. This last is perfectly correct according to rule, but it is not what the Korean would use. He would prefer to return to the neuter verb and say simply, " It is dry." 122. — The method of forming the passive and cau sative voices being so similar, among Koreans them selves there is much confusion in this matter. The causative voice may be formed by the addition of e|, £., or -f- to the verbal stem. Causative forms usually are made from neuter or intransitive verbs, or even from those transitive verbs which are used at times intransitively. The addition to the stem of the verb is of course much modified by the final letter of the stem. After vowels we commonly find the form in j&. \ or ^-, though the form in t>] is also quite frequent, j After O or /» ; 7 is often inserted, giving us 7] instead of ft] : after \J , or a form in which there is a latent aspirate ; -SJ will be used. But these changes, as will be seen at a glance, are all euphonic, and to these rules 92 THE VERB. there are many exceptions. A few of these causative forms are given below. -^■Jx. To melt (ri.) -^<>]£l, To make to melt, to melt (v.t.). 3-A, Todie 3-ol.S., To kill. -?-.&.• (»'•-#•) To cry -^HiL. To make to cry. *].£.. To carry *l-?\£.. To load. ^A, To eat *$ <>]£., To feed. &4i> To be bright ^,*1JL, To make bright, to lighten. ty A, To be cold *]*].£., To cool. -S- 4t, To be high -£--*] A. To elevate. l1 ^j£.i To be broad ^ H St., To broaden. Jti.. To look £]£>., To show. <*!.£., To awake ^|-¥-.£., To waken. ^l-g-ii. To be hot....-cUi, or ■$]•%• St., To heat. 123. — All verbs do not admit of such a causative from, but a causative sense can always be given by the use of the future verbal participle with "§".$., which, however, often has the sense of to force, to make, to oblige, to compel, and is the stronger of the two. 71-71] iFJL, To make him go. .£.71] "§" St., To make him come. ■^"71] ~fSt., To make to be beautiful. 124. — The passive voice is formed by affixing o] to the stem, and, as has been noted above, it may be affixed to the stem of either an active or causative verb. From the nature of the case the passive voice can only be formed from verbs having a transitive sense. For the most part, however, the Koreans prefer not to use these forms, and THE VERB. 93 as is noted in Part II on passive constructions, the English passive is generally rendered into Korean by a change of form. As was seen in 1 121, where there is an intransi tive verb expressing the idea of the passive, it is preferred. The Korean verb " to kill " being the causative voice of their verb "to die," in place of saying " he was killed," which would be a passive of their causative voice, they would simply say, " he died ; " and in expressing the agent " he died by " or " he died at the hands of." A few passive forms are in constant and frequent use. "Which these are, the student must learn from practice ; but he will be always safe and much more in accordance with Korean usage, if he changes the form and employs an active construction. The following are sufficient to illust rate. 5J-.&, To shut 5t*l£.. To be shut. ^jL (»•• ^) To open ^Hi» To be opened. ^A, To seize ^•*Ii, To be seized. 3j-4t, To stop *J-*J.£., To be stopped. The Conjugation. 125. — It has been said, and rightly, that the Korean verb has but one conjugation, and in the formation of the various moods and tenses, there are certain regular and well defined governing laws ; and these laws may in a sense be said to be the same throughout all the moods and tenses. What these laws are and how they are used, will be developed in the following paragraphs. 126. — Throughout what have been termed the various voices and forms of the verb, as,- active and passive, dubitative, desiderative etc., we find these same rules holding good, and a thorough acquaintance with what 94 THE VERB. we have termed the " Basal Conjugation " and its various euphonic and other changes, will enable us to comprehend almost at a glance any other part- We shall enter, then, into a careful consideration of this conjugation. The Basal Conjugation.* 127. — This conjugation is the basis of all other forms. All other voices or forms of what have been termed various conjugations, no matter what they may be, are not only derived from some one or other part of the Basal Con jugation ; but, after they have been so derived, they may in turn, be carried through all its various forms. Each part of the Basal Conjugation, except the participles, supine, and bases, may be divided into three parts. The Stem, the Tense root and the Termination. Note. — The student should not confound this division with the division made with similar terms in the " Grammaire Coreenne." Their "sign of the time" did not include all that the " tense root " here does and in fact the " tense root " here given includes their "sign of the time " and part of their " termination." The " termination," as used here, differs entirely from theirs. 128. — The stem of the verb expresses simply what the action or state may be, and therefore generally remains the same throughout. It may be the stem of a simple verb, when it may also be called the root; it may be causative or passive, when it will have the causative or passive ending affixed. If the verb is in one of the more complicated forms, such as desiderative, intentional, etc., the verbal stem may include more than one word. It was just noted that the stem generally, remains the same. This was so put, because there is a class of verbs (and that * For the complete paradigm see p. 179 and 180. THE VBEB. 95 not a small one) in which, in the present tense the stem undergoes a slight change, which holds also in the relative \ participles. In 7f JL (to go) the stem is 7\. „ ^A (to eat) „ „ „ *j. » *i .&. (to be open) the stem is *|. » si H .£. (&> 6e opened ) the stem is ^H . And in 7l-*1.£.ej-,5i. -$•_£. (to order to bring), it is y\7^ jj^a^. In this last example, we have first 7|-xf the past verbal participle of the verb 7}-*I.£. (to take) ; j£. the stem of the verb .£.£. (to come) ; ef- the contraction of the imperative ending, showing that it was an order; ja. the conjunction uniting it to "§".£. and used commonly in indirect discourse ; and "$".£., with the sense here of to say. Dropping then the termination JL we have the stem of the verb, to order to bring, and this may in turn be carried through the whole Basal Conjugation. 129. — The Tense Root, shows the time of the action, whether past, present, future, perfect or imperfect or even continued action. For the most part, when no tense root is expressed, the present is understood, but with Korean active verbs, we find $£ contracted into \" after a stem ' ending in a vowel, acting as a present tense root. In the i indicative, however, except in the form used to inferiors, no present tense root is used. -' 130.— 'To express past time, we have the tense root o| or 5J, and quite frequently §£. Whether the com pound or simple, vowel should be used is entirely a matter of euphony, .and it .seems as though the distinction between *)■ and t>] depended also on the same cause. It has been suggested that, op account of this 96 THE VEEB. difference in the past tense, we classify the Korean verb as having two conjugations, the one 'forming its past in &]•, the other in *>] . This may be advisable, but when the difference exists simply in the tensal root of the past, and in the past verbal participles, and as it can be accounted for on the score of euphony, it hardly seems necessary. The past tense in this matter follows the lead of the verbal participle, and it will be noticed, that nearly all verbs the ultima of whose stem has the sound of *>} or p. take their past tense rcot in $£ while nearly all others take it in §j. It will also be seen that euphony goes still further, and where the ultima of the stem requires it, we shall find a consonant prefixed to the tense root. Stems ending in H, generally prefix X-, those ending in V or containing a latent aspirate, prefix o", and at times we find a final vowel uniting with the tense root. 131. — The future tense root 5J is the simplest of all, and except in the case of verbs whose stems contain a latent aspirate, when it becomes Jfl, it is always the same. There is also another future tense root v] though this is somewhat defective in its use with the various terminations. Note.— The true distinction between JQ and e] though not always adhered to, is that 5] signifies purpose, intent; while 2)] is simple future. These signify simple future time and are used where we would use the future. The future is at times, though rarely employed to render the English present and such phrases as, ^5J £. and Si? 2! 4s. need have in truth, no future significance ; but should be rendered into English by the present, I know, and I do not know. This use of the future for the present, is comparatively THE YEBB. 97 rare, but on the other hand the expression of a vivid future, by the simple present is quite common. The past tense root may be repeated giving us through euphony 334*} and the effect, "have have done '' or have already done or a Complete or Perfect Past. The future tense root is at times used together with the past tense root, e^^JJ giving us, as we might expect, a future past. When used in this way, the future follows the past tense root, which will be seen, is the reverse of the English method. The Korean says " I have will go," where we say " I will have gone." 132. — The particle "«i| shows that the action signified by the verbal stem, was continuing or progressing, at the time shown by the tense roct, and may be used alone, or with either the past or future tense root, or with both. When used alone, it signifies that the action was con tinuing or progressing, and can be used with either present or past time. T&tfty AS 3. aj ^-=1 Mr. Kim is doing that to- «f. day, ^tfty *\H a ^J "$"°l Mr. Kim was doing that ej- ... ,-. , yesterday. When used with either the future, perfect, or future- perfect tense root, this same progressive idea holds, and has the effect of taking the speaker and placing him in the time of the principal tense root. That is to say, if used with the past root, it causes the speaker to view the action not from the present as something done, but from the past, as something done in the past, giving us then, almost the exact equivalent, of the English pluperfect. With the future tense root, on the other hand, the speaker 98 , THE VEBB. is caused not to look at the action from the present, as something to be done in the future, but is projected forward into the future, and made to view the action as progressing then. 133. — We thus get, by the use of these various tense roots with the verbal stem, two classes of tenses which we have called " Simple " and " Compound," The simple, are formed by the use of either no tense root, or the future, or past, or both ; giving us then as-— Simple Tenses. Present. Past. Perfect Past. Future Past. The compound tenses, we have so named because they contain the two ideas of present, past, or future, together with that of progression. We have then, as — Compound Tenses The Progressive (present or past). „ 1st Pluperfect. „ 2nd Pluperfect. „ Continued Future. „ Probable Future Past. 134. — A few words on the use of these tenses : — The Present represents action simply as in present time, whether continuing or not. (A) It is used to express general truth ; 3 or of present action. ^-t-J]-^ Q-^^ls:*} The farmer (or farmers) is eating his lunch. $ £1 ?]•■#-§■$ h: "«3" The b°ys are Hiding- Action going on in the actual present is often expressed by verbal participle with &JJ1, *T?1 "M §*l *t Hrt& The servants are already starting. ?-Bl S SI Trli'lk^M *£ilL A village boy is coming to sell chickens. The Past, represents action as past, and may cor respond to what is known in Latin grammars as " perfect indefinite" (simple past action) or " perfect definite " (action completed) ; and thus corresponds to both the " past tense " and " present perfect tense " of later English grammars. 300 THE VEBB. He came to Seoul yesterday. He has eaten his breakfast. The Perfect Past tense, or as Dr. Gale calls it Past Perfect, was not noticed by Korean students until the appearance of Dr. Gale's " Grammatical Notes " and although in frequent use. by Koreans has still been almost neglected by foreigners. It is formed by the use of the doubled past tense root and expresses a completed action. The Koreans call it a "perfected past." It is often equiva lent to the English pluperfect. -f^rSl^^^^^*1^ When we left Inchun had ■^•>^W]7lj'«^jt6|-vj-^-o| we not sent a telegram to 2J*1. KimChusa? *m7r^-¥.^hfe*|«M«q Why! you had absolutely ^^1*1 cl 5 *S fe ^ ^l • forgotten my commissiop when you were starting. ZL7l--M-§"3j"?^4i. In the mean time he has been to Seoul. ■■ , , a>HS6]^ M] "J-t^t* vij -^rej ef>. I will do as you say. The Future-past tense may at times coincide with what in English we call the future-perfect, and at times with the potential-past-perfect. Perhaps the term "past- future " would have better designated it. It represents that an action will or should or would have been done at some time in the past. This tense should not then be con founded with the English future perfect, and where the English future perfect refers to an action that will be com pleted, at or before a certain time in the future, this tense cannot be used. At such times, the simple future, with some adverb signifying entirely, completely, etc., must be employed. The Korean future past will be rendered by such phrases as, "He must have," " He will have," "He would have," when such phrases are used with a present or past time, and refer to some action that is, or has been completed. We consequently often find this in the conclusion of a conditional clause. M*? ^^ ^"51^- "He certainly must have come yesterday." t>] jqj ' • " Thei-e were many eameUas in Japan." We might add to this sentence the words *]-iJ- {now) and it would be — " There are now many camelias in Japan " but it Tffould signify that the speaker had just seen them. " As for the Japanese they farm well." '._ : The speaker knows this for a fact. " Although the father is lazy, the son is energetic." The 1st Pluperfect tense represents the action or state, as completed or having existed, at or before, a certain past time, and is exactly equivalent to the English pluper fect, or past perfect tense. " He had written three letters by breakfast yesterday." " When your letter came the steamer had started." " He had planted all the seeds when it began to rain." The 2nd Pluperfect tense of the Korean, is. formed of. the adding of the particle "«sj to the doubled past tense root of the Perfect Past tense. In use it is, like the 2nd Pluperfect of the Greek hardly distinguishable from the First Pluperfect. It has been termed a Continued Perfect Past. It differs not a little from the English pluperfect. A few sentences will illustrate its use : — ^•d 7j-fi- "lb: -Ji^-fe Last autumn the harvest «H]A| 4. 4.7). *£ S|$t^ from the paddy fields of «| t>] *=]■. Koyang was excellent. 104 THE VERB. H^*I -^^^J *HM The other day I went to 7]- .& H^? 6| ^ ^f see the study room at ^•!--£- #l-i- *>i| *]$J Mr. Kuk's house, cer- ^c1 ^f. tjfinly the old scholars had written well. '^H^ 7}>M^^ ^$1 I went to see a wedding ai ^^■i- % -M^H ^el Mr. Kal's yesterday, tt*! ^f^^i^h many guests were there. The following illustration of Ihe four past tenses may help to distinguish between them. *)■#■ AH 61 «Jnf*+ ^"M-H1- How many have now come? .£.^*J«) Af§6| ^oj-vf How many came to to- ^^l H5- day's market ? ^Jfe: ^S6*] Arf6] ^nm- How many had come to ^^t+H^ yesterday's market. H^lfe *£ *f Ar§6l How many had come to ^nM- ^■^'ei,+ - yesterday's market, (and were still there). The Continued Future as has been stated above, projects the speaker foiward into the future, and causes him to view the action from that standpoint. It refers then, to some action or state that will be in progress, or existing at some future time. It may be lendered into English by the use of the present parti ciple with the future of the verb " to be," or by the colloquial phrase " going to." " Jf you want to see how he makes it, he will be making it the day after to-morrow." THE VERB. 105 " He is going to finish it to-morrow." "ife did not hill to-day ; he will be hilling the day after to-morrow." What we have termed the Probable Future Past, we have thus named, because it has the sense of the future past, given above, but with simply the idea of strong probability. It would not be used of something that is known for a fact, and it represents possibility or contingency with respect to some past action which, it is implied, did not, or may not have occurred. It may be rendered into English by the present participle, with " He must have been " or " He most probably was" etc., etc. St* SI^2H °l*b " Since in spite- of his extreme age he draws so well, when young he was most probably a famous draughtsman." " As he has just come out of a wine shop, he must have been drinking again." " It must have rained last night." 136. — In the Basal Conjugation, we find that the form in "C-J is defective, and is not used with what is most com monly known as the ordinary polite termination. It is, however, found in both low and high forms. In addition to this, this form from its very nature, occurs less frequently in the direct indicative form, than when joined with one or other of the conjunctions ; and it was this fact, together with the defect in the verb itself, that led the writers of the " Grammaire Coreenne " to classify the form in "oj H as a 106 THE TEEB. simple imperfect, or rather as ;the ending for all of what they termed " Secondary tenses." The ending *-) is a conjunction, and it is this absence of discrimination between conjunction, and simple termina tion, that has made the study of the verb, so involved. This distinction must always be made, and when we find that tire English word that we have taken to represent a certain conjunction will not hold with certain forms of the verb, we have no right to conclude, that the same form, used in the same way, but after a different mood or tense of the verb is a different conjunction, but simply that the investigations that we have made thus far, have been wrong. From neglect of this rule, and from omitting almost entirely a distinction between termination proper, and true conjunction, a great deal of confusion has arisen. The cause of the want of discrimination has been, that when a conjunction unites itself to a Korean verb, the termination proper is dropped, and in the literal sense of the word, the conjunction becomes the termination. If, however, we desire to arrive at anything like a true conception of the Korean verb, this distinction must be made, and held throughout. What, we here denominate " termination " or " termination proper," is that part of a verb which ends a direct statement, in an independent sentence, and in Korean, this varies with the relative positions of the speaker and the one addressed. In dependent clauses, the dependence is shown in Korean by the use of one or other of the conjunctions, and when this is done, as was just noted, the termination is dropped. In exclamatory sentences also, the interjection will often be affixed to the verb, and here again the termina tion is dropped. THE VERB. 107 137. — In considering the terminations then, we find four classes, two obtained from the indicative mood, and two from what we have called the volitive mood. From the Indicative ...{^ogative. From the Volitive {^positive. (Imperative. The difference between the termination under each head, is the relative position of the speaker, and the person spoken to. There is also a further difference in Korean verbs, to signify the position of the subject of the act or state. In the declarative and interrogative terminations, having to do simply with the person speaking, and the person addressed, this consideration has no effect; but in the volitive, where the person addressed and the person speak ing, must in the one case, and may in the other, be at the same time, the subject of the verb, a change may and generally does occur. For. a further understanding of Korean honorifics see Chap. XI, Part 1. The old dictionaries show that originally there was an honorific form of the verb tf Ji. in "tTiJi., the SL of the stem of this now obsolete verb still appears affecting both tense root and terminations of honorific forms. Declarative Terminations. 138. — The declarative terminations as given below are given in the order of their relative use, beginning with the terms for addsessing inferiors. They are given throughout with the thl'ee verbs "$"£. (to do), ?l £. (to eat), and $ 4. (to be deep), in the present tense. Note. — The first two are active verbs, one with a stem ending in a vowel, the other in a consonant ; the second is a neuter verb. It will be noticed that in the form used for inferiors, the present tense root $r of an active verb or a remnant of it, is generally seen. Of course this does not appear in the neuter verb, and when uniting with the other tense roots. o a a a children,Usedservants,etc.to friends,Usedintimateagedto used*'Half-talk," among , andwhoequalsthose are despensewithwillingto Honorificintheorderterms Honorificusedgenerallyterm, simpleterminationtheusedallthoughTheseforhewiththemosttenses,part can concerned,infollowsdefective,andisfarterminationsthelineine-Jfuturetense asareas anditsinThisofcompoundIn(2)theoftheremnanttenses.(1)t-$rorwasseen. notedwithalsobethattheterminationstheotheranditdisappearstenses maycourse poetic.Exclamatoryand politeforms. more ofpositivebeliefs. servants,etc. - given. I *la. TERMINATIONS.DECLARATIVE Termination. \ v*i*t 1 ior£. H^h pronouncedham-ni-da,mok-sim-nida*andIcip-sim-nida.Note.These are — .....} *1 «> PresentTense deep).(Itis { 3*S*lJL TlV&l^T-. 71*11 7A-c} 7JS^ 71 ± 72*]$. withverb6j£tChanges£cretc.to (Heea(s). ^*&*1£. *]-...•3*&V&1 '3fe--e> ojMl ^i ^5E^ tMj....; ojV6!^ -g,M]..f^I or •r&v^h.. (Hedoes). s*i.s.*■ -rv^i- -rs^i-t f S»]*>*-V -S-xJ- -*-a *?;U (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) P o CO ofItwculdwell,rightinthisplace,noticethatformthebetheiniswithoutdoubt§Note.toremnant a— the usedgenerallyof whentheinverbalwhichaffixed."theformBtemtheytenseandtake^rootto.(7)(5)orare -§■andifwriteintheofformtheancients,shouldwrittenthus.Time,honorificinbehowoldtowayswerewe andtheninchangedthis,(o-dayandtaken§istheTheoldformbeformhasmustcorrect.commonuseasever oftheseterminationsToillustratetheandtheirmethodofaffixingthemselvestotense use'- chil- friends,Tointimate girlservants,eta Politeformused Honorificterm, beliefs.positive equals. among Honorificsin {To servants ordergiven. dren,etc. Termination. &*}:{ *]• V»l* 4 A *].£. *&*].£.... «« • 3U*§V*K. {Itdeep). was 3U*§*lA.... PastTense.:-. *m*jA «v*i* 33"* givefollowingwiththeroots,pasttense.wte 7j-%&. S.foundformsstillinsuchistriM;'.inetc.'as %*l* •• 38*8*1A (Heate). ^§1*1A 33JV*K <39* *«* *$$ ••••• t$H ••-•• inendsconsonants. {Hedid). 1r$*lA...-.*' -rsjv^i^ ^"$3* (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) <7) '(8)- 110 THE VEBJ3. 139. — The Terminations in the Future tense in e] and the Compound tenses are defective. In the Compound tenses we have only the following forms: — IT 7. t ♦ Used to inferiors. 3.$ J olrM ^BB^ *° suPer>ors. Note. — It will be noticed that in this last ^ becomes part of the termination. In the Future in «| , we find but three forms : — "§"5|eJ- Used to inferiors » «| „ to equals | (Iiottl do it). ~$^t>\'c\ „ „ superiorsj The 9}- used above, is the «J- that ends a statement, but is only used to inferiors and in book language. From this, we also get another form V H eh which is a decided statement and is much used in books. We find also the ending 2c ^ used in much the same way with any one of the tense roots, but restricted to the first person. Like this also there is the form of assent or agree ment in n}- which, is joined to the root and has a future sense. 140. — The following illustrate the use of these termi nations. S.it 6] .£. S el ^ S^b The coolies are working well to-day. *J* *l£er".3i. «1 *I ^ I am making this book to 3t*4| • study the language. THE VERB. Ill ^1 ief Jt xi •* ~$3t.- In order to make money, I am in business. *J-§1T *i#£.3. ^-t- ^ Because I desired office I "iT^^lA- studied bard. ^ #*1 'Jt.S. H 'y a] As tbe price was higb tbe S.^f 4» S *1 A- house will be a good one. *fBH ^"t6^ ^-5JV I will die for my country. *^Ife M^ $J ft*| I did a good deal of work -^rcj-ef. yesterday. a^SS^^Ul^^]- That man too bas learned to speak well. «f.;^ ?{*} 7y ^^4.. Tbe train left a little while ago. ^M ^^1 ir^C^ §*!.£.• I wrote tne letter some time ago. ^1 'S61] ^"51 V6!^- He died a montb ago. o] ;*}.§. M|7i] ^.2c.ej-. I give this book to you. ?! H-c- ■1fl7|- 7j-'°I1. I will go to-morrow. Interrogative Terminations. 141 .—The Interrogative Terminations are almost more numerous than the Declarative. They are given below in the same order- and with the same three verbs as the Declarative. < ...-.., a < a Usedandinfe-servantsto \ riors,thefamilatteris halftalkand orare usedfriends amongor > wheredoesdesinotone Politeequals,|termsamong InKyengtSargDobothNote.thesebeemployedofandusedbothsuperitermstermsrespect,tomayareas— Thesecalled«J^ are j slightlyhonorific bepolite.to re Honorifics. ' liar. S§l7VHV or TERMINATIONS.INTERROGATIVE Termination. VH=AH=- or VHoriH. Vi.«.iL. or *LJs or *Note.lastTheseMoksimnUcapronouncedhamnika,andkipsimnika. are— *IJL VH517]- PbesentTense. 4 A i. (Usedonlywithactive (Usedonlywithactive 3*SVHSl7r{ deep).(Isit flVHStfl- *UH» 7JJ.H verbs). verbs). 3*J.a. US.*. m 7J4. ^*§VH&7r (Do?)eat you f-VHM* ^VM= ^VH ^ViL D-J*l ^i *i*u ..... ^ *U (Doyou) andinferiors. ors fVH= TVH fVi. 1T*I ■$±1 ti -T4+ ?.*]& CD] (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) 1-3 a B < W a 00 142—Theseterminations regularintheirwithareeventhemoreothertensesthanusethe feriorstheetc., andused are friends amongor wheredoes one desirenotbeto Politeterms among Usedintoservants latterisfamiliar. Thesecalled«l«f are Honorific. polite. equals. Termination. *§VMS!7r Vix VH *1 .. vf .. 2c .. 4. .. Declarative,butillustratetotheirfollowingthetableisgiven.use tiveverba.IJ m*i ..■ fUsedonlywithac-1 {Usedonlywithac-1 (Wasitdeep.) SSlVHSW- PastTense. ) tiveverbs. 33lVH= 321VH S^Vix nnst. 3*A...... ^5JM- •• (Didf)eatyou "-JSiVHSI?!- ^$IVH= ^5JVH ^^Vi ^$1*1 ^Sii ^SJa ^*U f°J*gVH5l7r {Didf)do you -rs3VH5i7r ttSlVH I^Vic. •r^vf -r$!*I -r$!*u -r^ ■r^ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) 114 THE VEBB. 143. — In the use of the Interrogative terminations, also, the Future in e|, and the Compound tenses are defective. ( Was he doing.) (Was it deep.) Termination. (1) iT^^F ^M1* M* Toinferiors. (2) ~$^h. 3H-k it "Halftalk." (3) -T^HSl7]....7jx:1H5l7}- HSW...1 (4) -T§x1HSl7pj^§riH5l7f JTosupenora. Note. — It will be noticed that in this last, tense root enters and becomes part of the termination. For the future in &\, we naturally have only the form to a superior. f^lSl^r- Shall I do it. Note. — The interrogative particle "ft which properly is an exclama tion and can be affixed to any part of the verb, is used for the most part in solilloquies; but can also used in questions. When 60 used the termi nation proper is dropped, and it is affixed. It may also be affixed to any of the relative participles. Peopositive Teeminations. 144. — What we have termed propositive terminations, are used when the proposition is made, in the doing of which the speaker is to be a party. It can consequently be only of the first person and in the plural. They are joined to the verbal stem and no tense root is used. They are as follows : — (Let us be doing). (Let ue seize). (Lit ue go). Termination. « -w «* **~.~ <°™:... (2) -$-Al| QM) 7pfl AflfAmong equals (3) f*l ^*I 7>*1 X]\(" half talk"). THE VERB. 115 *f *'*K-#JM'*.7|.$*|tfc g^n <4) . or Honorific. <5) -r^i $/*k#*i § ... 7Mi &*i*i- <6) l"^l6l«h..^--i-?:lftl«b..^l^«|- Benediction. Note.— In regard to these terminations, there is a dispute among Koreans ; some claiming that (4) and (5) should always end in *J cj-, the /•] being the same as in "{f A] £ and purely honorific. Others, how ever, claim it an honorific form of (2) and that *^CV should always be used. This last seems the most reasonable, but Aj >=r is very largely employed. Imperative Terminations. 145. — The Imperative terminations are used when ordering or requesting a person or persons to do something, and are from their nature restricted to the second person and may be singular or plural, that is to say, may com mand one or more than one. They are much more numerous than the forgoing and are as follows : — (Do or do thou). {Seize or seize thou). Terminations. f^r ^M H*r °r ^-To inferior* -Tfl] #71] 711 f"Half talk to ITA- •tfit. , ^» V friends, etc. SSl #-2,£._, Sl. or .S.JL...J . _ f Polite among equals. {Moi More polite, a bout like -$•&*]£. #Sl4*]Sl..- %*}Sl please do it." Honorific J or used in en treaties. iF&M ^SLdtM &M ^MxH^...^*!^ *Hrr- Used in or or or prayers. 116 THE VEEB. Moods. 146. — In the Basal Conjugation we have but two moods, with Participles, Supine and Bases. The two moods are the Indicative and the Volitive. 147. — The Indicative Mood asserts the action or state expressed by the verb, Bimply as a fact, or asks whether it is a fact. It is used in dependent as well as indepen dent sentences, but when in dependent clauses the termi nation is generally replaced by some other word, as a con junction. It may at times then be rendered by either the indicative, subjunctive or potential mood of the English. 148. — What we have here called the Volitive Mood is that mood which expresses the wish of the speaker. It may be either in the form of a proposition to do some thing, in which act the speaker shall participate, which is then of the first person plural, or it may be in the form of a command, exhortation or entreaty, when it will be of the second person and may be used for either the singular or plural. Note. — This mood has been called by some the imperative, and the two classes given have been called respectively plural and singular. The singular may, however, also be used for the plural, and aside from this fact the first person volitive can never in any sense be called a command. Better than this, it would be to call these two distinct moods; but this is hardly necessary, and it seems much better to us, to class both as belonging to the volitive mood, the one in the first persoD plural, and the other in the second person. Paeticiples. 149.— Like the Greek, Korean presents us with what we have called two classes' of participles, the first, which we call Verbal Participles, corresponding in use to THE VEEB. 117 what, in Greek, is commonly known as the " Participle ; " and the second, which we call Eelative Participles, corres ponding almost exactly to the Greek " Verbal Adjective." Most Korean adjectives, being derived from verbs, it has seemed best to us to hold to this division, which was made in the " Grammaire Coreenne," and thus avoid the chance of confusion. Veebal Paeticiples. 150. — What we here call Verbal Participle, we thus name, because it partakes more of the character of a verb than the Eelative Participle as far as its use is concerned. Without a direct affirmation, it expresses its meaning as an accompanying quality or condition of the subject or object of the principal verb. Of these verbal participles, we do not, like the Greek, have one for each tense, we have only two, a past and a future. That most commonly found is the past and is formed by adding tf or efc or a euphonic modification of these to the verbal stem. The Future Verbal Participle is made by adding 71] to the verbal stem. 151. — In connection with the Verbal Participle in e>y and Note.— The *J here spoken of, is often written **J and is supposed to be the verbal part, from &£. (to use). There is no need for this, especially as we find such a tendency among Koreans to contract the postposition t>\]tf. These postpositions may or may not be affixed, but if THE VEKB. 119 definitness of expression is desired, they must be employed. When used, they slightly modify the meaning. "§•«»}, " Having done," or " doing." -f e$/3\, " After " or " by having done." "IrM^ fe. " As for after having done "=If you do. +ril_ ("As for doing," or as for having done" *"«•' | (rarely used). -^■£^6):, " Only having done" " only by doing." •frcA/Ath I" ^n'y a^ter navm8 done," " only when you *°iAl fi | have done." 154. — The following sentences will illustrate the use of these postpositions. ^.y*. -$•&} /.}\r Aj-^ He is a man that lives by e>| _£.. farming. *]?$ *$<$ ^Sd "$"31 A. • What are you doing this (Lit Tliis having done, what will for ? do)? j$y^ -§■ e^tf *.*} ^ $|4i. Having been a merchant, he has become rich. ^Aj«] 7>Ai 7% A- *$ I will go to Korea and en- 3] 4. . gage in commerce. (Lit. Korea-to having gone, com merce will make). 6rH ^J b] Aife -3}-2l4t. If you do not eat this, you (Lit. This not having eaten as will die. for, will die). ^^Tfl ^6]" M\z 51 *I If you sell in that way, you gl 4». will lose. (Lit. That way having sold as for, will lose). a. Sf ^^-Mfe >J*] If you take that medicine, ^^■c]-. you will not get better. (Lit. That medicine taking as for, will not get better). 120 THE VERB. -&§: Q *!* "tr6^6]: ^ You must finish your work, ■?■ 51 *h if I am to pay you to-day. (Lit. To-day work all having done only, will I pay you). -MI^**] 7>6]= s-§- 33 You must go to the bank 5! 4i- to get the money. (Lit. The Bank-to having gone only, money will get). &J-& SW&Y -S.St4t- I had to come to Japan to (Lit. Japan after having come- see it. only, sa w). 2£/ft y\^ t>\. *£ % j. . I had to go to Korea, to make (Lit. Korea after having gone only, his acquaintance, know). 155. — Before we turn to the consideration of the Eelative Participles a few words on the uses of these Verbal Participles must be given. We find of course no agreement between it and its subject and it may be used with either the subject or object of the principal verb. Its main uses are as follows : — Eeferring to the subject. 1st. Simply to connect an accompanying, with a main action. When so used the participle and verb may be rendered by two verbs with a conjunction, or sometimes by one English verb containing the two ideas. Note.— For the difference between a participle so used with a verb, and two verbs united by a conjunction see Part II. Chapter X. Sec. I. ^• Note. — When so used, it is exactly equivalent to the Ablative Gerund of Latin, and it is rather strange that heretofore this fact should have been overlooked and the Korean Supine, which has none of the force of a gemnd, should have been called a gerund. Cause : — *\n y] *h #6l tt&. There is a great deal of water, because it rained yesterday. It will not do, because it is too heavy. Why was he killed ? (Lit. What having done died ?) Means \-~ I took medicine and am better. They live by plundering. U]3J ^t\ /.}&. He lives by begging. Manner : — They escaped by flight. He boldly went to the place ^1S %&. where the tiger was. 157. — Eeferring to the object. This Participle is used also in connection with the object of the principal verb, or 122 THE VERB. with a person or thing, mentioned in the sentence. It then conveys some idea of time, cause condition ; but the relation intended and as a consequence, the true rendering of the participle in English, can only be learned from the nature of the sentence or the connection in which it stands. When this is done, the object of the principal verb, or the person or thing mentioned to which the participle has reference, is considered as the subject of the verb contained in the participle ; and, if a postposition is used, it will be the sign of the nominative. It becomes, then, a dependent clause and in this way, we may at times have a number of nouns witn the nominative sign, one after the other. ^"^r ^T^r ^J=2l-M 7\ I went to see my friend, i5J;4i. when (or because) he was sick. <£*] Jfl*l tt-?*H 3 Flowers bloom well, when sli.. there is much sunshine. #f-gr°l &>] H*< w The old man can not read *4-§- *£* AA. well, because his eyes are poor. ^l\ ^ «>1 *$Q b] ^J-M-M I pity those who are star v- t£~\Z Tf'S ~£J8t>] ing for lack of food. N.B. — Note the three nominatives in this sentence. 158. — This Verbal Participle is also largely used in the making of compound verbs. When such compounds are made, their meaning can alwayabe obtained by trans lating them as simple verbs. - As :-* 7\-tf£L&.> (" haviny taken, to come") to bring. THE VEEB. 123 y\ *1 7\ St., (" having taken, to go") to take away. HJ t>] jii, (" having eaten, to see") to taste. -^-^l _£..£.. ("having asked, to see") to enquire. ^si-^Ji, (" having opened, to pid") to leave open. *■§■ vf 7\-£l, (" having mounted, to go") to mount (in going). t'tMrit ("having elevated, to put") to put up. Note. — It will be seen throughout that in many places, the Korean verbal participle past can be rendered in English by the present. This however, does not affect its being a past tense and in all these places, it will be seen that with equal exactness, and generally with more, the past would give the sense, although the English idiom requires the present. 159 — -The Future Verbal Participle is formed by adding 71} to the verbal stem and is not by any means as often met with as the past. The most common of its uses are : — 1st. With some particle such as *|e| (so as to), when it has the effect of giving lis the form of the verb that will be rendered into English by the words " so that it will," " so that it can." As:— ^^IM Su7)} *]ej •$" Make it so that Mr. Kim o^sj-. can come. 6] jSl£\ § ^ il"^ £fz[ Make this chair so that it "§"71] <*]&] tr^^f"- will rock well. 2nd. Used alone and preceding another verb it gene rally signifies that for which, the action of the principal verb is done, and may be rendered into English by that, so that in order that, to. * From $.*$ i, to mount, to climb, t From -HtH Si, to elevate, to raise. 124 THE VEBB. t>]3£|j a. 5 If J 7j-*]7t] Give the floweis to the boy ^A- iC/ja£ he may take them away. Put on plenty of coal, that the room may be warm. *|£ 7\n a-3: $M«J-. Get some chair coolies that we may go to Seoul. *j- ^71] A^h Come to eat. 3rd. The third and by far the the most common use which is derived from the preceding, is with the verb "§"A; giving us, the force of a causative to be rendered into English by " to make to," " to cause to," etc., or it may be used with -$".£. much as a sort of imperative. As: a. StI 71-71] fA- Make that boy go. *] 3£*1 A7J S.J.H Aj-71] As these flowers are so "$A- pretty, let him buy them. ■sHI M W<»1 ^ Since, if you know English, Ms #■§• «?WH it will be a means of com ^ *1£71] ^A- munication even though you travel over the whole world, study hard. tf« *1^ 6H -r^l Since, if you do not study £ 7|*H ■§*] *« now, you will regret it •TA. -?7fl hereafter, you had better take pains to study well. As it is already late hurry H>q *fa. 71-71] •$■ a- and give him his supper and let him go. THE VEBB. 12$ c^^Jfe Af;g 0] 'ftJLH As there are a great many ^^12. JL7fl"^"i. here make him come that way. V]7f if-JLH tf-§- AT--M As I am hungry, buy some HjTfl^c^eJ- rice and make it so that I can eat. e^jj7|. §1^ ^Tj'SMH As this is the Inchun V^lTHl^^sJ-. station make him get off here. .^ -f-.il £S ^^lH As I must go back to Seoul S.'Si] Eelative Participles. 160. — "What we have have called the Eelative Participle is rather a verbal adjective derived from the verb. As, however, almost all Korean adjectives are verbal adjectives derived. from what may be termed "adjectival verbs" to avoid confusion we have held to this term as has been already stated. In use the Eelative Participle always stands as an adjective qualifying some noun and may generally be rendered into English by a relative clause. As a consequence, it cannot be united to the various postpositions, unless it is first made a noun by the use of such words, as A}|r (man), 7& (thing) or one of the pronouns, or, as is often, done by the use of the post position t>] signifying " the man." 161.— The four Eelative Participles most commonly used, may be termed ; Present, Past, Future, and Future Past. 126 THE VEBB. The use of the terms Present and Past is, as will hs seen, a little unfortunate and the terms Active and Passive have been suggested. The same difficulty existing with these latter as with the former, we prefer to retain the former. 162. — What we have termed the Present Participle is formed by adding $r to the verbal stem. It will be noticed that the Present Participle follows the lead of the present tense and where in the present tense the stem is slightly modified, this modified form is used in the present participle. This modification for the most part occurs in verbs whose stems end in 2 simple. When this is the case the 5 is dropped in forming the present, both indicative and participle. In verbs whose stems contain a latent "6", this is not done even though it end in 2 . Then the stem is used, though of course the latent ■*■ cannot appear in fe. Note. — It has been said, and with much reason, that this Jr should rather be called an ''active particle '* than a " present tense root " for it is only used with active verbs ; and with neuter verbs is never found. However, it always has a present sense and can at times be used with almost a passive idea so we prefer to call it simply the present participle. When used, this participle has the effect of designating the person or thing who is now acting, or (though rarely) being acted upon. It may, then, be rendered into English by the relative pronoun with is and a present participle, or with the simple present of the verb, or by a new dependent clause. £}■=*• <*] 7}.i$ *}}* AJ-f 6] If I go to a foreign country, ^J». there will be few whom I know. THE VEBB. 127 ^|J!E.*1 6]"H "t"^ b}\£. K one does not study, due y]X\ ^}2}4x. knows nothing. *]■=*■ -fr^r A}§ 4| o| fj£k\ The man who is working 5J A- now will soon stop. 163 What we have termed the Past Participle, is form ed by adding .*L, (which may undergo a variety of euphonic changes), to the verbal stem. There is little regularity about the special form that this participle shall take ; any rules based on the form of the verb will have a number of exceptions. The following will, however, help : — ] st. All verbs whose stems, end in a vowel, form their Past Eelative Participle by simply adding \s. Here we see the .£. contracts, and to uphold the character of the verb, its vowel or combination of vowels is retained. Thus :— 7ri {to go) # (gone). SlSL {to come) ■& (come). JLi {to see) -g. (seen). -$£t.{todo) § (done). 2nd. Verbs whose stem ends in 7, a, or W, form their Past Eelative Participle by adding .£. to the verbal stem ; in some cases at the same time doubling the final letter of the stem. Thus :— ■%£. (to die) ■^■•cr SJi, (to be lacking) „ ^*J, „ l$-±, (lacking). ^Ji, {to carry on the back),, ^*J, » ^-fe-. (carried). ^dfc. {to seize) „ ^<>\, „ ^£, {seized). #:£., (to be beautiful) „ SLt}, „ &&, {beautiful). X-Sife, (to be near) „ 3t7rW, » Xtf* or &, (near). 7HJ tf A, (to 5e light) „ 7|-\j c>fl , „ ;+\j *>•& or 4. (light). 6h S 3"=t, (to be charming) „ a* S cr*f. » °f S "t'fei (charming). etH *5it, (to 5e nauseating) „ «"|-v| fil*f, „ «"M #[£, (nauseating). There are several exceptions to each of these rules, and the only safe way for the student is, when he learns a new verb, to learn it with its principal parts. 164. — In use, the Past Eelative Participle coincides with the present relative participle, except that the past tense is used in rendering it into English. At times, also, it may have a passive sense. Note. — When this passive sense holds, it is really, because tlie Koreans do not like to use the passive voice, but in rendering it into English a passive should be used. y*\7\ 'ft-gr ^1*1 *]•$] Where have you put the ■x 5J V H= • letter you received ? 6l^r6l ^l7r$3-€: ?]*•]*%• Is this the knife that you got? "^•^ ■$: *£vl\ "$&.- Wash the clothes we have taken off. 23 £ -^a ^l-7^ £.*=}*!■• Bring the dishes that have been washed. 130 THE VHEB. H£ 3 HV *fVH=. Can not you think of the word you forgot ? *!S ££ I^ Dry the wet clothes. ??i£?^l <>1 ttA. The followers of Confucious are many. ^S 5€ *J-gr ^ Pay him for what he has *»l*h finished to-day. H*»l S§ ^o] 71% What you heard yesterday ?6li. is false. 6W ^1 3-t *E Do you again ask the ques xV^. tion you just asked ? £9 3t£ £.& a*l Do not use money that you ^^. hold in trust for another. =fi|«] 14$ *4^. y^ Bring the book that was put -£..£.. in the box. 165. — The Past Eelative Participle of a neuter verb, simply proclaims the existence of the state or condition, and may be rendered by the present or an adjective. ^1 & 4t (fo be hot) «i •£- (hot or being hot). :yjt (to be deep) ... 7}^. (deep or being deep). Jf^J. (to be heavy)... ■^■7-f-g- (heavy or being heavy). ^,A (to be bright)... ^,^- (bright or being bright). #4t (to be old) jJt\°_. (old or being old). 166.— The Future Eelative Participle may be formed from the past by changing \s into a.- It has the force of about to, and may be generally render ed by a relative clause with a future verb. It may be used to express, permission, ability or simple futurity. si Q % 3.^:-%: "^"J5!-- Call coolies who will work well. THE VERB. • 131 /^•g- :?}■ A}§^- M|7{. I a in waiting for some one 7] ■"= ^-]Sl- who will go to Seoul. v]5^M -§• ft/?!- &J-2J 6]-H The box that is coming £}-.£,. from America has not yet come. •»Q •f-'oj -g.^} »}-§. *JZ|-e>] When any one is sick, they o]- 2. ^4;. have no desire to eat. S.£ ^i °1 ^ e" ?S'l If it is a good book, it will ^tJ* . be very popular. #*1 ^tt*l yI^ "£ "? £ As tne PrIce is so high' I do *J «]-. not want to buy it. <*1 "3" ^ ?!■*!&• You may go now. 167. — The Future Past Eelative Participle is formed by adding -Q to the tense root of the indicative past. It is not nearly as much in use as the three already mentioned ; but with 7^, -§•, -f- etc. will be rendered by a future or subjunctive perfect. These renderings may be seen and explained in the following: — g*l7j- %■>£ % ^SHH I had thought the letter 61"H %&•• would have come, but it has not. *1*fl 5c7l] ^I^-^IH 7\A As. he started late yester- A?X] t>\*\ Si^^-t" day, he will not have ^AJ5Jt^-. been able to have reached there yet. 3E*J -^-o] 2f-^J 7|^|v) As the thieves must have -^-e| 2$-3}-. gone, let us sleep. 168. — A quite common, and much used Eelative Parti ciple, is funned fro.n the progressive tease by adding \s to the tense root. 132 • THE VERB. It gives us then a true Imperfect Relative Participle that generally has a past sense. H*l 5te t-*7|. >ffi The merchant who came #*. yesterday has come again. *}%«} ^ •^4 J&. a> Buy some more of the A*-1*h fruit we were eating this morning. *W1 jl*. W^T^r The friend whom I had heen AS #*• wanting to see for many years came this morning. •w #3 *ri*l "T "Who was that who came a .?\Sl. little while ago ? 169. — In addition to these, relative participles may be formed almost at will by adding fe to the simple, and \s to the compound tenses of the indicative mood. This form of the participle is at times found qualifying a noun ; but is more often used with particles employed conjunctively or adverbially ; such as — 7\ or -j\ meaning " whether " or 7f and jL, used in soliloquies, signifying doubt etc. ^ *r!»] ^fe^l ^+" I can no* tell whether he tf*. has gone. %M tf o] £}- fe; 7\ 7\ Go and see whether Mr. 2L*M. Kim has come. a Stl7j- ej=-|i ^J5J G° and see whether that &7]> 7\ 2.3L i'tj «}-. boy has taken his medi cine, and let me know. Supine. 170. — There is a form of the Basal Conjugation that in use is exactly equivalent to the Former Supine or Supine THE VERB. 133 in um of the Latin, and we have therefore called it the " Supine." It is generally formed by adding S| or 9} to the verbal stem. This form generally follows in the lead of the past verbal participle, taking its stem. When the stem ends in a consonant, a vowel, either .2. or § , will be used as a connective. Note. — Verbal stems ending in 3 generally take their supine in H" or v^. As : HH- from *>)•.£. (to know). Where, however, there is a H in the past verbal participle, which is either a changed or added con sonant, and which does not appear where the stem precedes a conso nant, this same 5 appears in the supine ; but the connecting consonant must be there, and the Supine is found in .£.21. Thus:— 5 A {to hear) has S^l for its past verbal participle, but its future is 5-31:4. and hence we find S.sa^ (the *. following S becomes $ ) for the supine. The supine is used for the most part • with verbs of motion, although we do at times find it with other verbs, to signify the purpose of the act. *i*j ^-rei A*K- Come to-morrow to work. *i 7rlH £&■ He has come to get the book. *-¥■ "H %&• He has come to study. Verbal Nouns. 171. — The Korean verb presents us with two verbal nouns, and by some these have been said to be inter changeable. Such is not the case, however, and the dis tinction made in If 53, should always be observed. The one is formed by adding O to the stem. A very simple rule for the formation of this noun, is to replace the l^ of the past relative participle by n . 134 TEE VERB. Thus :— Past > Verb. Eel. Paet. Verbal Noun. 3ji, {to trust) 5!&, gives us 5t-&, (faith). lii, {to forget) H2, ,, „ H§, (forgetfulness) OrS^i, (fokSeau<#W)«>H=r£ »}< f 71, f^l, *%7], & f 3! 38 71. 173. — This verbal noun, is often used with the various postpositions to express varying ideas such as cause manner, etc. Most of these will in a moment be apparent from a literal translation, but a few words about the most frequent forms will be in place. It is very largely used with fe , in phrases and sentences where in English we would simple change the tone. In these sentences, the verbal noun in 7l of the principal verb in the sentence will be used, and immediately precede the verb. It has the effect of showing lack of interest, doubt as to the result, etc. of the action expressed by the verbs. Its true sense can always be gained, by rendering the verbal noun by the English noun in ing, and preceding it by the words, as for. THE VERB. 135 '3. ^J «>] S.?lr2 5.3.*+ That house is good but it is Sw' -^4s.- a little small. (Lit. The house being-good-as-for good although, little small is.) t>] j]X\ y|#}7ljr yl#}7J Tbis is c'ear; but i* is °>fe J1.7H 5.A- pretty. O. *]74J 7r .5L7lh: S.|F As far as the looks of that X] e]-3£ 7J-/| yj^i.. watch are concerned it is good, but it is high priced. 174. — We find it also used many times with the post position d| having then a causal effect. .2. A}16] £|^i-#- 3jy- That man's life was saved 71**] ^$£4«. through his meeting the doctor. 3£*} .Se. t>] Sfc 7] chj ^i >$» %\ I made a great noise because -^•oj^.. thieves came. a. *}-$lo] y ^"^FS^I"1] -Because that servant .has .*)=-=*. ,6.5£ uj'cj -&£} done his work well I have ^.tvj^. given him a bolt of satin. ^ **j 7| Note.— This last, while considered by many a corruption of l] &fl, is in all probability a contraction of the noun in l] and some part of the verb <>] SL (to be). It is in such general use now that some even call it a causal conjunction. 175. — When used with S. it can often be rendered by the English infinitive. - 136 THE VERB. o]-5»--§. %\*1 tytf-7]5. I have decided to start for $*% "$"$|4s.- America to-morrow. 5f ^7lS. ^1 $1^711 «J" I spoke to the doctor about -^■6|^«. taking some medicine. ^ -5I7IS "3§y SJ71) ^1^ I have sent word to my ■$■ 5J 4» . brother to build the house. ag*1 %X7]SL ^fil U -X- I will be unable to attend to ^rTjJ 4. . any thing else on account of letter writing. Bases. 176. — It remains now but to give the two bases on which verbs of intention, and negatives are formed, and we have the whole of the Basal Conjugation. The first of these, is what we have termed the " Desiderative Base." It is formed by addtng ej or Hf.to the verbal stem as it is seen in the past verbal participle ; and where this stem ends in a consonant .£. or $ is interposed as a connective. It is commonly united with "§".£. by ja., as a connective ; but this .0. may be dispensed with and then contractions will follow. It gives us thus a verb signifying — desire or intention of carrying out the action expressed by tbe verb. When the verb is thus formed it may be carried through the whole Basal Conjugation. Tr^JB."?" JL To intend to go. ■Zp-tySL'iiSt. To intend to give. 5} J} *} JL^Sl To intend to guard. It may at times be used alone in asking questions, having the sense of " Do you want to," " Do you desire THE VERB. 137 to." This use, however, is riot common, and is pre eminently colloquial. Do you want to go along ? Do you want to read the book I brought yesterday ? As it is dark, do you desire to stop now ? I had intended doing it to day but friends came and I could not. I had intended going to g°l 3J*| 2^| vf morrow but affairs have turned up and I may go the day after. I had intended coming yesterday but it rained and I could not. I came up to Seoul intending to enters school but business at home calls me back. »>M y]7r asHH >M^ It intended to rain but the west wind blew the clouds away. 177. — A negative idea in Korean, may be expressed either by the use of a simple negative preceding the verb as in English, or a negative verb may be formed. When this is done, what has well been termed a Negative Base is used. This base is formed by affixing X] to the verbal stem. Strange to say, in many verbs we may have two forms of this base, one formed from the stem as found in 138 THE VEEB. the present indicative, and one from that of the future indicative. This same form of the verb is always used when a negative verb is employed. For its use and examples see If. 206 ff. 178. — It will be seen that four principal parts have been given, the Present Indicative, Past Verbal Participle, Future Verbal Participle, and Past Eelative Participle. With a knowledge of these any other parts can be formed. In the verb "§*.£. the stem is the same throughout, but in many verbs the stem as seen in the first three may differ. In the forming of the other parts this difference holds and, outside of the supine, desklerative base, verbal noun in a , and perfect tenses, the general rule may hold that, when the part or parts added to the stem begin with a consonant other than \s, the stem as seen in the future verbal participle will be used ; when with a vowel or I/, the stem as seen in the present indicative is followed. Note. — When the stem ends in a vowel and is followed by a vowel a contraction may take place ; when the stem ends in a consonant and is followed by a vowel, sometimes, euphony may require the main consonant to be doubled or another to be inserted. We find then : — I The Present Participle and 1/ those parts of the Volitive Mood whose terminations begin with a voweiiK I The Past, Fut-Past, Pluperfect and Prob- Fut-Past tenses of the Indicative. The Future Past Particile, the Supine and the Desiderative Base. ■The Future, Progressive and Continued Following the Put. la\\°{ t]£ I°?k?,tivei lhoa-e P,^'9 °,f Hie Vebal Participle ...{ V.ohtive Mood whose terminations begin r with a consonant: the verval noun in "fl; and the Negative Base. Following the PastfThe Future Relative Part, and the Verbal Relative Participle. \ Noun in o. TH1-: VEEB. 139 179. — We have, then, following : — . . The Basal Conjugation, principal parts. Pbesent Past Future Past Indicative. Verbal Paet. Verbal Pabt. Relative Part. ■$■£>} or t«f ■as. -5-7)1 $ Indicative Mood. Simple Tenses. Present ■$■.£. Do. Past ~$5$&. Did. Perfect Past "$"$!£!;£. Has done. Future *$"3j4i Will do. Put. Past "$"<£2l4i Will have done. Compound Tenses. Progre? sive "$"cj e] ■ef Am or was doing. 1st Pluperfect "§"5Jci t>]'cY-- Had done. 2nd Pluperfect "$"^^*1 tf-tf Had done already. Continued Future.. ^rT^ e>] «]-... Will be doing. Probable Fut. Past. ~^" $f 31 "^ «>] "•=> Must have done. Volitive Mood. 1st Persons Plural. 2nd Person. To inferiors, 1r*r 1 -a To inferiors, -r^^.-] d „ equals, -r^ •r „ equals, irn „ superior?, •ts*kJ „ superiors, ■$•&*].£. J a Participles. Verbal Relative. -^-e^l Present, "$"fe:. Doing, Past, or [having done. Past, "£, Done. -$e>y\ Future, ■§-, About to do. Future, ^71], Imperfect, -§" Verbal Nouns f*^ ^doing. Bases JNeg t^l.Todo. IDesid...... ~$^}, Desire to do. Supine "f3?. To do. Note. — In accordance with the true Korean idea, we have given no person in the indicative mood, and we would remind the student, that any one of the parts there given, may be used with equal cor rectness for first, second or third persons, singular or plural. We would also call his attention to the fact, that termination 3 in the declarative table, and 6 in the interrogative' coincide, both in form and in use. The forms given in the simple tenses may then be ased either affirmatively or interrogatively. 180; — A knowledge of the principal parts of any verb will enable us to carry it through this conjuga tion. Some of the most common verbs that are a little irregular in forming their princiral parts are given at the end of this chapter, and the student is advised to commit them. By way of illustration the following verbs are conjugated, and as a matter of practise it would be well to take other verbs and in like manner construct paradigms. The verb. *>}&• To know. 1. Principal Parts. 6>i, S6h 2*1, ft. 2. Moods, Tenses, etc. Indicative. Verbal Pabt.s. Relative Pabt.s. Pres 6>JL — 6>fe:. Past SSt^i %."} &• Perfect Past ... ^§t^4i — Fut ^3!^. gfl] t- THE VEBB. 141 Fut.Perf ^St^lA — ...... ^^t-S. Prog tMeJel- — ... t^d- 1st Pluper ... t*§h=i ©1«1- — 2naPluper ... & 5t^ "3 *>1 «> — — Cont. Put ... QtSf^*]-^ — Prob. F. P. ... »*?jM«>1t:1- — Inf. Equals. Sup. Volitive J 1st Pers. Plural, g*}, QM], Mood.\ 2nd Pers. § 6M> IH> Verbal Nouns. Supine. Bases. g7j. dH Desid The Verb. *}■£. To hinder. I.— ACTIVE VOICE. 1. Principal Parts. ^k, *K, ^71], ^^r •. 2. Moods, Tenses, etc. Indicative Verbal Part.s. Relative Part.s. Pies ^4. — Past ^^M. Hl-6> Fut ^5!4i ^J71] ... *)•-§.. Fut. Perf ... ^Vt7jl£. — ... ^j-%t>a. Prong . "Sj-el M t;> — ... ■sj-^i. 1st. Plup ^Mol** — 2nd PIutj ^SHiM ©l"c> ... — Cont. Fut ... «r7fl «1 ol «> — Prob. F. P. ... tl-qraMol-tfr- ... — Inp. Equals. Sup. Volitive fist Pers Plural. "J-*)-, «JvM), 3" &*]-«*. Mcod.\2nd Pers 2J-*M> ^l> 142 THE VEBB. Verbal. Nouns. Supine. Bases. 34- ^oa» ?es.v 5?1 «J3-71. 3-&.2f- Desid 3A«>- II.— PASSIVE VOICE. 3*1 £-• 1. Principal Parts. 3*1 JL. 3*H> 3*1*1. 3*1- 2. Moods, Tenses, etc. Indicative. Verbal Part.s. Relative Part.s. Pres 3*l£. — 3*I&- Past 3*1$*^. 3*Jal - 3*1- Perfect Past 3*l$i^4i — — Put 3*191^ 3*1*1 ... 31- F. Perf ... 3*I$32!4i — 3*Jft4'9- Prog -Sj-SH^-cT- — 3*1^- 1st. Plup ... HJ-SJsH&jt:]- — — 2ndPlup... 3*I642!'e10lT::l- — — Cant. F. ... 3*l2l'eH'cl- — ~ Prob. F. P. 3*J043l"c10l"cl- — — Inf. Equals. Sup. Volitive fist Pers. Plur. 3*1*>> 3*1 ^1> 3*1 &-M|^. Mood. 12nd Pers 3*I°1*h "4*171]. 3*1 S^VS.. Verbal Nouns. Supine. Bases. 3*J- «v*i«i Ne§ 3*1*1- 3*l7l. 3*1 ■*' Desid. ...3*1^- Verbs with Conjunctions. 181.— While the matter of con ; unctions should proper ly be left to the chapter on conjunctions ; they vary so much in their uniting with the verb, that a few words about them and their use is needed here. In use we find that some unite with the verb in the indicative, some join THE VEEB. 143 themselves to verbal participles, some to relative participles and some directly to the stem. 182. — The following list of some of the conjunctions that are most commonly used, divided into these classes should be learned. 1st. Those uniting with the tenses of the Indicative Mood:— i*3, Tj^g- If, when; conditional. v} Whereas ; causal and concessive. HlfSS etc I uJ] (in as much as, seeing that, since, 3%- i f as; marks the reason. ^_y«j, J preceded by l*' ...» W / Zj\j Because ; marks the cause. . l Although, whether; in part con- ' 1 cessive. -7J vi«. 1 Although, though ; concessive and ?j"*r • ( in part disjunctive. g> preceded by \s J ■n}-^ But, however ; disjunctive. 7^vJ- or 7-| v| Whether, as though, appears as. , \When after, since ; temporal and '' « J causal. «} And. Pi ov vi \^ ^ie ^me Mat, while. Used in •2- J, jLJ:. jJ. d j surprise, astonishment, blaming. Note. — With this last, t sometimes is used as a connective. 2nd. Uniting with verbal participles : — 3t Though, although; concessive. 3rd. Uniting with relative participles. 7t] ... Whether. 144 THE VERB. , i Whether, used also in soliloquies •" i expressive of doubt. _, ^, _ }Even though, although, though ; ' ■ r "' ' J concessive. . ) When, while, whereas, thotigh at ' "* > the same time. iXJsed) doubt, in orsoliloquies surprise. expressive of 71 tfl *I -cH l^n case ^a*» ^ '* snou^ be, under JHJ> J »I / those circumstance. 4th. Uniting with the stem. A And. , ri l While. Signifies simultaneous H" J action. There are some adverbs, interjections etc. that, uniting with the indicative tenses in the same way as conjunctions should be mentioned here. As:— JL x\- Why ! Interjection expressive of surpries. a. ^1 *>\ Why ! Interjection expressive of surpries. Note. — This is used with the verbal termination. t\7\ While; indicates an interruption. \fAn used exclamation in soliloquies. of surprise or wonder Note.— This particle is in much more common use in the Province of Kyeng Sang Do. It is there used to either superiors or inferiors in asking questions. 183. — As will be noticed, those uniting with the indicative are most numerous. When the conjunction is affixed, as has already been remarked, the termination is dropped. This being done the conjunction unites itself directly with the verb, but. euphony may make THE VERB. 145 some changes. With the exception of oj-fe conjunctions beginning with \s, a and "C, cannot unite themselves directly to stems or verbal forms ending in a consonant. A connective is needed and ,£. or *} is quite largely used for this purpose. With the present indicative, there being r.o tenee rcot, the conjunction unites directly with the veilal stem and the rule may hold that with all stems ending in a con sonant other than 2, ,/», or U, Sl will be used. Of course when there is a latent -$•, it will appear bt fore the Sl- With those ending in / orU, often the final letter may be doubled or another consonant may enter in. The only rule that we can give in this matter is, that all verbs whose stems end in /> and U take the form of the stem found in the Past Relative Particiral ar.d may be formed by dropping the final \s of the Past Relative Participle and adding the conjunction. "Verbs whose stems end in s are joined to conjunctions beginning with E» directly, without any connective ; and when joined to those beginning with 1^-, the e is dropped. As those ending in a vowel : — S.SL (to come), 2.^5. (if come), i^f (although come). *J-A (to sleep), x\*3. (if sleep), x\i} (although sleep), ^■i (to give), ^-°3 (if give), ^} (although give}. &S. (to use), ^=3 (if use), &\\ (although use). Those ending in consonants other than />, U or H : — IJi. (to eat), "Az.'Q (if eat), al £.H (although eat). f-d=.(todie), ^S.°d (if (lie). 5\S.»+ (although die). ■%£. (to hide), -g- A'd (if hide), ■£• 6.4 (although hide). Sl£. (to be plentiful).?! *B (if plentiful), >&3:»i (although plentiful). 146 THE VEEB. Those ending in /. and M : — 51:4. (to receive), K.I*. $■& then 5tA?! (If receive etc. 5>i (to suit) „ 5>S ,. 3t*3 (If suit) „ *^i (to be lacking) „ <$■£ „ %*& *(If lacking) „ 5i (to ask) „ ^-S „ ^e^ (Ifaek) „ 5i (to hear) „ El „ Hi? 3 (If hear) „ • Those ending in 2 : — *}&. (to know) Stem g : |}^ (If know), »rH- (although know). -f i (to blow) „ -§ ; -§^ (If blow), 4H (although blow). \i (to fly) „ fe ; £ (it suited). (if it suited). (although it suited). 71-514!, 7r2(!*l^, 7>5)^M. (he will go). (if he will go). (although he will go). (he will get). (if he will get). (although he will get). 184. — All other conjunctions, etc. unite themselves directly with the form of the verb without the aid of any connective. As:— i\-7]^ If he go. ^7]^- Ifhehear. 7r5] 1\ ^ • Since he will go. ^z1\i\.. Whether he hear. 185. — In this place it will be well to give a few words on the * ^3*] ^j Is also largely used. THE VERB. 147 Meanings and Uses. . of some of these conjunctions. «| and Tj-xl-. Both these conjunctions have a con ditional force. The first is simply conditional, and is rendered into English by if. It may be united with any one of the tenses simple or compound. When united to the simple tenses, we have simple supposition, but when, to the compound, it generally has the idea of supposition con trary to fact. It is always used when the apodosis expresses a natural or consequential sequence. It is in regard to the second of these that we find the greatest difficulty. While most rightly acknowledge that 7-J^c- has largely a temporal sense and may be almost always translated as " when " or " as soon as," this is not found to meet all cases. It is generally found that ^ can replace y] ^g- without objections but there are many places where y] •§■ can never take the place of °f . It has been said that y] ^g- can be used where the apodosis expresses a condi tional command (a statement found to be true) but in such places there are many who find a shade of distinction be tween ^ and 7-J-g. This rule has been widened to Tjg-. being used where the action in the apodosis is subject to the will of the actor and not a natural sequence of the conditions as expressed above, but it is soon discovered that this rule is not always true and that the exceptions are almost as numerous as the examples. A sludy of the following examples will it is believed help us to understand the uses of these conditional particles but the rule as given 148 THE VERB. above that y] ^ cannot be used where the apodosis ex presses a natural or consequential sequence always holds. !•#■ Al"1\i >^£l3ab: If you buy a horse, there is 4r^l ^4i. no need for a chair. ^IU ^-M^l ^ 7r*1 If Mr. Kim brings the J&^li 3- 'tJ-fs- *}?$&.■ money to-morrow ; I will buy that house. e*fe "§ ^$fcci°d ^r If I had known that he ■S-21 2J-5Jjt. was sick I would have gone to see him. 3. ^-i- "A 5! ci °d b\ H If he had taken that medi- ^5d2'-^- cine, he would not have died. ^y\ tSMDd -£ 7|-71] If I had known, I would "^$351 &■• nave prevented his going. *]•?» 7r'c11^ M-H 7J- If you were going now, I ?j} A.. too would go. AS ^"1 #7^4 If a letter should come take ■r H eh care of it. 3tl6l 5.^ ^ uKi. 7] ^. V]7r s.«f.£. 13 -^ I will accompany you *I-fr7fl.*. >s *-«-*- " ffas soon as., the ship ,. comes in. Wl7^l {*[* *l*g $*] {When it clears up, I will 7r*J 7j- 51 4:. take the letters to Chai EyuDg. ^|7> AJ^ $fc 51^ {^hen it rains shut the *}■• windows. *M ^{^p*^^ jWhen your are t.red of 4] aj 7/-^} c]-. walking let us rest a while at the inn. *3*l7r *H A {*{* {^hen the letter does not $J c1 ^1 1 &! ty. *" come, what am I to do ? *W 1 {J* ^ <*!-§• {^hen it is muddy, put on •$lii.<*l £.. your wooden shoes." 150 THE VERB. BW 12^ AW °Mli {]^hen it is dear, don't buy it. 1*1 *HT {^* ^l*l { Jhen your horee is not °M] A- strong, don't ride her. 31 "?! or the same with the postposition fe, ^1 ^1 is really a composite conjunction. It means, in case that, if it should be that and this thought is simply emphasized by the adding. of the Appositive Postposition. ^4 £3*1 4*13*1 If you are going to study **4*K be diligent about it. £€■£ 2^*1 ^"?r#-§- If you should go to Korea, ?53tr^*h visit the " Diamond Mountains." *}*!■#■ Jii^^i **i*i If you should send the $•§■ WMJL^eF. servant, give him careful instructions. *-1 6Hf^J S*W If you do not do it yourself ^1 *H4- get somebody else to do it. 186 — H. This conjunction has been the source of much discussion because, at times, it was found giving a simple causal effect ; and then, again, without any apparent reason, implying opposition to something that follows, something unexpected. On examination we find that with the simple tenses the first sense always appears but with the compound the second sense may be found. (a) H is then exactly equivalent to the English word whereas, which may have this .dual idea and is used in TltE VEliB. 15 1 the same connections. With simple tenses, v} is equi valent to, considering that, it being the case that, as, since : with the compound, however, " when in fact," "while — on the contrary ; " introducing something un expected or at limes introducing a result and marking the cause. - . , (b) A combination of this ^ with ,2. (reason) in con nection with the relative participle gives us a very common idiomatic expression used to introduce the reason or cause as. (a) «ltf *■¥■ *3MH S3- Come early to-morrow, as £.*] Si. we will study. *&*S ** *3i*H $.x\ Since he has been a success *\%&- ful merchant, he is now rich. A} •#•-§■ iis 7\ 5] rH I was going to Seoul to-day V]y\ S]/4 % 3J-i». but it rained and I did not. ^I-fr ^ ^lSd^lH 3^*11 I built a good house but it St^/fc. took fire. ^^-g- 7|-2):jt *fl#.5L Intending to go to Japan I ^7^1 ^t^H ^l"7r ^ went as far as Chemulpo, i}tf % 7\SL S5, but, the boat had gone £{- &. and I could not, so came back. ^ij*. Q irc1H ■^•'^ * Because he studied hard ^vL^l^r SISS A.- ne became a renowned scholar. 152 THE VERB. s 5} *j -§■ c] u) £ yj £| 71] He was arrested by the *»•«£., police because he stole. (b) e|/i|*ftl 5J| »a>M- 1T^ If vcu want to know why 3L "SH -f*7r ^7l# Mr. Yi has gone into ^16U- business it is because he aims to be a rich man. £1*1 •$<$ tM'SM -2.^ The reason why Mr. Kim jyjL^I6,l ^H-^S-^H intends to start next -3-**>go] SJfe *?& Monday morning, is be- 6i ^ cause he has some urgent business. aA}| t] Sij ■^-^■gjo.-f H If you want to know why vj-el-^l 5.£ «*^-§- he is renowned, it is be- Q-t] •* /|.£.. because his friend was taken sick. Note:— It is when the conjunction is used with the compound tenses that we begin to find our difficulties for when added to the tense roots of any of the compound tenses except the Progressive, it may le used of all three presons, while most grammars assert that with the Progressive tenses it can not be used in the first person. This latter rule is not quit correct for where there is no^ causal or concessive sense involved and no definite time expressed, it may be used also of the first person. In other words, of habitual action, it may be used of the first person. If on the other hand, time, cause, or concession ii expressed, it can only Le used for the second or third person. THE VERB. 153 Examples : I used to be quite a walker, but now I am not. I used to be a non-believer of Christ, but now I am a good Christian. You failed in your examina tion because you had been idle last term. He sawed wood yesterday but he is not doing any thing today. You worked hard among ^m'-a *m g* tt*i our people for the sake of Christianity and now the people appreciate your service. It was very cloudy this *|7r ii. morning and now it rains. 187. — ■*ij7}- with its various modifications, vi\t -^- or ■2^£. preceded by Is, and 2Ji^l, all mark the reason, or that on account of which something is done. The strongest of these is -if- which is about the equiva lent of the English word because. a t\^0] 6J,§. $ -$• Because that servant works M?r ^\ tl **H well he has been in this ^fSU- house many years. BHr tf*l °-m*N7r As I eat heartily a little *1# *i £ D43U. while ago, I cannot eat more now. 154 THE VEItB. 2} 6] ig-oij S.yl7l- 1?t"$"611 As the journey i3 a long one, ^7jJ £,. the traveling expenses will be heavy. ;ge>| ^.j]£vi\ -SJ $4Jr As the load is heavy, call •^•^-fr -^vi| ef. a strong coolie. QA\ -U]^^" ^-t- ^Jii. I can not buy it, because the price is high. *1 -§»-& ^b] *&£■ &t >! As I have plenty of money ~Q-$e>Y £$*}• now, I must pay tmy debts. ^■?] has a little more of a temporal sense, and may often almost be translated by a conditional clause. rt<*l ^i2!- if'tl'Sl -^ Since I have thought over %J e>] ftj-v] S|7jj4i. the matter again, that affair will not succeed. 61 y]th§" a wl'vh6,l After comparing this satin Hl^^l 61 y]^t-£r *fl with thafc» tbis ia very ^6) uj #[•.£.■ dear. 5.Q ^% V]$t 3-7d^\ Now that I have tried the r^^6| a1s1# ^ "§".£.• s^y of Korean, I think it will be extremely dif ficult. ^ ft=] and ^J'ti^l are used to introduce a petition or request or to express earnest desire. H 52^1 ^ %•& 7l&li May your Majesty be long <§- •§■>*] &£.A^. preserved. *&?d'$\ *l>*r X*l tr<*l I pray you do it this way. ■^ 5Q«1 31] *}•}>: -3.^ My earnest desire is that -§• H.IL*] § Ji/^. your Majesty will listen to those words. THE VERB. 155 ^ ^1*1 *1*r X*l "$"-*l I earnestly hope that you 7l ■§• V er V 61 *}■ will do it with me. 188. — Z| V| . This is a contraction of the ending of the verbal noun in 7], with the postposition «] and a form derived from the verb e|.£, (to be). It signifies because, and shows that the action expressed by the verb that it governs, was the real cause of the action contained in the principal verb of a sentence. It is stronger than any of the conjunctions given in If, 186, and 187, as it marks a result, following from a cause. ■3- tS-61 -Sf^i6] ^Tfl ■^■iT Because that fellow insulted ?}\] ij-W] 7r3E$t4i- nie without reason, I had • him locked up. £*H ^ 3M 4-fc Because I am afraid of 7r*]:n. ^M£..* robbers I carry fire arms. *W yl?r SL^M *# I put on my water proof, ■k YJSte. because it was raining a little while ago. 189. — \\ is equivalent to though, or although, and has a concessive force. It is used with verbs of knowing, telling, etc., where we would use the English word ichethcr. Eepeated after co-ordinate clauses it is equivalent to either —or, See 269 **.£. ^fM" ^4. ^-£ He talks well enough, but •f £.. he cannot work well. 3"£ ^JH-f .S.7lu: 5.4i- Though the price is small, it looks well. x\v\. tj|-uj. i? 9 t>j\ g, -§■.£.. Sleep or not, suit yourself. * Literally Because thieves are to be feared I cany fire arms. 156 THE VERB. * °] sl-& -^-Avf ArH" 1" You ought to do this whe- 7]*]£l- ther j'ou die or live. 190. — 7-Jt^^}., ■?] (sometimes written S|), and 1| pre ceded by \s, may all be rendered by, though, although, as though, as if, however, etc. They generally have a con cessive force, but we quite often find them employed where in English we would use a disjunctive. o] >«j#-& 0-^H£r Q^ Although I eat this fish, I 4r5.m&- do not know its name. -#-£: ^$WH*r iSfe Though I fired off my gun, I did not get the deer. Though there are plenty of cats, they do not catch the rats. 3lfe 3.*] t4r x4&. Though he is tall, his feet are small. *4W| -Tb: g-Sr tf*l Even though a man does a 11 ^54 1f2!VH=- host of useless things, of what account is it ? *-£ £*l *M: ^-fct Even though you bring medicine, after a man is dead, is it any use ? 191. — nj-»r. This word, unlike most Korean conjunc tions, refers more to what follows, than to what precedes it. It may consequently appear at times, at the beginning of a sentence, and at times we do find it also, standing alone at the end of a sentence. All such sentences are, however, incomplete. It may be rendered into English THE VEBB. 157 by but, however, etc. In its union with the verb, .the termination may be retained, or it may be replaced by 7$. Note. — In connection with this word, we should not forget that it is not much used by Koreans. They as a rule, prefer to use one of the concessive particles, and generally transpose the sentence and do so. At times they express the same idea by the use of the verbal noun in Tji with the postposition fe. See If 173. It seems almost as though the Korean prefers to use any other phrase than this, and careful at tention, will reveal the fact that Df- £ is much more commonly used by foreigners, or Koreans with whom they are associated, than by Koreans generally. A few illustrations of its use are given : — 5.^1 fe: 5.^r v\\£ #*1 Jt i8 good. but ifc is dear. y]u: •&*} "Ffe 7rh: 7M1 I* i3 raining, but we had &.%!*]■. better go. ^f|-§- ^A 2i 7\SL v\xZ I am going out to get a ^-l-^*! S2f5J4i- pheasant, but I do not know whether I shall succeed. 192.— 7]tf-, 7^H- This conjunction is generally re peated and may be rendered into English by whether — or. The -?] H form is used quite frequently alone with ■§".£. expressing appearance and may be translated by think. 7}7W «f7W °j1S Go or not, do as you wish. tJTji-r -g-Tjvf *JZ^)J3. Eat or starve, do as you -§■_£_. . think best. 3.7\ H *% 7] H *■}£.- Whether it is large or small, buy it. :£■«.•$■ Tii^-^roj A] vf*]^ It seemed as though he ■^"S^jLv}-. would study but he fri.tered away his time. ■£.?! M ^ 3" 1T S3 ii< I thought he was coming. 358 THE VERB. 1.93. — ~1\ Is signifying when, after, since, as, has both a temporal and causal effect. It is found for the most part in books, but may at times, though very rarely be used in conversation.* , The verb <>]£. gives us the form ^l6!^. 3*1 T1 71- -3J-3] «]■ ~§"7-|Si When they say a friend is $3*1 6IH 7i.J^7\ 51^ dying how can one but eji. go? ^S ArS^l H b] 3. %\ When some one else says -§• V]i\- 7\tf '%*} "f that you took the book; 7] ^ 5J^1 V|] 7]- 6)"H how can you say you did 7r*1 #^ f5!VH=- not? 194. — x^. This conjunction is simply connective and signifies and. Unlike its equivalent sl which commonly unites directly with the stem, ^ generaly unites with the tenses ar.d then replaces the terminations. While the distinction is not strictly adhered to n} .generaly connects acts that are carried on simultaneously, jl those that are successive. tr-g- ^.^ ^-^. ■%$■ Can I eat arid study (at the $IVH=. same time)? *i;^S^ #-¥•! bA*m How can you both play and *Sl. study ? 6j^i #*«* im #v When did you go and when t- did you come ? * Some say that ft ^ and at^ (195) are the same.. THE VERB. 159 195. — ja.tjj, a 'ft, .2.^. These are but three different forms which the same conjunction may assume. They may be rendered into English by — at the time that, when, while, though at the same time, when in fact, and are UFed in expressing surprise, astonishment, and in reproach. As a rule, they unite directly with the verb, after i(s termination has been dropped, but fe may be used as a connective. *1# wl7>ib: -a- "J BH Even now. while the rain is ^}jl fVH=. coming down, do you say it does net rain ? *1 *J*1 -i: £^.pJ »H When your house is on fire, 7I-V+- are you not going? £>M s.S>jj tf^a Though the pencils are t&. good, at the same time, he says they are bad. 3^**1 M*.DJ W* Though Mr. Kim was in *53*. he said, he was out. 196. — H- This conjunction signifies, though, although, and has a concessive force, but is commonly only found united with the past verbal participle. ■*1# 7r3t 3. *r§ -e-t- Even though ycu go now fe ^3 &.• you can not see that man. #■£ *]#}£ ^7r *r3Jix- Though the price is high, I will buy. S.-jf-^-.g: £M2 6>n? ^- Even -though the . chair 7r3]cl'-. coolies have come, per haps he will not go. •i ^j-§- ^7V Hjl 'Mfll2E Although I would like to %t>] ^-^•^■7jjj1. buy that house, I cato not afford it. 160 THE VEBB. 197. — *], 7\ and jt. *1 and y\ are both used with relative participles and signify whether, whether — or, with verbs of knowing and rot knowing, etc. In uniting with the participles, except the future participle in 2 , they can unite directly and no connective is needed. With this, however, ^ is needed as a connective. We find these conjunctions largely in use with those relative partciples that are derived from the various simple and compound tenses by affixing Jr and W. Both these conjunctions are also largely used, (7r more frequently) in soliloquies, expressive of doubt and hesitation and at such times they are joined directly to the Future Eelative Participle with out the connective ^ . Sometimes joined direct to the stem v). becomes -*7r. With reference to the word jt, it may be said that it also has this latter sense, and is used in the same way. it. Si £.fe*l J2.Bf3]4i- I do not know whether he will come to-day. ""I" "^S^fe^l J¥LB1 A6ref- Ascertain whether he has finished. ^ wl ^1 *0l7\ ^.^ i-u1 eh Go an3 find out whether he is at home. b\^\ %\L7\ S^ ^4i- I can not tell whether he came yesterday. ?l |J 2^*1 i*f5JA- I clo not know whether I shall go to-morrow. &J -cj f\] -£ wj s;| 7j. . How had I better do it ? U-& y\M Af^i Sd^lf-S.- How would it be to go to Japan and buy it? 198.— 7;] e}3£. This conjunction is fonnd only with the regular future, and future past relative participles. It has the sense of though, although, even though etc., and is THE VEEB. 161 the strongest of the Korean concessives. With the future participle, it has a present and hence with the future past, a past sense. rh*l i^-Jt g*| v}5i Even though you tell him t>}^] JL3Jj». to come again, he will not. Sf "^-t-^lehS -3-2! ii- Even though you take the medicine, you will die. t>]H 33"S*lBr3E % Although I went yesterday, 5J^j4i. I did not meet him. 199. — ■?! is equivalent to tchen, while, whereas, though at the same time, and is joined to relative participles. yl?r Ak^ ^ 7\Sl- Why are you going when it is raining ? a ^-i- ^ ^15J5j:^1 -$1 Whereas they built that ^vj-jL -$£.• house well, why do they want to pull it down ? ^l*J-& £^61 'Jt*! £. When there are a host of ^Ik^l 6h£3J "Sl^ti" friends coming to-mor- Tl'S *r*l . 61"H "$"SJ row, have you not bought VM1* a thing with which to entertain them ? 200. — SL. Like t^, this conjunction is, as a rule, simply connective, and may be rendered into English by and — See p. 194. To this the oppositive postposition $r is often added giving us the effect almost of a conditional. Note. — Tliis same connective may be affixed to any one of the tenses in the forms ending in *>)■, and used with tf.fi. ; it then gives us the regular form for indirect discourse. 162 THE VEEB. -t £tJt x}7]9}. Put out the light and go to sleep. t,]x\] 7>ol i§ &. Tk^- He went yesterday and again to-day. 3£3E Sj^JJ- ^^H S. As both the flowers are out, JLH tJ^J "$"e1 "?r& and lne weatner 's ^ne' jA -c^# ^3t us take a walk. ^IsJ-g: ^^S. ^.51^ As the Minister and the Pre- ^jfrjj^l H 5.3M1H sidentofthe Foreign Office S.£ -^54 AT" Av1 ?f • are both coming to-mor row ; buy some good fruit. °JVH5>- cannot but succeed. *-1X*l ^-tr^l^fe ^t"j"" Nobody can live and be as aj i_ O ek much in debt as you are. vl^Wfe: v*l 7>4| 7=] ^"g You cannot rest while I am -c^ here. ■c^S 4-$l6l Sl^fe M- lf there were such Patriots ej.7i »}•-§- 7;] ^IHlT as that the country could i_ o 5]-. not lose. 201.— jivf and a. ^] 6> are both interjections expressive of surprise, and are used with the indicative tenses, With jtvf the termination is dropped; with ~L V]*}, it is retained. It may be rendered into English by why! preceding the clause. jtvj- is often contracted with -& and we have the constantly used ending f •£ often pronounced as though is were •$•# and not uncommonly wrongly so written. V]j\ »1^1S. i^iH £,£ Why! It was raining yes- X ife a.vf. terday and it is raining again to-day. THE VEEB. 163 ^l #^I St] 7}- AS Why! The boy who came a£ ^ ja,vf. yesterday, has come again to-day. AS ^f^l =5-^ £-3- "Why! It will rain again ^IH /!S w]7> A3] ■£■ to-morrow, for the South wind has been blowing all day. 7^w] ^*| ^.j^. Xf H Why! It is wonderful that 6] "^ "t?A .3. "| 6h the flowers in winter are like those of spring. ^AJ^J-6] b]x\] 45Jii Why! Mr. Kim died yes- aej*1]-. terday. «► n]-^ «>] tf\~Q *-^- ^± Since the wind is blowing $f*l7r ^l^lii ^.^*T-- so hard, it will indeed, be a great conflagration. 202. — ~c}7\. Signifies while, at the time that when, and implies an interruption. It is a conjunctive adverb, and may unite with any of the simple tenses of the indicative. It may at times be rendered by but. Ate StsW 3>H#-i- 5t I met Mr. Kim when I was tfA- was coming to Seoul. 61 *-& ££ 7r«M I got this disease when I H5U- was going to Japan. o]^ 7r'r^7V »M #*• I intended to go to America, but did not. AS ^*1 A^K* ^ I intended to see the Minis .&*&■ ter to-day, but did not. 203. — vt$.J$- This conjunctive adverb also signifies while, but it has the sense of simultaneous action,~and indicates that the actions expressed by the dependent, and 164 THE VEEB. the principal verbs were carried on at the same time. The Koreans however recognize that the action of the depen dent verb may occur at any point during the course of action expressed by the principle verb. *j j£ig/4 ^ *q±. He smokes, while he reads his book. 7]. ti^/jj 6}.h *$'$*1'C1" Let us consult about it, while we are going. tJ- n4 A y&A ^1 Jt^iJ^i- 1 wil1 rea The Desideeative Verb. 204.— The regular desiderative verb is formed by the use of the desiderative base and ~$£.. generally connected by the connective St. The ji may, however, be dispensed with, and then still further contractions may take place. tHE VERB. 165 When sach desideratives are formed, they can ba carried through the whole basal conjugation. They are equivalent to the English words to desire to, to intend to, to want to. As:— "^.fi.2^ ^"A To intend to eat. 7]-a|:ji -$•£. To intend to go. ^[•sfjl -$•£. To intend to sleep. 205. — Another from of the desiderative may be obtained by the use of jL^ or jl *} affixed to the verbal stem> with -$".£.. In use these two are often interchangeable, and both signify, desire, intention. The true distinction between these, is, that while the form in Bf or ^} signifies rather desire, wish, that in Xf or x\ has more the idea of purpose, intent. *]« -H# SI'M'M 72M As I am at Seoul now, I $-§• J£.j1.7^ -$-£.. purpose seeing Mr. Kim. °1"3" ^l^*^ ^|-f^l# While I was in America, I Af-jO.?*} "$"S3^* intended buying a steam boat. S'li -Jf^^r SJ-S "$"-fl-x1 I intend consulting with the "§".&.• Korean Minister. Further illustration of both these desiderative forms will be found in Part II. Chap. I, § III. Sec. 13. Negatives. 206. — There are in Korean two negatives, &£ or tyHi and -5^. Both are simple negatives and may be rendered into English by not. $t, however, always brings in the 166 THE VERB idea of the will of the subject ; -5J- on the other hand, generally conveys the idea of inability, and is used in negations that were brought about generally, without an act of the: will of the subject of the verb. This distinction between %t and % should not only always be recognized when listening to Koreans, but must always be observed in speaking. By a lack of discrimination in this matter, the most ludicrous mistakes often occur. These words may be^ used adverbially when they precede the verb they negate. On account of the distinction mentioned above, -^ may often be rendered by the English can not. *]■£ ^1 *]-.&.• He is not sleeping now. 6^1 ftj ?&&.. He did not go yesterday. *1^-cr £t ,n3j4i' I will not take any supper. -$-*E "5c ^ *+.£.• I can not start to day. 6]-^. .g. jj.5t4i- I did see you before. ^"lb: ^c .S.3J 4i- I can not come afterwards. 207. — These same words may be united with *§".&., when they form negative verbs, and still maintain the distinction mentioned above. When these negative verbs are used, they are preceded by the negative base of the verb they negate. Thus they give us a negative form of the principal verb. From the verb ^,4i, we have the negative base *£,?;] which joined to the negative verb t>}<\ "§" .£., gives us £*] *>}^\ "§".£.. But the fcj-v) and the "§".£. may contract into 9&£.; the *1 and the Q into Q and we have then ^,^]:4i as the negative of the verb £ .&, {to be bright) . In like manner from any verb, a negative verb may be formed, which in turn, may be carried through the whole THE VERB. 167 basal conjugation. In forming a negative from the nega tive base, with ^ "$".&., from the nature of the case, con tractions cannot occur. Negatives. S4», To be good, S.*l »Hti or 5.*^. ^ 4. , To eat, ^*1 'Hti ., ^A. $■£., To give, ^*1 'Hti ,. M*. ■gHi, To walk, "gH*l »H-TA .. SH^. *S7}-£. lTobebothei ^J £., ' some, $£., Toaie, **1 6H"TA » ^^A- 208. — The negative verb nf£. (to avoid) is much more iue 209. — Certain verbs have corresponding negative forms, such as, to want, and, to refuse ; to know and to be igno rant of ; and, where these exist, they are of course used in- preference to the negative form that might be derived in the manner described above. For example : — 2. $j- f A- To like. ^$\ <^ t£. To dislike. «>]■.£. Toknow. JsLefji. To be ignorant of. 3.& To be big. *}.£, To be small. -^-J. To be high. ^A To be low. 168 THE VEEB. $J4» To exist. Q£. To be lacking. ^3x To eat. && To fast. Auxiliary Verbs. 210. — There are a number of verbs in Korean, which joining themselves to other verbs or parts of verbs, give not so much a double sense to the new verb thus formed, but a new sense, derived from the union of the two. These verbs have been termed auxiliary verbs, and while the term, thus used, does not signify the same as when used in most grammars, we see no reason to make a change. Many of the verbs thus used as auxiliaries retain their original meaning throughout, and as a rule, a careful study of the auxiliary, and the form of the verb with which it is used will give an accurate understanding of the joint meaning of the two as used together. • In their use, we find that they are joined sometimes, to the verbal participles, sometimes, directly to one or other of the simple tenses, sometimes another particle is interposed, and sometimes they are joined to the relative participle. One and the same verb, may act as auxiliary in all these ways. The greater number, however, are joined to the verbal participles. 211. — The following is a list of the most common, divided into classes, according to their method of uniting with the verb : — 1st. Those united to the verbal participle : — SJj. Tobe. S)_S. To become. Jl.£. To come Jf-jg. To leave. 7r£. Togo. *]£. To grow. _2.£, To see. I $■£. To give. Zi-trSL preceded by O.^g | *& To do. THE VERB. 169 2nd. Joined to verbal tenses : — _}££., connected by if. (to see) . 3rd. Joined to relative participles : — jj.ii connected by 7r, (to see). -$ i* , connected by 7r, (to want). 4th. Joined to the stem : — 3J &, connected by jl, (to be) . ■^} Ja, connected by SL, (to want). &% &., (to be worthy of). ^ "] ■&■> (*° regard as). These are but a few of the auxiliaries in common use ; and , as has already been said, an exact rendering of them, with the connecting particles and the verb they join, will always give the meaning to be conveyed. A few words, however, about some of them will illustrate this and aid the student. 212.— ii. ?)■£., and *] £.. The first two verbs are affixed to verbal participles, and mark the movement, here or there, as the case may be. 7\Sl is also affixed to neuter verbs, signifying that the state expressed by the neuter verb is gradually and constantly increasing ; and *J jfc, ha3 this same sense. These verbs then, correspond to what in Latin are known as "Inceptives." V el $- To lower, V^i-S- To come down, yejTr.2. To godown. £.«? S. To raise, ^H-ii To come up, •§■<-} 7r£ To go up. £,rfc To be bright. £i*^7r£ To grow bright. 3 dt To be black. £ <►) *| 2. To gro w black. S4. To be old, £y&1 7r£ To grow old. 213. — Jt.fi. (to see) may be found used as an auxiliary, united either with a verbal participle, or with a relative participle, or with a simple "tense. 170 THE VERB. 1st. United with a verbal participle ; no connective is needed, and the verb ii generally then has the sense of, to try. But, at times, it and the verb for which it acts as an auxiliary, may be rendered into English by one word. ^^.SLJL," Eating try " to taste. -T^Jiis.. "Asking see" to inquire. *]*]£.£:., "Cutting try " to try to ait. 214.— 2nd. United with the relative participles, or with a simple tense, with 7r and vj- respectively as connectives, it signifies probability, likelihood. This sense comes naturally from a literal translation, and ~Q7\2.$l, lit. " Gone looks," means " It looJcs as thouyh he has gone," or "He has probably gone" Again M]£. 3] v|- -&.$.. lit. " Bain will come though it looks," means " It looks as though rain will come," or " It will probably rain." _£.££. 'fcjvj-h: 7\ _&.£.. He probably starts to-day. >M"i"^ i!"u: 7r -S.5- He has probably come from Seoul. ^l^-cr ^51 fe 7r -SLA- He will probably eat it to-morrow. m**! yl?r *?1"*I .S.H As there is a good deal of ^*d sl^U^f ii ram *h's summer, it will probably be a year of plenty. -^^t6! 'Sji.M ■§:''] *^*1 As there is but a Utile coal 5J vj- Jt A- tne fire wil1 Probablv g° out. Q7% 2& A ^-§r j£3j If you put on your glasses O. £.£.. you can probably read ' that book. THE YEEB. 171 215.—^ •$•£. preceded by a, is united with the verbal participle, past or future, and signifies, to be tcorthy of-. This was the original and true meaning of the word, but we find it to-day, used also in the sense of possibility, and even probability. Note.— The auxiliary, here used giving what we might call a future sense to the verb with which it is used, may be employed interchange- bly with the future or past participle, though the past is the more frequent. ■3- •§•*] C.S 7&4r *|-T* That food that has been VA tJ"^ "$".&.• prepared is tempting. MlrSJ .^SH 54 k The flowers in Mr. Yun's 3J-&- % Ji. ^"^ "$■ A- garden are worth seeing. 216. — i^%&.. This auxiliary also has the meaning of " to be worthy of"; and is joined with the verbal noun, or any abstract noun. It may also be joined to the preceding auxiliary, replacing "§".£.. When so used the meaning is unchanged. ■&.-H #6) y*^ >i^4i. Mr. Oh is a lovable man. •^ ^ ^-^ 'I "f" 4i-§- That soldier is quite active. ^f^l ^SH'S i?t*l He ought to go that far if "3 H ^^j £^%£.- he has twelve hours. AS-£r «)7f £^ £.% &.■ It looks as though it will rain to day. *t\ ^^j £.% &.- He looks as though he could jump- . 172 TfiE VERB. 217. — ^^. This word may be used either with the verbal stem, or with the relative participle. 1st. Used with the verbal stem, jn. is interposed as a connective, and jL^J.&. may then be rendered into English by " Iwant to " " 1 desire to." 7\ JI. ^} 4i. To want to go. *]• jL ^ £.. To want to sleep. ^jI *&&.■ To want to eat. 2nd. Used with the Eelative Participle, 7r or ^ or X > must be interposed as a connective. So used -*J £. indicates strong probalility, and shows that while the subject of the verb, does not know for a certainty, jet he has strong reason to believe, that the action or state contained in the verb to which -*| £. acts as an auxiliary, is a fact. -g-6] *flt£6l *J"*F %% I am in great pain and >C "tj 4t. probably can not live. S. "% t>] A*] -£ ~f[ "A- You will most probably not ■^Ja. come. ^°1 ^ * S^ *&&.■ I do not think the house will be a good one. SlU-gr ?£% 221. — The following list of the nonns most commonly eo used will explain this. ■$• {means) with 3J4i 1 All signify ability. ^t (ability) „ -$£[. [Rendered into English by *j (law) „ $[£. J can, could, etc. ■ 222. — A few words on the most important of these, with illustrations of their uses are necessary. 4-, yi, and «J are for the most part, used with the future rel. part, of the verb, to signify ability, or inability, and a past is generally rendered by the past tense of •$£., or *J Jr. Note.— The <3 often has the effect of the English terniinative, able after a verb or noun, meaning suitable for, fit, worthy of etc. * Note.— These cannot then be renered into English by ought not and should not, which can only be rendered by the negation of the verb which these auxiliaries accompany. For instance— '£2A<>W 2. does not mean " I should not go," but that "lam under no obligation to go." On the other hand, *>rvj ~S?] -»|i "I ought not to go." 176 THE VERB. ^e>] ^}-£-^- § Q^ As I am short of money I *J J.. can not buy a horse. 5.£j7r 3J£.H ^9*1 ^,+' As I nave no paper, I can ^ji». not write a letter. j, -#>£7r T^-2f •£'j"-$j4x. As those characters are large I can see them. 613£& ^^1 ~1F£l.- I can use this pen. 3. ^e>] 4£^£ "$".&.. That is a readable book. t>m >tej ^jA] H 5t^--t- As lie Ieft yesterday I was *J^4i. not able to meet him. *>} ty 2c efl fe =|^ That song of a little while •§"5l4s.* aS°i was worth hearing. VI ^H1^ ^l"! 31^ If one does not have a boat, ^ 61 ^J4x- he can not cross the sea. ^ 61 31 -M ""H ^ -3- *$ -^ If I bad had some medicine RQ tJ61 5i-^4i- I could have cured that disease. 223.— 7$, £■}, and &J, when used to signify duty, are generally preceded by the future participle in H and can be rendered by " ought to," or should." The fast sense is, strange to say, generally expressed by the use of the pastof$j4i, These same auxiliary nouns, preceded by the future past participle, give us the English " ought to have," of strong conviction." _3_*[ tj|7]. 4J. 7] A] St.- I ought to read that book. *|-$«1 *fl7r ^3cS ^ 1 ought to go Song Do -j\ X\ £.. next month . a t\^.4; ^^J ^e]*Ii. That servant ought to be honest. ^^Ife S^ *>) #yt>]i. You ought to write the letter. THE VEEB. 177 ij\i\. 6jxi| ^-g-5. %■>£ The boat must have reach- 7] A] £.• ed Chemulpo yesterday. &|.jp. /.] %\^/>]^\ 3. As it is past twelve that ^l0] ^P'B ^i *].£.■ man must have gone. t>}~*-\) J^ejf] -§-$J-e|Tg If you had been energetic er ^\ 5! ^ ^ 61 .&-• i** would have been finishd ed yesterday. 224. — ■»£, This word, with •$"£. preceded by a future participle, signifies to be on the point of, to jtnt miss, to almost accomplish the act of the principal verb. 5=*j njv). 4^-§-^ "$"$iix- I met with thieves and came near losing my life. 7j.«]-7|. -i-^!^ t|w] As I was going I almost SHI "tT^^x- fell over a stone. 225. — 3.^r (appearance) may be used with any one of the relative participles and may be rendered into Eng lish by " it appears," or " it seems as though," with a present, past, or future verb, as the case may be. This is sometimes shortened to simple *& gives us such forms a3 |^6. S., or t^AS; % tyo]^ or •§"*£e>],?i. *]-!?■ -§»-sJb: S.bt}r 6li- He seems to be reading now. *>}*% "Q 3.^ *>].£.• He seems to have gone some little while ago. ^I^J *]7\ A£ -§• 3.^ It seems as though it will &].£.. rain again to morrow. ^^ 13 £ #-§■ y\^t If you should intend to go ■jT6!1?! -§■•§■ 7\%]JL to such a wild mountain 7lr7'|^. take a gun with you. 178 . THE VERB. ?M -2-.fi. j&.aj- -^r^f&l^ If you should travel in China :fe7l| ^f^l# %*& ^ it would be very well to V7-?&] ?l-f- S4i- 8e* Beveral letters of in troduction. v]^-£- 7l-^6.S. ^S-t1 I am g°ing to get a Pass" 6j7fl^,. port as I intend to go to America. 1a}?j| u] ^H^AS. He is quarrelling about get- M «] "§■.£.• *ms money owe^ ^° mm- ^ and ]g with -§-£. may be used with any one of the relative participles, giving us the sense of probability. They may be rendered into English, by adverb probably, with a present, future, past, or future-past tense, as the case may be. *1^- *}fe a ~$£- He is P1-olja1c,,y sleePing now. 1k^ HQ % "$£•■ He will probably have gone already. * 226.— The relative participle is also used with certain other words which have an adverbial force, such as P$, *J, (time) ; J^e>], or *] (space) ; etc, to signify When, while, and the like. j*Jt;| Jg. /q| 41^6] 5fa.. While I was writing a visitor came. tf~k Si.'&Q "I ^ Arf *r While I was living in Seoul :7&"fr334v I was 1u'*e friendly with that man. THE VERB. 179 n]-^- 2j /qj "g7r*lS. When you go to America 7J-5J 4i. I will go with you. *J -g. x}e*] 'fcjje?;] °J-.£.. Do not make a noise while I am reading. -r-tf %■£ ^J*1] rXr't When I went to Fusan I ty%£.- bought the pencils. ^-t- % %A^ % H^li.. It is paper to be used when studying. *}•»}-§■ ,*»e>] *Jf «] s While we were eating, a ^61 S.^^-4i. thief came into the bed room. 227. — >£J£. and 3£4f-. These two particles as words are often wrongly interchanged. Their distinctive use should always be observed. A J=- is used with the Future Eelative Participle and has the sense of the more — the more. It may sometimes be followed by «| ■% adding emphasis. 3EJf- on the other hand has simply the sense of up to the point of, up to the completion of, until, signifying the full attainment of the action of the principle verb. From the Korean standpoint there is but little of a temporal sense in X4=. though we commonly translate it by until. It often gives the sense of purpose. UJ-lM -i: *%■ -£61 H51 The more the wind blows i|i. the greater the fire. S^. 2c.3flu: Sf ^% The more good songs I ^•jl ^4i. hear the more I want to hear. *I;^.a. y]^. ^^ &|3j$] The more you study the 7|-j£,. Chinese character the more difficult it is. 180 THE VERB. SL£ *6J-£- • £*# ■3*1 The more you work at a 7\ **}7\\1 : 2M&- good profession the higher will be your reputation. ' ^$1<>1 y =* ^* The doctor must stay here fe H*l 54# «I«1A. till that patient is better. M|7> SH# ' %<$* <* * Explain it to me until I -MA- understand it. M| 7]- iS# Mk *M Wait here till I come. Sl^h ^^^ *rf -gr « n«Hr The villain by directing x# $*i^r-M *I?1] others to their own undo t-^A- ing caused them to be whipped. ■iftl 4*1 tts# ^ Put coal on so that the fne *fc-^ v| 6} ef-. may not go out. The Vebb in Indirect Discourse. 228. — The verb, to say, to speak, is formed from 12J- {speech) and "$£. {to male) but in telling what an< ther has said, both of these words are not commonly used. The ^J- is generally dropped, and ~$£l. alone employed ; but joined to the verb, signifying the word spoken, by the conjunction jo.. This form however, is only used with tenses of the indicative, ending in *\ when the termination is still retained and jJ. "$".£., simply affixed. In the affir- mative,^forms, the distinction between the inferior, and superior is almost lost sight of, this distinction being plainly shown by the termination of the "■§".£. signifying to say. Quite often the jo. is elided and then contractions almost unlimited, may follow. Thr verb. 181 7i-xr 51*1- -^fe^jL He says that he has con- ~$£.- tracted to build the house. ft] 5f-g- <^^j{u«] £*H He said that after taking §l^t=]-jL "^"$j4i- • this medicine the effect was good. 41 61 A 5] c\ jL "f & 'ei He said he would come 6| «]•. soon. 7r 5J «]■ jL "£ $J £j aFlr He said he would go but he b\M %£■■ did not. 229. — By the use of this rule for indirect discourse, an imperative verb has been formed. The low form of the termination of the volitive mood, second person, has been contracted into e]- and e]- .a •§".£. gives us the imperative verb " to command to," to order to." Here also the s. may be dropped giving us ef"$\£. which may be contract ed into et|A- 6] 5:*lfe Htf^-i: -r-eh Order him to give this fan jo. ■$".£.. to Mr. Kim. . ^^ 7i. ^I61] ^ ^ -&eh He ordered his house to be jL "$"$J4i. well watched while he was gone to Pyeng Yang. $\ ^ 231. — In the following list a few of these are described and their use explained. The Koreans are very prone to the use of contrasts, and owing to this fact, we find a number of elliptical phrases and contractions arising from the use of the verb ^>}Si. (to avoid) in connection with other verbs, active or neuter, Various conjunctions are employed and decide the special meaning to be given. Other contractions, etc., are made from the use of other words and conjunctions ; and, for the sake of reference to the examples and illustrations given below, we have marked them (a), (b), (c), etc. (a) Forms arising from the use of the conjunction *] {whether), and ^} They may or may not be followed by "$".£>., with no change. That which is here left to be understood is some form or part of the verb X "§".£.' ^° be the same. 232. — {b.) The conjunctions *-] or jo., used with ofi.- Either of these conjunctions affixed to the verbal stem, of the principal verb of the sentence, and immediately followed by the verbal stem of rfj^ with the same con junction, gives the idea of positive certainty, beyond the shadow of a doubt, as to the carrying out of the action, or the existence of the state, expressed by the principal verb. The idea seems to be that the state or act being certain, needs no comment and is beyond question. We have then the forms : — •$ \] v} v)*l« I will certainly do it." -$- 3L ^ .2. J " Of course I will do it ; " (There need be no question about it). * Note. — The conjunction H beginning with \-. when affixed to the verbal stem a\SL which ends in 5, according to the rule already given causes the S to be dropped, and SfH become D|,V|. 181 THE VERB. •^- jL ~Q ja. " It is undoubtedly high." (There is no question about its height) . 233. — (c.) The interrogative particle 7r with x»f-_^. The particle y\, affixed to the principal verb, and im mediately followed by the same form of of^. with y\, is largely used in soliloquies, and, as will be seen at a glance, implies indecision on the part of the speaker, as to whether the action or state of the principal verb is worth while. It is joined to the Eelative Participle and with the Present and Past asseits that the action being carried on or com pleted is useless ; with the Future that the subject of the verb is undecided as to whether to carry it out or not. It may or may not precede a form of the verb ~^Sl- When it does not precede *$".£. it is almost entirely restricted to soliloquies. ■fr & 7r *> fe 7\ t y\ ft 7r £ 71- sr y\ 234.-0.) The particle :f. used with oj-j^. Various forms of the verb are derived from the use of this particle, with a present, past, or future relative parti ciple. At times these forms are used interchangeably with those derived from the conjunction ?;] {whether), given above f 231. The distinction between the 'two is, that where *| expresses doubt, ^ expresses an entire lack of concern or interest, in the result. It may or may not pre cede an accompanying verb, or a form of *§".£.. When -$■£. is used, some part of the verb X "§".£. C° be the same), is understood. With a past participle, it gives the idea of the entire failure of the object. With "§".£.> the forms are: — THE VERB. 185 * fe^ °F fe t * tt*. s* ##. 235. — (e.) Forms resulting from combinations of tj with ^fi.. This form with f A >s> 1^ ^^" *$£.> and ^ ^as been regarded by some, as a separate particle or conjunc tion, used with the future relative participle. It implies lack of interest or relish of the subject of the principal verb, in the action. He does a little and stops a little. It is rather a contraction of the desiderative forms of the principal verb, and v}£., with the adverbial con junction t\7\ which it will be remembered gives the idea of interruption. The full form with "$"£. then is : — •$•2): •§,«|-7r "Q^r "^"c\7\> an3 gives the idea that, at first he did as though he intended to work, and then as though he intended not to work. The contraction arises, first, by dropping the ~$c\t and -$-e^-c|-7|. becomes from euphony "^Vj-. Note.— The \., following the a, is b it the Korean methods of doubling 3. 236. — {/.) The form in SLX] 3L. A much used form of the verb, is derived by affixing jL*| jL to the verbal stem. It give3 us then the idea of something much desired or longed for, and may be translated by, "would that—," "oh! that—." 237. — (g.) Exclamation in vf . An exclamation expressive of fear or danger, and calling out to the one addressed to take care, is derived from the use of the future participle with vf-. It may be or may 186 THE VERB. not b j fallowed by some such verb as, to take care. The idea, however, of calling upon the party addressed to be careful is always present. As:— ^*Jvf, " You will fall ! " The same form may be used with the verb ji.5.. (to see) implying strong probability. 238. — (h). The desiderative form in e), is we find often changed in the same manner as was seen above under (e.), and "$"2j: may become "g't-f, and "^^jt l^vf .2.. Such a form as this, must then be rendered in the same way as the simple desiderative. From this form with the verb o] .£. (to be) , is derived the phrase in vJ.jL.g., which for convenience we may then consider formed from the future participle. It may be translated, by, " Do you think that " — " Do you for a moment sup pose that — ," and signifies a positive negation. * 239.— (t). The form in ^^ . The phrase derived from the use of the future participle with this, gives the equivalent of the English potential past perfect, with a disjunctive or concessive force. It may, be translated by " would have, but — " " should have, but— " etc. The full phrase would be. * ti tf H ■ H. which is the future relative participle qualifying &J (work), which is the subject of the irregular form of the progressive tense of the verb »],£. (to be), to which has been affixed the conjunction ^ . tfHE VERB. 187 240.— (j.) The last of these contractions of which we shall speak, are derived from the desiderative base. They are •fr^J, ^aJ-Sjtvf, and ■$■«§ «j-.2.vf. They are all used in commands where the person commanding is enrag d at the neglect of a former order or well known duty. •§rE# is a contraction of the colloquial "^TBj (do you intend to) and Jf &} (what), with some such phrase as " are you doing?" etc , understood. It may be translated by " Do you intend to—" " Why don't you ? " etc., -f^-5}M4 is a less complete contraction of the same form. ^■^ ^faH-r is contraction of. *** ^51 34 *.*+• or " Do you intend to ? Why ichat are you doing. ?" This last is much stronger than either of the other two, and extremely colloquial. It may be rendered into Eng lish by some such phrase as " Why on earth don't you ? ' " Why under the sun don't you ? " All these three phrases are expressive of irritation, anuoyarce, anger. 241. — The following sentences will illustrate these forms, and while the above are not by any means all that might be given, it is hoped that they are sufficient to give the student an insight into them and enable him to make further investigations for himself. (a) ■^■^7]- ^b] ^C\M. 114k The carpenter complains ife:*! °l"c:*] "tT-Ji. th^ 'he compensation is ~?\Sl- small, and is doing his work so that it will be useless. 188 THE VERB; H 41 *$ fe 61 ^ 71] ^"-i As he told it to a man who "£4- S6? Sfe^l "Us had no brains he doubts *l "tf S "^ 61 rh whether he understood. .£.£-£■ 4^ 61 ft*! *M As we have studied so littte "^-T-i iLvf- ifSJ'MH to-day on account of so £ *| ft*l "$".£.. many callers, we might as well not have studied at all. »l7r *M #*H 4*1 As so little rain came, it is W 1^- of no account. ?Z*1 S3- **b: 1*1 As I have been a merchant, SM tSL- it is doubtful whether I can farm. (6) V\7\ ftjL'i irH °M If there is plenty of profit, fSU- I will certainly do it. ^ * *-!-& &•*<»* As you have given twenty ^3i*H tf * AfH nyang for a ten nyang nH- book, you certainly have not bought well. St|7r H*SIrfl ^ As it was a boy who insult *5WH 3 ^ta ed a man he certainly did ^JL £ ?■% <$& wrong ; and nothing more need be said about it. 511-i- ^?!*H ^fe As I have been fasting for 7j-*l 5.2 H".SL. two days, it is certainly good to eat (again) . (c) 61U"4- v1-¥- 3t6H This river is too small we *d-Tr # "$" fe y\ v} )z 7\ can have no pleasure boat- ~$SL- ing here. THE VEEB. 189 a?j ^4x^1 7r4"*l& ?gt In the midst of such a none -c- 4x^1 fe tfe^I- 'J- Is a low voice is useless. 6lei'^ ^-c ' £?r Why ! such work as this is T2t7]-*tr-S-. useless. ^ t-& "S^r tt?]--^. Why ! What I said is use less. ^-£1 £4 *4 Hi*f-& As I am studying I am %7\ ^7\ *JZ|- -$-£.. thinking whether to trans late the book or not £.*&<*] 5lAy& f ^^l As there is plenty of work Q3. v]^ 7\VA lH in Korea, and not much ^-fe^ ^71-^71- t St.- to do in America, I do not know whether to go or not. 6] *l-*le,] (gt. *£ t^S. Though this servant works ^4r ^ 6H =14 well, as he does not at- _5L^7r ^7r ? tend to what is said, shall I discharge him or not ? (J) # tlk ^ 3-*lte Q-ik I do not care whether I "S-f- ^^ "§".&• repair the house this year or not. A£ «|7r tt*l -£4 7)^ As it is raining hard I M -%^- ^ t"A- doubt whether Mr. Kim will come to-day. e|^fl ^^^]h: ^1 * As I have not made a € *J*H 1^ 61 7f -fe *-1 ^tf-JL ^}^"cb I bought this to give to you. b]7.]] 6]-C| *-<:]■ .u •$■$! When he said he would Ajv| i^ "S' M-j^JL- not do ityesterday, do you think he will do it to-day. ■g-61] cej 7|.^j -^--^vj. To you think I want to go ai^., into the water and drown ? w *>] U-|- ^ 1TMH ^6] I would have done this well, «.#* 6> ^ ^ 51 A. but there was not enough money and I could not. 51 H- I should have died had I not met a renowned doctor who healed me. ((J) As you have played a good while now, do you not fig. intend to study a little ? As I am going to Seoul, why have you not called coolies ? a e^J *M ' * 7? * If it will not do that way, do it this way. If you will not drink water, why do you not take tea ? If you have forgotten why on earth do you not try and think of it? 7>^ If you will not work why un der the sun do you not go ? 192 THE VKEB. 242.— The principal rarts cf seme of the veibs most commonly used are given below. Present Past Future Past Indicative. Verbal Part. Verbal Port. Kel.Part. To sit tt*r- To put up 6d7ll. To be lacking ... To be «*■ To fit 5MI- To complete X*l- To forget VU- To take off **1- To wash ' ^l7fl. To be frequent .. To be wet To follow after . . #*r. To drive To look for To find 5U. 3t*|. To be disgu&ling. »H-^*1 To be beautiful . . To itch 7r«W To be light 7}-Vtf£ 7r\J*Hl 7r^^7fl To be droll 7rA£41 7>&f-7l] To be minute ^^-f-711 To be ticklish tf*l 3* #*13*l To be near ... . #3*1- #7r£ To be vexatious . . 1**1 - To be heavy ^7j7fl... To be dirty c1^71]... To be repugnant 4^71] THE VERB. 193 Present Past Future Past Indicative. Verbal Part. Verbal Part. Bel. Part. To mend 3* 7]$... 3* 7l& To lie down ... ^•4...... ¥41... ^■Tfl ¥& To deplore «A *4|... &71) ^l& To be hot *\%&~ -141... ^**... ci& To be cold *JA *14|... *j7fl To know 6lA «•>... S7fl To freeze *\Sl ^Tfl To open ^£. ^Tfl To draw SUA.. SU8! 3KM... SR To be lonely ... $WA-. 51-fjt- To be dry #A«| To hang 7]SL ^711 To promenade SWA- To go afoot ... ?A& ZM To be long 71 JL 71 •»... ^7fl *1 To raise a#7fl... 2* To avoid *IA 2*1 ft To make S^A- £^*|- To be far *1A °47fl ■a To stay HHA-- To suck *tA }... ^Tfl To pray *1A %n To undo 3A ^sl... %n~ € To load 34i %7\] A]! To make a noise To lift HA s«|... 1711 To hear 54- s«|... **l To be round . . . f3A 194 THE ADJECTIVE. CHAPTER VIII. THE ADJECTIVE. 243. — Adjectives have been divided into two general classes, Limiting, and Qualifying. Limiting adjectives under the head of Numerals, and Pronominal Adjectives have already been treated. Qualifying adjectives then, alone remain to be considered here. As has already been said, there are very few Korean words that can be termed true adjectives. Those that exist to-day were originally nouns, and by far the greater part, have been derived from the Chinese. Such adjectives always precede the words they qualify, and of course the rule for the use of Sinico-Korean and pure Korean words holds here also. A Sinico-Korean Adjective must qualify a Sinico-Korean noun, and a pure Korean adjective its corresponding noun. *Jj, Great. tfl'^> A. great wind. 4:, Little. dt\l> A little man, SJ , White. tl °h A white horse. •£, Yellow. %^-, Yellow Gold. -$=, Low. ^-£, A low fellow. 244. — By far the greater number of so called Korean adjectives are neuter verbs, and the past, or perfect relative participle is commonly used as the adjectival form. THE ADJECTIVE. 195 Used predicatively the verbal from will be em ployed ; used attributively the participial. These neuter verbs can be carried through the whole basal conjugation. When the participial form is used, it precedes the noun qualified ; when the verbal, the noun qualified, of course, precedes the adjective. The following list of predicative and attributive forms will illustrate this. Verb. Adjective. -£-4x To be high. ^£ High. ^4i To be low. V •£ Low. y$£. To be cold A|£ Cold. ■ci^-J. To be hot. «J£ Hot. -§•4. To be right. ■#•:£ Eight. jz.s_£. To be wrong. o.§ Wrong. 2J-#Ji To be near. 2{-7r-£r Near. v]£. To be far. ej Far. ■Jj-f 5- To be hard. •#:£ Hard. -fi. -$-£>. To be soft. -$r"£ Soft. *}4i To be ripe. ^.g. Eipe. tf£. To be unripe. 4=[ "Unripe. Hlj-Ji To be dark. &1-T-& Dark. jl^fc. To be light. &*. Light. %£. To be broad. ^g Broid. •2}-Ji To be narrow. -§•.£. Narrow. 245. — The Korean adjective being thus really a verb, admits of a great variety of forms of expression and a number of distinctions unattainable in English. A thorough knowledge of the verb and its forms with their uses will enable any one at a glance to comprehend all these. 196 THE ADJECTIVE. 246. — In 1 21 L ff., on auxiliary verbs, several forms which enter into the composition of adjectives of differ ent significations were mentioned. Among those then mentioned were : — £.^£. joined to nouns, and signifying, to be worthy of, to have the nature of. 2j *$£., to be worthy of, to be well worth, ete., and join ed to past verbal participles by the interposition of O . ^"^JL- To be able, which joined to the future parti ciple in H , of active verbs gives us the English adjectives in able. *].&., To grow, or 7\£.> to 9°> joined to past verbal participles, gives us inceptive adjectival verbs. ^'S'^.^jJi To be amiable, from ./$>% Love. ^■"tr *£.-!-.&. To be hostile » ^-fr- An enemy. ^.&>-^ -§".£>. To be worth seeing „ JLA To see. ^$^"$\£. To be worth eating „ HJ A. To eat. "? ^ U Q'S'Sl To be teachable „ -? H *] £. To teach. ,£- Z}iQ -§•.£. To be moveable „ -%-7]£. To mpve. -eJvMJ 'Jt'^.S. To be manageable „ -c]-^e|^To rule. ^M^rA To grow small „ *$£. Tobesmall. ?}*].£. To grow large „ 3.£. Tobelarge. 247. — A certain class of adjectival verbs are formed by adding £*£ to the verbal stem, using a connective. This is almost restricted to colors and gives the idea of moderately, or somewhat, corresponding to the English termination ish. THE ADJECTIVE. IE £± To be red ^a. a ^ -£-.£. To be reddish. T^-S. To be yellow -*?■ e ^.^ "§\£. „ yellowish *?i To be blue #. e /^ •$• St. ,, blueish. To be black 7} 6. ^^ -§•£. ?3&. ,, blackish. ili To be white $}-§->^ -§■£. „ whitish. 248. — A further modification of adjectival verbs of color, is made by a repetition of the stems with "§".&., giving us then, the sense of to be spotted toith, or to be colored in spots. JSjij-g.^^-^-j^ To be spotted with red. Jpl-T-lf St. , yellow. ^A^lti blue. ^^7J-^^Sl ,, „ » black. 249. — As in English so also in Korean, but to a much greater extent, nouns are used as adjectives. With many of these we may suppose the insertion of the postposition S|, but as there is no ambiguity if omitted, it is not used. £tf ah. A " Korea man ' ^# A-fr. Kitchen utensils. m *• Summer clothes. nsi *■ Hibachi fire. »w- *• Sea water. Comparison of Adjectives. 250. — "With reference to Korean comparison of ad jectives it may be said, that as in all other things, so also here, unless ambiguity would arise without their 198 THE ADJECTIVE use, the particles expressing comparison are omitted. In comparing two things then, the Korean as a rule would not use the comparative but the simple positive. 251. — A comparative degree may be formed by the use of the adverb t*\ (more) preceding the adjective. £.}g •*£ =N|7|. -c-J 5.J1. The box you bought to-day is better. e>] y^7l T2j ^liy"^- This dog is more savage. 61 Al"li6l "^ iSSd^- This man is older. -3- 1 61 ^ Q 7ri.. That horse goes better. 252. — In comparing two things, where both are men tioned jfc]-, sometimes written jj.'cj , signifying tfja/t, is affixed to the noun having the quality in the lesser degree, and the adjective is used positively. The use of Jfcf* together with ts| and the adjective, unless special emphasis is desired, is not common among Koreans, and should be carefully avoided by foreigners. 61 ^1 JL^l" -3.*l&| S.4s.- That book is better than this. 71 7r The steam-car travels faster than the steam-boat. 1 ^ A*r t]«,l*l A*- Sunlight is brighter than moonlight. J*."6? *]& 7^1 Cold is better than heat. 253. — The postposition &i\rf (from) may also be used for ycf- in the sense of than, to express a comparative degree. Note. — The use of Jtf.5) and H.% for itcr is wrong, and should be avoided. THE ADJECTIVE. 199 6] »}6] tsJ °JeiJA} ^i». This ink is blacker than that. *>1 ijr6j :x "^^j/M ft &.. This water is clearer than that. 3.§«]>«4 »] § «| % H This horse travels faster 7j-.fi.. than that. ^r^^l tt'tf11^^ •"W Last year we spent the ^M "^SlT'l'Jt, t'"^ summer at the summer 7r *I^I"£^j- house at Han Kang hut Kumipo is cooler. 254. — The superlative degree is expressed by the use of T^J^ (the first) preceding the adjective. However, as was remarked concerning the comparative, even when compar ing several, the simple positive is used where the English would require a superlative. Here then we see with regard to both comparative, and superlative, that great care should be exercised by the student, if he desires to speak true Korean and not an Anglicized imitation of it, to as far as possible do away with their use and employ the simple positive. °1 5*1 °^ 'f-61] ^1^ This is the best of several 3L&. pens. 61 A1"S6] ^J ^IH 3i. This man is the tallest. M] A]74|7r ^fl H ^S 1>"C?- Your watch keeps the best time. 2. $\ *| JH. \r 5. 'S 7^1 Korean paper is the best %£.- kind of paper. vJ-eJ-^luLfe AS^I 6l-7r Among the countries of .3"cl""tr.fi»- tne world Russia is the largest. 200 THE ADVERB. CHAPTER IX. THE ADVERB. 255. — Korean adverbs may be classified as to tbeir source, and as to tbeir meaning. Classified as to their source we have Primitive and Derived. The Primitive Adverbs are few in number, such as : — X]g NOW. <>}v} Perhaps. &)--*7f. A little while ago. t>}£. Entirely. Again. ■^ More. *&...} Only. Why. J5& Yet. ^Jwf- How much. Not. 5j How many. 256. — Derived adverbs may be divided into two classes, those derived from verbs, and those derived from nouns or pronouns. The adverb regularly derived from the verb, may be formed by adding t>] or *} to the verbal stem. THK ADVERB. 201 In adding t>] to the stem, euphonic modifications naturally take place. Verbs in ^r-c]- change the "§""cf- into "SJ or sometimes into a|. Verbs whose stems terminate in a add v| . All other verbs take the form of the stem with its added or changed consonants as found in the past verbal participle, and add t>] . -£-4i To be lofty. ' ^*J Loftily. ^i -$■.£. To be base. ^J*J Basely. ?lf i To be rare. fl"SJ Barely. 3J-#4« To be near. ^7\o] Near. wfi To be far. ^H Far. ^A Tobewide. ^H Widely. ^;Jf £. To be quick. ^ti| ...... Quickly. *JA To be little. *}6] Little. ^,4x To be bright. ^,6] Brightly. ^4i To be easy. Jflt>] Easily. 3JJ. To be deep. ^J*J Deeply. 257 — The future verbal participle in 71] or fl\ is also largely used adverbially. ^T-f SL ... To be different, ^Y^rt] Differently. E.Ji To be good. s.^1 Well. *J4x ...... To be cold. 7$7\] Coldly. 258. — These two classes of adverbs derived from verbs, have been claimed to be identical in signification, and interchangeable, some verbs preferring the from in 71] and some that in o| . Such, however, is not the case, and the distinction made in the " Grammaire Coreenne" always holds. The form in ©] or "*} is in a sense passive, and indicates the manner, not in the object, but in the subject 202 THE ADVERB. of the verb. The form in 71] is active, and indicates the manner, not in the subject but in the object. These should in many cases be rendered more properly into English by an adjective. The following sentences will illustrate this difference. AflS."§L ^ ■§■ *l" ? ?fl I nave made the new book- "§"5J Jj,. somewhat different. H-iir *1 5J5l4i ^"H "Ii4- I have obtained a Japanese ^}Jx. boat, I cannot do other wise. M ■§"§■ M 61 "7f3J 4i- I wuI soon 8° to Seoul. 259. — The Korean past verbal participle, may also at imes, be rendered into English by an adverb. V^, Downward. ^*]> Too much, -f-tif, Upward. 31*1. Beyond. 260. — Adverbs derived from nouns aud pronouns, consist for the most part of a noun or a pronoun with one or more postpositions, used adverbially. $J2.5=. Inside. &]•§**] ... In the morning. jqjafj When. ^w] Afterwards. Us} Naturally- y-^1 At noon. ?&<*} Before. SJS13. Willingly. yfic Particularly. 261. — Comparison in adverbs as with adjectives is not expressed unless the sense demands it. Ofttimes a simple adverb will be used, where we would use a comparative or a superlative. If needed the same particles will be used with the adverb as with the adjective, and in the same way. THE ADVEBB. 203 *] a. cj ^ *]j^. Build the house better. t^fl I ^i S.5H] "^iL- Sing better. *fl ± 61 S^j SJ § _£«]■ My horse goes faster than ^•"*] 7rJL. yours. 3L*6. Jt^l" sJ-?r>M y|7r In Japan it rains more fre- ^}^. ii,. quently than in Korea. 262. — To the primitive adverbs many of the postposi tions may be affixed, giving as a result a. signification combining the meanings of adverb and postposition as : — &]■>?] (where). fi^jS. (whither). aJ^lA} (whence). 263. — To the ordinal numerals, may be affixed the postposition .% giving us a form equivalent to the English numeral adverb. ^jTCflfe (As for the first) = Firstly. if*fl\E (As for the second) = Secondly. ■cfl^^. {As for the first) = Firstly. Tfl6lu: (As for the second) = Secondly. 264. — A long list of all the adverbs is hardly called for in grammatical notes such as these. From a study of the above rules, if they cannot be formed at will, they can be recognized at sight. Of course in their use, they always precede the word they qualify. 265. — Before we close this chapter, a word or two on Korean responsives seem in place. 204 THE ADVERB. 13| to a superior, and £.*% to an inferior, correspond to the English Yts ; while &H -§-A]xf- and b}^ *f- (it is not) correspond to no. These words, however, are not as much used as their English equivalents and as a rule, in answering, the verb of the question is repeated, or some such phrases, as " I don't know," ■' I know," '* It is not," " It is so " etc., is used. 266. — With reference to answers to negative questions, the Korean idiom, like the Japanese, is the opposite of the English. In such questions, the English regards the facts as they are, and answers " Yes " or " No." The Korean on the other hand regards the statement implied in the question, and answers accordingly. The conse quence is that we get our answer the very oppo site of what we would expect. For instance, in the question " Has he not come ? " the Korean regards the statement " He has not come " which is implied in the question, and if he has not come, answers " Yes," mean ing that the statement implied in your question is correct, he has not come. But if he has come, he will reply " No," meaning that the statement implied in your question is wrong, that he has not, not come, but has come. This being so directly opposite to the English idiom should be made a subject of great care, for otherwise serious blunders may be committed. THE CONJUNCTION. 205 CHAPTER X. THE CONJUNCTION. 267. — We divide Korean Conjunctions into two classes, Co-ordinate and Subordinate. The Co-ordinate, are those which connect words or phrases that are co-ordinate. The Subordinate, are those which connect dependent with principal clauses. Some of the most common co ordinate conjunctions are — S\-OX 34 \ 5] ( jt or t SL {Signifying and. «* ) vj. or e>|vf Signifying either, or, whether. ,{■ Used with verbs ... Signify whether, or. ^^ [Disjunctive and signifying but, 1 etc. 268.— S\, 5], ja. and ■$■;& are all copulatives and may generally be rendered by simple and, or with and are affixed, like all Korean conjunctions to their words or clauses. S\. affixed to a word ending in a consonant, becomes sj., and where a number of words are united is 206 THE CONJUNCTIONS. repeated after all but the last, to which last only, will the postposition governing them all be affixed. 5J is less frequently used than any of the others, and is restricted almost entirely to books. It is generally prefixed to its word, and as a consequence we may at times find S\- and 51 used together. jL and t*j are used to connect verbs, ja. may join itself directly to the stem, and where a series of verbs are con nected, the last only will have tense root and termination : this tense root and termination then determines the time and termination of all the preceding verbs connected by jt. t^ is more largely found in books than in the spoken language, and in uniting itself to the verb, the tense root is not necessarily dropped. For illustrations of jl and «^ with verbs see ]f 194 and 200 of Part I. 269. — vf- or (affixed to consonants) e>] \\, is equivalent to or, or either of the English. It marks alternatives, only one of which need be expressed, with the others or other understood. It may be joined to„verbal tense roots with the same signification. Joined to numerals and adverbs it signifies about, in the neighborhood of, almost. *J and 7f are used only with verbs and are affixed to relative participles with the same sense. For illustrations of the use of these three conjunctions with verbs, see 1 189 and 197 of Part I. 270. — The most common subordinate conjuctions are— «1-I=., Used independently \ vj. \ JAre all concessive and •cl or s\ ),«. 3 . I may be rendered into *H*r AveXrbs En8BBh by tto"'*' 1 (preceded by U) I "\ although. 5£ J CONJUNCTION. 207 M, Used independently jAre conditbnal and are ir Affixed to verbs | rendered by if. H Whereas; both causal and concessive. Mark the. reason, and M7*" [Affixed to are equivalent to in •^- (preceded by l^)J J """' asmuch as, since, see ing that, etc. For illustrations of the use of these conjunctions and their method of uniting with verbs, see in the chapter on verbs. 1 181 ff. Note- — Still further illustrations of Korean conjunctions and their rendering into English will be found in the Chapter on Conjunctions Part II. There are also a number of phrases that may be rendered into English by conjunctions, however, from the very nature of the case, their true meaning is apparent. A few are as follows, and they can be formed at will. ^(Altkouvktkatisso, Bscce. {"52832* O-^IjLS., For that reason...) ^.2lH.S.> =tj «. — Because-d that,17 j. is • so) \ Becomes therefore. J 3. H ijJ , If t't at is so Becomes then, therefore. 208 HONOEIFICS. CHAPTER XL HONOEIFICS. 271. — The use of special terms to inferiors and superiors, holds such an important place in Korean, that a special chapter on this subject is thought necessary. Attention has already from time to time been called to this fact, and in various places the terms used to superiors and inferiors have been marked. In the first few sections of Part II. all the sentences, (unless the sense does not allow, and restricts them to one or other class), have been given in three forms, to inferiors, the polite form to equals, and to superiors. Were these but the three grades with which we have to deal, the subject would be considerably simpli fied. But in each of these three grades, there are, what we may term sub-grades, and if we desire to be exact, we should have all the proper terminations for even these, at our finger's ends. These sub-grades are for the most part, determined entirely by the terminations, and a careful study and practice of the lists and terminations given in the Chap ter on the verb If 137 ff. will accomplish this. Al though the student may not desire to acquaint himself with all these forms, it is absolutely essential if he wishes to be respected by those around him, and to avoid giving nOKORTFICS. 209 offence to his friends, that he make himself thorough master of the three forms, and their use, given in the first sections of Part II. 272. — But not only is the person spoken to, to he con sidered, but in many cases we must also consider the special rank of the person spoken of, or the subject of the verb. An honorific of the verb, must then be formed. This honorific is for the most part derived from the simple verb, and formed by the interposition of the particle X\. With verbs whose stems end in vowels, simple />] is added, but with verbs whose stems end in consonants A or 6 will be interposed as a connective, and />] will then unite with the form of the stem, as found in the past verbal participle. 273. — The following list of verbs with their honorific forms, will illustrate this. Ordinary. Honorific. •$£. To do f^li- <&£. To sit Ordinary. Honorific. HJ-^ ...To eat ^^.fi.- *}.£. To sleep -§-*.^lA- -3- A To die 2Esf-7Ml.fi.- SIA To be *W A- »>A To know ;§^. -$■*]_&. U4i To be sick ^^flW-fi.- s§^-Tfi. Tobewell...... ^i|^ljSL. ^■■^i. To speak ^ <* ^W A- £..£. To come e)-§" *]£.- 275. — There are also certain Korean verbs used to render respect to the person or persons acted upon, or objects of the verb. These are, most of them, honorific verbs from their very nature. For instance you give to an inferior, but you simply offer to a superior. A few of these are given below. Ordinary. Honorific. ^. A...... To give S.efA To offer. •£i» To ask #"$".£, To request. £]&. To show #*££. To snow- ^SJA To take with 5Ml.fi. To accompany. ^§i To tell SJ^fi. To inform. 3c «f- £..£... .To come back ^*-$*l £.To return. 276. — Thus we find that the Korean in speaking considers the rank of the person spoken of, as well as the HONOBIFICS. 211 person spoken to, and at times this double variation takes place in the same verb. . When such is the case we may use an honorific verb with an honorific termination. While at first sight it may seem as though this would involve complications almost unlimited, a careful study separately, of the special terminations and of the honorific verbs, will clear away most difficulties. 277. — The matter of honorifics, however, does not end with the verbs. It extends to the nouns and even to some postpositions, and is very apparent in the terms used to represent English pronouns. . There will be two, and at times even more, sets of words, to designate the same object. The one used in speaking to or of a superior, the other, the common every day word. As has been hinted before, it will be found that Sinico-Korean is the more polite, and hence we find a large number of Sinico-Korean words, acting as the polite terms for pure Korean nouns, pronouns, etc. 278. — The following list of some of these nouns should also be learned. 6>u>*r..6^^,$Jfxj,$^,S^,7r^J^. Father. 6loH...^1g.)^^,S^)t)f«.61 Mother. #£ M.op?*!,^^]-*! ^Br«l*l Uncle. tf*3 7}-*$,QX •» Husband. tttf M*tt*.Jfa Wife. •U *«W,«3*.«$tf Son- 1 6J$I,^ Daughter. ^--ty *£#] Nephew. ^j «]#],,§.#] Elder Brother. *>}£, 7}|#| Younger Brother. M- ^.-^ •• Age. 212 HONORIFIC^. *■£ #*? A cold. v| *]&]• Teeth. ^ *} House. 279.— It must not be forgotten that these honorific terms are not the same throughout the country, and terms used to inferiors in the capital, are in some provinces used to equals or even superiors. This difference, however, is not extensive and can soon be learned, but we mention it here, so that the student shall not only be prepared for some change, but when he is addressed in terms that he has been accustomed to consider degrading, he may first make inquiry as to the usage of the^ place before he considers himself insulted. 280. — Were it in order in Korea to always use inferior terms of one's self, and to address all others with honorifics the subject would be comparatively easy. We find, how ever, in Korea that it is important in addressing inferiors to speak of one's self in polite terms, and to address one's- servants, children etc., in the terms for inferiors. Unless such a course is pursued one would be considered entirely ignorant of both the distinctions of the language and the rules of propriety. THE STRUCTURE. 213 CHAPTER XII. THE STRUCTURE OF THE SENTENCE. 281. — While from time to time, in considering the different words we have attempted to show, not only their meaning, but their use and position in the sentence, a few closing words on the structure of the sentence as a whole are necessary. In the first place, we may lay it down as a general rule, that the governing word or particle always follows that governed, under these circumstances we consider that the noun governs its* adjective, although in Korean there is really no government in this matter. Or looking at it from another standpoint, we may say, the qualifying word, always precedes the word qualified. Under these circumstances we consider that the action contained in the indefinite verb, at the end of the clause or sentence is qualified or limited by the subject and object which precedes it ; that the noun is qualified or limited by the adjective or participle or other noun with postposition that precedes it; that the idea of direction, to, or from etc., contained in the postposition, which was originally a noun, is qualified or limited, by the word which precedes it. 214 THE STRUCTURE. 282. — Taking either view of the matter, (the first of which is the clearer and better) we deduce the following. Verbs are always preceded by their subject, object, and the adverb qualifying them, and followed by the conjunc tions which connect them with other words or clauses. The noun is preceded by the adjective or participle that qualifies it, and is followed by the postposition which governs, or the conjunction which joins it to another word. The adjective, if in the adjectival form, precedes the noun it qualifies. If in the form of a substantive, it follows the noun with which it stands in apposition. If in the verbal form, it of course, holds the same position as a verb. The adverb precedes the adjective or verb that it qualifies. The postposition always follows the word whose relation it shows to another word in the sentence. The conjunction (except in the case of those used in dependently, which might well be termed " intensive " and are only used in sentences where their corresponding dependent, or subordinate forms are used) always follows the word or clause that it connects with another. 283. — As a rule the subject comes first, then the object, then the verb. In a simple sentence then, we have first, the subject, preceded by its attributes, second the indirect object preceded by its attributes, third the direct object preceded by its attributes, and finally the verb with its adverb or other attributes. Emphasis, however, may change this, and the em phatic word will generally be found first in the 'sentence. The position of the direct, and indirect object of a verb, is immaterial, either may precede the other. . ; OF THE SENTENCE. 215 By way of illustration of these rules a careful study of any of the sentences given in Part II. with regard specially to their structure is urged. 284. — When several verbs are to be connected, if they are co-ordinate, the conjunction .a united to the stem will be used, and only the last verb inflected. If subordinate, however, the past verbal participle of the subordinate verb will be used without a conjunction. For illustrations of this see Part II, Chap. X. Sec. I. 2. (a) and (b). 285. — "What has already been said upon the use of personal pronouns, and of passive constructions, leads us naturally, to notice the extreme indefiniteness as to subject, of a large number of Korean sentences. Not only will no subject be expressed, but none will even be thought of, and under such circumstances, when the context does not plainly show what the subject is, it must be rendered into English, either by an indefinite, such as some o :e, something, or the phrase must be changed, and a passive construction used. Indefinite sentences of this kind may be found through out the book in both parts, and in many cases where definiteness has been expressed by the use of personal pronouns etc., any other subject might have been used. 286. — As in English, so also in Korean, the use of two negatives gives us an affirmative, but this use of two negatives is much more common in Korein than in English. The following will illustrate this. ■l^-fe ^Jfe 7A Q^-' In America they have every thing. *]7f& ^1^ *&£■• This is good. i^lffl 6HH -^^51 I must do that. A- 216 THE STRUCTURES. 237. — As will be seen from If 230 ff. the Koreans are quite prone to use elliptical forms, and we often hear orders and commands ending in conjunctions, postpositions, etc., but in all cases, some otber word is of course, left to be understood. Such phrases would not as a rule be correct in writing, and while allowable in speaking, would not be classed as elegant Korean. 288. — In concluding this chapter on the structure of the sentence, we would again remind the student, that post positions, conjunctions, and verbal modifications, are not to be used as in other languages. What we understand as minute exactness of speech, is a, thing not aimed at by the Korean, his desire is simply to express his idea, in as few words as possible, always remembering his surroundings and circumstances. As a consequence the same sentence taken out of its context might not only be ambiguous, but entirely meaningjess, and yet, at the same time considered with its circumstances and surroundings it might be a complete sentence. 289. — In almost direct opposition to this, there seems to stand the Korean use of what we have termed conjunc tions. The Koreans have no system of punctuation, and where we would use a comma, semicolon, or colon, etc., they would use a cojunction, expressing cause, , manner, means, etc., as the case might be. Consequent upon this we find that the distinction between sentence and paragraph, does not exist in Korean, each sentence in an English paragraph becomes then, simply a dependent clause, connected by one or other of the conjunctions, and the whole paragraph but one sentence. This becomes much more apparent in the book language, and .. here is its- main difficulty. ii1-" OF THE SENTENCE. 217 290. — In closing these " Grammatical Notes" we would say that we have tried but to introduce the student to the study of Korean spoken language. We would repeat that they should not be studied alone, but in connection with Part II. The accuracy of each rule given should be tested by the student, when thus tested they should be put in practice, for in order to gain any language quickly and thoroughly, practice must be combined with theory. Only by so doing can the student ever learn to use the KOBEAN SPOKEN LANGUAGE. PART II. ENGLISH INTO KOREAN OR TUB KOREAN SPOKEN LANGUAGE FROM THE ENGLISH STANDPOINT. PART II. ENGLISH INTO KOREAN. CHAPTER I. THE V B B B. In the Grammatical Notes, the attempt was made, to approach Korean from the native standpoint; to take Korean idioms, phrases and methods of speech, explain their meanings and uses, and ascertain their equivalents in English. In doing this, we have however, done but little more than half the work that is before us in the study of Korean. We have approached from but one side, and now it remains for us to approach Korean from the English standpoint ; to take English phrases, words, and forms of expression, and learn their equivalents in Korean. This has been attempted in the following pages, and while the Korean equivalents, are not by any means claimed to be the only renderings, they are the common and most fre quent methods of expressing the ideas they are said to re present In doing, this, we have begun with the verb, because here we find the greatest variety of cbanges. To a great extent what has already been said in the Gram 222 THE VEEB. Chap. 1. ? I. matical Notes, will answer equally well here. This is very true of the verb as well as of the other parts of speech, and there remains under the verb, simply the verbs, To be and To have, Auxiliaries, The Infinitive, Passive Constructions, and Conditional Sentences. These will be taken up one by one, the rules for rendering them into Korean given, . and sentences to illustrate each rule will follow. ' §1— THE VEEB "TO BE." 1 Employed independently, expressing simple existence, to be is rendered by 3$ Jt ; negatively by ^}4». 2 Followed by a predicate noun or pronoun, to be is rendered by t] _fi. sometimes contracted into ^, or i; negatively by &J-vj_g_. .. . v :. . 3 Followed by a predicate adjective, the verb to be is united with the adjective. See Chap. VI §. I. 4 When equivalent to become, the verb to be, is render ed by sj.fi. and negatively by ^t^.fi». 5 For the use of the verb to be, as an auxiliary See §111, See. 1&2. 1. There are some very high * M~i H3J **1 53^ n^-f" mountains around Seoul. (W &o£ne!g^h<^ in certain very high mountain* is- — 5UV*1«M About how many houses are tl\ J$ &}■«] *J <£v} there in this city ? ni\ J*. "**». fe» **25W abmit is .' . V5l7r? __ * It will be noticed that for the first few exercises, the sentences are all given in the three form3, for inferiors, equals and superiors, except perhaps in instances where the sentence by its very nature restrict? the class to which it is addressed. t Properly this should be written SJ-*$\ *lcr but pronounced mimnidn. Chap. I. 1 1. THE VEBB. 228 Is there only one kind of This several bottle inside one kind oil in these bottles? 7] # $ $IVH= -51 A, oil only is f -SH?VSl7r?* About how many soldiers $ %*} **7r <£*\ are there in a regiment ? One regiment-in soldier how many about is .* There is no telegraph office in Kang Wha. Kang Wlux in telegraph office is not. There is no use in going 6>£ ^7i ^«i $ # before breakfast. Breakfast eating before going thing t« not. Is there not any one- who »> £ 4 ^141 £ *vs can go instead ? .dni/ one whatever instead going man is notf VSl7r? Was there not any one who ^^) At ^-§- 61-?£»l7r knew the way home ? House-to coming road knowing one tuns not .' eJ^^V5l7r? Is that smoke or is it only a cloud ? Tfla( thing smoke is t cloud on/y is .» Is that a fox or a dog ? 2%a< thiny fox is, dog is t Is not that a dog sleeping tH 51 *}$. «1 *rtr 7^1 on the veranda ? 37iat twanda on sleeping thing 7fl7r »H«T,-»Hjk.', do j is not ! *MA^7r? * Properly this should be $j >$ $ V vl $1 H but pronounced isslmnlka. 224 THE VERB. Chat*. I. "J I. Was iiot! that an earth quake? That thing earljiquake making iking wat not f Our work is very, bard. Our work very difficult if. HJ &.— H -& V 6] *%. The. street is very muddy. . .Road -rery muddy is. —X] A 6]t^. These ccolies ' are not lazy. _2%e cooftes 'tan/ is not. The road from here to Fusan is not good." " ' Here ^om .FVsart ' to ' going road good is not. I do hot believe it will be ^.■43ZM?£ ft #3fe much of a fire. My thought in-as-for, T>ig fire-as-for not will become. You will never be rich if you are not more thrifty, Economy more not empCoy if, rt'ci man not wjiVJ become. -sl&Ti. -s)5MrV 0]r]-. Tf this .were only mended 2 Ai's fA j» g mending only made it would be as good as ^ ^ 4 X*l 3 new. i/ 6e/bre as equally well 5)51^-5121^.-5151 ui'B become. Chap. I. g II. THE VERB. 225 § II.— THE VEEB " TO HAVE." 1 Expressing possession or ownership : — (a.) By animate beings, to have is rendered by the postposition &]•?)] with $I^> or by SI& alone. Negative, by ^Jj«., (b.) By inanimate objects, it is rendered by the post position <*] with 5iJi. 2 Expressing acceptance. This idea does not appeal to the Korean as accepting and is therefore variously translated. 3 Expressing To cause or To procure — By 71] •$■.&. or by ^] *i with the appropriate form of the verb. 4 Expressing necessity and followed by the infinitive ; it is rendered by the future participle of the verb with 5 For have, as an auxiliary see § II I. Sec. 4. 1 (a). Korean noblemen have a £.Q ^tflS|7l] ^^ *1-$16] great many servants. Korean nobleman to many m-vant is. Englishmen often have «g-5^A}-^ 5^71) £&] Jf-j? light hair and blue eyes. Englishman to often yellow hair and blue eye it. Japanese cats have no £J_g. :a $= &] SJ 71] ,*ae] fjljlg Japan cat to tail is not. 61^. vy 226 THE VEBB. Chap. I. ?H. A 1 (6)-. Our house has only five -fe] *J«1 ^3 tf tt Our house at five room only rooms. is. .The box has no cover. *W ^ tf*h — tf& Boa; to lid is not. This flower has no perfume. 2*Ais /fouer to scent i« not. X- 2. Will you have five dollars .2. 3& 7>^7>^>fc. or ten ? .Fitie aW/ar tuke will (en aWtar take will. I will have a cup of tea. Tea one cup ea< wiU. A.— ^^V*!^ Will you have a flower ? Flower one take will. , I will have- him take it 7\ *1 7>7fl f^. Tate aimt/ mnie ««//■ away. I will have it done right At once to do will make. away. A, — -fr^VoW- We will have these sent up ^\7\ *W$ ti%± ■§■ to Seoul. TFe (Aese Sen"' to tip send will make. 3! A, —tra*v»K- He said he would have the St] $** 7\**,Sl%Aa boy bring tbem. Boy employed will brim/ said. v- \- ■ A -(- L^ L I" i/fe ■J Chap. I. g III. Sec. 1. THE VERB. 227 \ , I will have to go to night. .£.|s wj-w] 4o|^- Jf ^^\ To-day night starting way outside there is not. If you do not work you will &J "fr*] 6|-vj -$-w| -f^^f-*}* have to starve. wZt lo,do™1 t i} 'jtarvin9 «»y #*] *J*b $4&. ^ outside there t's no*. I have to finish that early 3.7] £ A^S^i ^J-2*" *]" +/-vt0nlght- ni'rr^f 2'Aat t+W^h to-day niqht ~$*.early all dotnq teat/ outside is not. § III.— AUXILIAEY VEEBS. Sec. 1. — Am, is, aee. 1 Followed by the active participle : — (a.) Expressing present continued action— either the present indicative or by the present participle with 7& followed by 5^ii or *>] .& according to the rales given § I, 1 and 2 of this chapter, or the verbal participle with t>] £.. * Negatively — either the present indicative preceded by 6t H or by the present participle with 7$ follow ed by *}£. or 6}Hi (§ I, 1 & 2), or the verbal participial form of the negative verb with t>] £,, See also Part 1. 1 129 ff. on tenses. (6 ) Expressing vivid future. — As in English so in Korean there is a way of expres sing vivid future by the present indicative, and either this or the future indicative may be used . Negatively — present or future indicative with *>\tf . * For further use of the negative, see chapter on negative in Part I- 228 THE VERB. Chap. I. § III. Sec. 1. 2 followed by passive participle— See passive voice. 1. (a). A crow is building its nest Sf$|«l 7roffl .S/3-*rel in. the., garden. -, Crowf 3^ qarden _*) in £.,-%£ nest is building. The rats are gnawing a hole ^1 7V ^ «| -el *1 «| xj «] A^ somewhere , in. the,, ceiling. ■!• _ 4 Bat ti somewhere i. /& t> ceiling yj §j in -cf, ftote gnawing thing is. -$U, -Si^V^- That is the baby crying. tWI 6]-7l -f-k 7^1 *h !T/ia< t/tino 6a6;/ crying (Atnj is. Is not the clock striking 3^3. *13. *|fe 7|.*1 Clock now striking thing now? 6HH=. — «MA. — 6t is not ? It is not raining now. t^A. „j6fH sj.-g.. .M>u> as /or, rain not coming in. The carpenters are not ^^10] ^ *J »Hf working now. Carpenters now «wA not making is. 1. (6). I am going home next M)7r sua <*i -g--^ as I next year-in own country to year. tK. — 71" A. ~7r§ V go- The German minister to America, is coming back America ?|^«1 to gone H^l- Oerman A9leh minister next month. -31next month-in A. -2!£Vol*h back will come. We are not sending a courier to Chemulpo to-morrow. j£ ig 3: 6V H -£ 'd *h -MA -MSV»K- Chap. I. § III. Sec. 2. THE VERB. 229 Sec. 2.— Was, Were. 1 Followed by the Active Participle : — (a ) Expressing continued action in the past. The Koreans, prefer the simple past tense, but some times render this by the present participle with the past tense of 6].£.- See also Part I. 1 132 ff. (6.) Introducing an event happening during the action — r:}y\. with verbal stem. (c.) Expressing an action intended but not carried out — b^«]- or ej="e| H preceded by verbal stem. 2 Followed by passive participle : — (a.) Of Intransitive verbs — The past tense of verb. (6.) Of transitive verbs — See Passive Voice. 1. (a). We were working all day ftJXfl a£&J £J"$"$|«h "(T yesterday. $J^> — * $3 £ V &| 4- Were they laughing or cry- ^feTl^^^ -f^ul 1\ ingV 4W*? 1. (6). * I was going to Chemulpo »^] ^Hf-JS, 7r*]-7r ^& yesterday, aud met four- *3^J ^i}"^, — ;J*4ii teen Chinamen. — ^J-§ V t>] -c}. * The Koreans, unless ambiguity would exist, do not me the personal pronouns. The surroundings alone generally determine the subject of the verb. These sentences are taken out of all surroundings, but the student is expected to use them and then circumstances will decide these matters. 230 TEE VERB. Chap. I. 2III. Sec. 3. He was ealing some fish, -^ I went home after nine -SL-^] 6]v£tJ 'Jt"1] 3J23 years, but all my friends oj-fe ^It^o) -ej- i^a} were dead. -c}, — $$J», — &}.§ Sec. 3. — Do, did. 1 Do and did are expressed in Korean by the present and past of the verb. 2 Do not and did not* used interrogatively, are ex pressed either by the interrogative present or past of the verb preceeded by *>}*] , or by the negative base in *| followed by interrogative present or past of *>}*] "$".£.. 3 Do not, used imperatively — by the negative base in * Note.— Interrogative sentences expressed negatively are regarded by Koreans from an opposite standpoint to the English. The Korean, in his answer, considers not the facts of the case, or the thing expected, but the implied statement in the question and when we would answer " Yes " answers " No " and vice-versa. Chap. I. g III. Sec. 3. THE VERB. 231 *| followed by the volitive mood second person of DriL> to avoid. 1. Why do you leave the door n open ? Yfhy door open leave* They do not make it that Now-a-days as for, that way not wny any more. 3fe*h-$U,--$l4? make. Where did you put my umbrelia ? My umbrella where put. 2. * Did not the fans I sent you suit ? I you to (hon.) sent fan suit did not f Do not the steamers sail *1*<>1 %%*& st*i twice a month now ? Nowa-day steamer one month in twice each not ply f 5171- ? Why did you not give the coolie the things he came TF% carrier to, to-take came for? thing, not gave f Do you not like foreign $^ 43 :&# -r*i food? Foreign food like . * For example the question, "Has not the teacher come yet?" ex pecting in English the answer "yes," will call forth from the Korean the answer " no " if the teacher has come, and " yes " if he has not yet come. See Part I f 268. 232 THE VEEB. Chap. I. g III. Sec. 4. 3. Dj not put o.i any more ^4*i "=1 ;4*|°}-5f-, — nfjL. „-„ ] Coal more to put-on avoid. Do not take n: ore than you '^•^l6] 4r S.^**] ^1 think you will need. Jdifffi m°re to take avoid. Please do not tear that t^ ^Hr*] f £l*l ofg newspaper. 27«3( nett'Sjiapci- to (ear auoid. (Aon.). Do not light the lights yet. t>\Q f: M*\ a}^- As yet light to light avoid, {inf.). Sec. 4. — Have, has, had. 1 Have : — The auxiliary have, is generally expressed in Korean by the regular past tense of the verb. • 2 Have been : — (a.) Generally Koreans do not make the distinction between continued past action, and simple past action, but leave it to be decided from the context ; hence have been in English is largely expressed by the Korean simple past. (6.) The distinction can be made by the use of the present, participle with 7& and the past tense of (c.) In speaking of the duration of continued action, the participial noun in *j with the past tense of the verb expressing the extent of time is used. 3 Had : — The Koreans as a rule do not use the pluper fect tense. Such a tense can be formed, and is acknow ledged as correct by many, but the great majority prefer Chap. I. g III. Sec. 4. THE VERB. 233 to transpose the sentence and use the simple past tense. See Part I on compound tenses If 135. Had, is then expressed : — (a.) In affirmative sentences — either by a complete transposition of the sentence, or by the use of the adverb Qtf with the past tense. (6.) In negative sentences — by either a like complete transposition, or by the use of *\ 2} with the past tense. I. Have the coolies brought *J -^ t>] :*} y\.rS\ %£ the freight ? "^H 3J ?r ?* Have you heard the news ? ^^l^] .£■§■ .E.fjJi? Why baven'nt you brought -ft) y^ *\i\ ^ejja. ^j-Ji? your dog ? The post man has not -^)^-¥-7f i^-e b\SL brought any letters to- ^J*] 2 61"H 7r*1 day. $* §^*}*\. 2. (a). Your room has not been "■^-^l *& -§■ 6}-^j 41 -31 swept and dusted yet. ^*1*| 6T"H *§"$•!:&.• This roof has not been &]*J -§--§• -4-l£ 6] vf 3*-*| repaired for a couple of *] t>}^\ "$"$Jifc.. years. Haven't you repaired your "■^-^a] ft]^6]^] ^1-fh house lately? 3?*]*1 6H "§"$JJi? Have you seen the paper ? -£!-£•*] % 3t^4i ? * Note. — Hereafter the three forms referring to inferiors, equals and superiors will not be given with each sentense hut only one or the other as the case mav demand. 234 THE VERB. Chap. I. § III. Sec. 4. 2. (6). Some body has been sweep- *t]^ ^*c e>|7]- ^I'M-^- ing this room. 2. (c). How long have you been ■$■&<>] tf-£ 51^1 7|- living in Seoul ? ^oj- vf. jSjJL? The Seoul merchants have *] -=*.£. Aj-g- *£* ^«>1 been selling foreign goods tf ^ -g-^1 -§• JL«I|X1| for a long time now. 4J-.&- We have been studying ^ Jf- £ *] 7r Ml A] 7> four hours. i|S|4i. The Japanese have been ^J$1«>1 %g. cL«h:*J7}- several years building «^3f tl S)5JJx. their railroads. 3. (a). I went to the foreign office ^\7\- ij ^-g- AS #23 but they had all left. nj-fe *}aJ -c]- ^J-j.. The coolies had all finished MJ7> ^ «] H f 7] ^i<*] when I got home. ^^l"ftl <£ rr"$"$Jii- When you left Seoul, had tf-g «\\\7] ^l *}*? the Eussian legation been ^^^ ^711 *l*fc begun? * t SJii? I asked him to stop to din- ^ ^ «] ^ ^Sj 5J "rfe ner, but he had dined . *} Aj ^ $Jii. 3. (6). When I got to my hotel $■?}**] HI «M ^^l my letter had not come. *>]-2j 6]-vJ ^-J-Jx. I had not heard it when ^-f ^61 *|«+7|, ^1 the steamer left. -5c.H.5J 4i. * As lias been said before, while this is allowable it is not as the Korean would put it, and, unless absolutely necessary, such sentences as this should be avoided. Chap. I. \ III. Sec. 5. THE VERB. 235 Had you not left Seoul be- a^| ^«*| M~£M ^4*1 fore that? *>>H fSJii? Sec. 5. — Shall, will. 1. Affirmative: — (a.) Opinion ; also in seeking direction and in stating one's purpose or inquiring another's purpose from a third party : — the future of the verb in e] t>| «]■ : ' or, interrogatively — in &| $l"7}-. (b.) Simple future, certainty, determination, or enquiring another's purpose directly — future in 2. Negative : — (a.) Vividly ; — negative present. (b.) Determination ; — negative future. 1. {a). If you do not put in more J«^- "^ ^ *l b\ H ~$ ^ salt it will spoil. iFlF^I 61 *h Shall I send Word again m\- >M# ?\% A£ ~$tf to Seoul? 51 7>? Shall I call a jinrikisha on 3J-S.*1] 7\^}i\- $L%7] my way to Tchongno? Jf H e| 3j7r ? I will call again in three or #^S| 7j**| ^\A] St.*] four days. o] «]-. If you need one I will lend (6.) Expressing determination, certainty— form, of the future or present used in indirect discourse. * Note.— In a simple sentence, the idea of determination conveyed by the English "would," cannot be given in Korean except by a circumlocution, unless it is implied by the context. This idea is however in part conveyed by the use of t3| 7r with the past tense. Chap. I. \ III. Sec. G. THE VEEB. 237 3 In conditional sentences — (a.) In the conditional clause— by the form of the conditional with ^J, 7]^> etc. {b.) In the conclusion— by the future of the verb. The past tense " would have," is rendered by the future perfect. See also § IV of this chapter, and Chap. X Sec. 8. 1. (a). I would go but I have no ^7\- 7>2l^ °}t: ^2 passport. *£ 4« . Ho would pay but, he has # 2? £j v} fe t] M # not yet received it from S|7l]>M *)"*' "S~e %■ Mr. Yi. 3tStii- I would not give you even v} -g-?;] Q?\] "f^, ^£.£. a cash to keep you from £t£2E ^1 iri5!'cl'- starving. 1. (c). In spite of all I could do, he vj-fe ***i Ig^ ^ *1 sfH would go to the country. ^7\ ^1# 2c ^Jx- He would not listen to S| e) J xt H^j it- reason. He would squander all his 'Q'v^e]:jt &>^ &] V)S. money in spite of all my *1]7|- ^-§- «]• *Jy] efforts to stop him. "§"$jix 2. (a). I thought they would be &]*qj i^*] ftja. -|-f- here by this time. ^ $fcix. Did you think it would be JL^fl] ti)^ -f ^5tA? so dear ? 238 THE VERB. Chap. I. J III. Sec. 7.. 2. (6). Mr. Yi said he would send el^«£M £4£*'iJ 2-^ it next week. v}5L -^r^J^. Mrs. Kim said she would tN^M ?! U ^l61l «]■ come with five other § ^^«1 ^^ "^^l^L women to-morrow night. -^^Ja. -§"33 ^' 3. If any one should come *f-l\ >£ Jt«1 £.71^- *fl*i enquiring for me, say I 2c. ~%*\3L if6}3!-- have gone to the palace. You would have time «j &J-^- HeW°d W|7> enough, if you would get tj tj "$"% 4i- up earlier. If you had been a little more ^S.^ fSl^t! *1*M careful, this would never Q S| $| 51 &• have happened. It would not pay to sell it £. 3& <& J| ^°i e| ^ 51 &. for less than five dollars. If you had gone yesterday, 6^1 ^J-^l1^ f*$ tj t} you would have been in "§" $f 51 ■&.• plenty of time. Sec. 7. — Can, could. Can and could are commonly rendered in two ways. 1. Affirmatively : — (a.) By the simple future or past. (fi.) By ^- preceded by the future relative participle, with the present or past of ${ii. 2. Negatively : — (a.) By -£ with the future or past. (b ) By 4- preceded by the future relative participle with the present or past of <$£.. Chap. I. \ III. Sec. 7. THE VEEB. 239 1. (a). If you only know how, you &J *\ fl] % -f- «ft g ^J f>\3. can say anything in d| ^l^H ^I-£ ^it Japanese. "$"2)ii. If you open the door you -^ ^^[ Ji2l&.. can see. He can only hear in one ear. J ^ £ ^t •£ ^ ^. Can your dog sit up on his S.^j£J 7lj7r f! ■cels.'ft hind legs ? 6j 5J ^ ? Can you send any message t>\3_ ^J"G]«J-3E. ^^ AS you please by telegraph ? ^IptS.^? When I was a boy I could *fl7r Stl^^lfe 61 Bll swim two ri. *)[&J *^5^4>. 1. (6). When can we see the Ky- ^4-?- ^^^r 3. Permission, liberty — is rendred variously according to the sentence by a transposition. 1. (a). May be there are some 3.*\*£ <&$\ 6M 5.^7} rnosquitos in the net. 5J5!4i- May be the steamer will be t>\v\ %]<£ ?} S^ASl^.- in to-morrow. Ciiap. T. I ITT. Sec. 8. THE VEKB. 241 May be we had better order ftj-of /^-|-^ i\.Hl\ i.e|-nj them from Seoul. 5.^1 4i. You might get well if you Jftf j\.t$ b}v} vj 5J 4.. went to Fusan. May be he will not start for -$-,S £U -^^l^lu: b}v} a day or two. aj-v} 'fefvfTjJ^.. 1. (b). May be he has not heard 31 t>|-*] Jji. e BJ ^,. yet. May be he missed the b\v} $fe. ^^. _g. "J ^4.. steamer. May be he has been told *}v} Q/j\ s.^ 4. . already. May be they have not t>}v\ cf*\ x\*j. t\\^ begun yet. *§"$j4i- 1. (c). If you had risen early per- &J^- H^iJ"0!1?! 6f°f haps you might have >?] 7*? Sec. 9. — Let, make, have, get. 1 The Korean causative form of the verb, may stand for any or all of the above. The distinctive differences between them however, can, if necessary, be expressed by the use of other verbs. Let, when it means per mission, may be expressed by the additional use of -^-Ji., (to give) ; get, by the use of $};&. (to obtain), or -*| 6] _£_ (to engage), etc. 2 " Let us," in a proposition — volitive mood, first person. 1. Soun Yongi has let the -fc^c]-;]. :§.4|. $y)]-§- lamp smoke. $34x- Shall I let the coolies take ^^f- :*}-§• 7r*j7r7(| the freight ? •$ .£. xi| §J y\ ? Chap. I. g III. Sec. 9. THE VERB. 243 You r ave eaten enough ; "^•^^r "4 V^ *| *Sj $JX| H now let me have a little. -M^-^- vf- # ^"^l'f'^ Please don't let the boys tf>*-J§6| ^] ^jtfe tjj- come into the rooms with «H] -£ ^z] j^fl] -fro} their shoes on. -^ •*].&• Make him wait a little. if. 7] t= t\7\] -fra} ej-. If those children come in, o $J c.2^ iTf-iE- -¥-"^1 be sure and make them ^ -§• e| 3«I Tfl "$" A- keep quiet. Make the washerman iron o^xja] ^^ £-§ .as. these clothes better. ^71] «]-e|7ll -£■«»} e)-. I will have Soun Yongi .-£-§-&] Q^tf "#41 ^ mail your letters. *] !§ -t-^I"3?" ^"§"711 You had better have the ■^■■fr Aj«^ c,*E71)> "^"^ carpenter make it, 2.7J41- Where did you get this t>] ,^-g. a^J-c]^ JJc^ » table made? tc^^.? You must have your grass o] -If -g- «j7fl "§" &} c): ^ cut. 7J)4i. Please let the cat go out. jl^o] v{-7|.7i] -fro} ^. Do not let the water run ^ ^]AJ #-§• t>] &\?i] ^ft] out of the bottle so fast. ASS.*] ^71) *§*.£.. I ought to get my watch ^f-=f- ty c^ tfl Ajgg repaired. 31 %l ^*fA 2. Let us go up Nam Santo- %] |J ^-^f^] -§-i-J- 7r& moii'ow. />] -c\. Let's go by way of Chong- %] Q ^Vj-g- ii 7r & A]«h nikol to-morrow. 244 THE VERB. Chap. T. \ III. Sec. 10. Let's rest and have a Jfl 2L ■% Uf ^ % *] «h smoke. Let's pull the cat's tail. a.®*] *ae| i *f *]• ^] *}. Sec. 10.— Must. 1 Expressing necessity : — (a.) Affirmative — past verbal participle with the postposition e>\ and future of •§".£., or ^A- Sometimes also the same effect is produced by the use of an adverb expressing necessity with the future. (b.) Negative — the negative base in *] with ^ t>}by and future of *§".£.. or £&.£.. Or, by either a conditional clause, or a relative participle qualifying 7$, with •£ and the future of f A. or &£.. 2 Expressing strong probability : — (a.) Must — future, or future participle with <$■*£ (b.) Must have — future perfect. 1. (a). You must be more careful. -#■ "t^ S.'S ~^'6^6l:^5l^- You must make him take it S^ f^^l 6H "$"^*1 whether he likes it or not. ^71] -t<^e>Y &?&&.■ You must mind whatever -^A] ^^1 >&*i "^u: your teacher says. xflS. "t^6!1 ^i5l4i' We must leave the house at *j <*] tf eJ -^ *\ **] ^ vfe> twelve o'clock. ^^) i» . I must be in Chemulpo by %\ &J £^1 <*] ^lifS. $1*1 five o'clock to-morrow. *£ 4k2l4i- I must pay a debt of one {b.) Negative— future relative participle of the nega tive verb with «J*|JL ("Ought to have" takes future past participle) . 3 Advice. (a.) Asking advice, — either future in e] 7\, or con ditional present with S.51 ii or -%ty& or present relative participle with 7-[A|;5.?J] £.. (b.) Giving advice, — either conditional present with 3L?H£. or present relative participle with 4 Ceusure, Regret, — conditional past, with future past I. (a). The people ought to obey ^tol 5.5. «}-g. $.Q just laws. 7\ f\ A- Even an enemy should be % -ft ^\~S. •§• M %~7\ forgiven. ■*] A> Men ought certainly to A}f 6] ^0] «H ^-§; speak the truth. 'J 7] A] A- Everyman ought certainly /■}•§ n]-c]- 5f "«iJ- «>] -t"^! to be vaccinated. f^ 7} •*!.£. ■ Boun Yongi should certain- &-$-6l"7f %-$*) ■°j ^4 ly be more respectful. "J 7-| *].£.• You ought to apologize to ^^^ <*f£l 1^ *].£.• the consul. Chap. I. $111. Sec. 11. THD VEKB. 247 1. (b). You ought not to sleep so aB|^| ^H# *}*! »H late. 17^| A- Mr. Pak, ought not to be \»J-,MtM *!■¥■ X?fl ^1 out too late. $1*1 6H £7l*]A- He ought not to ask so ae|?1] ft*| &H ^Tf much. •*].£.• 2. (a). He ought to be here direct- T^g- ■§■ €)*|i. ly. It is already past twelve, ^ 64-f- A] 7]. *1 #-*]H the clock ought to have ^"^ ^-61 ^d^l ^J "*!.£.• struck. The dictionary ought to be o| ^d-^r ^"^"S ^S6] good, it was written by a c.^^^]H 2.£ *I scholar. ~*j .£.• Oranges ought to be very ^l^-fe. -fr>S7r 9|-f- -tyS cheap now. *| **!.£.• 2. (5). It ought not to have been JftfAJ *!-?- ;*J*1 *>H very cold in Fusan. "fS^ 7]*\Sl- They ought not to le asleep ft) Z\f\] |J-^- t;}?;] ^H as early as this. 1££1*I £~- ' It was very carefully made, ft) 7]G; ^ % ssj £t= it ought not to be weak. $M H tf"$X\ 6H IT 3. (a). Which road should I take ? »fV ^lc 7\-*\$l7\? What color ought I to paint -f- -& ^! & 3. aej^i this? . :s.3l4&? 248 THE VEEB. Chap. I. \ III. Sec. 12. How ought I to translate o] y] -§ &} -^ f\] tQ ^ this? f fe7^1 iflj.? I am going to Chemulpo, M)7j- ^J-g'jtJ ^^tl^l ahout how much ought I j5L"2"ii" ^I^M- -?-1?! to pay the chair coolies ? -§-?3] ^ ? 3. (6). You ought to take an urn- -f--ft 7r*]jL -7|. ^ 7-f ^"J brella. Suty^.. You should go. S.Mb] 7\vd 5.^]Ji. You had better not build a ^1 31*] fH "tTtSTW house. 5.9J] j.. You should consult with &]- U]- *] £]. ^ -S "$" ^ your father. &.?%£.. Should you not buy a ^ -r$j A}fe: y\/.] ;s.*| couple ? £38 V H= ? 4. Then, you ought to have a^J-^- asjfll ^ ~§"$J said so. -c-j^ S^^JJx- You ought to have been ■ej 2.^ -§-33 -c-J ig ;^-$j. more careful. SJJi- I ought not to have said a Vi\7\ ^ *}<\ ^SJ*!^ word about it. 5.$ ^ ae| "§" $!:&.• I ought to have put on my ^^ ^J^ 9H1?! 5.5 mangen before. 7]§ a^l "§"$!4i- Sec. 12. — Think, suppose. 1 Regard as a fact — future participle with ■% i. *>\ JL, 2 Regard as probable : — • (a.) Likely to happen — future relative participle with §ti!.or ^^4t- Chap. I. § III. Sec. 12. THE VERB. 249 (&.) Likely to have happened — future past par ticiple with -5j "§".£. or ^^4«. Note. — Where we would use the verb " to think," the Koreans, for the most part, use the verb " to know." " To know " with the accusative postposition, conveys to the Korean the idea of absolute knowledge, but with the postposition §L the idea of an opinion, merely. **1 #-§ 6l-£ means I know Mr. Song but £*i H &.S. Q Shi. " I knew him [understood) for Mr. Song," or " I thought it was Mr. Song." 1. I did not think you would AS ^Gl e •M *£ come to-day. S5U- Some people think that ^d *rS *jz^ ^.7r man is crazy. 51*1^- 6te- I thought I could go in ^ *izMfe tM°d half an hour. 71% t$U- I thought Mr. Song would Ml7r 4^^61 % an probably be late. #1- SSU- When I first saw you I s^-i- *i£ *i<*} thought you were an old ^^iS, s£$fc4i- friend. 2. (a). I do not think you will M| *J Zj- <*] fe ^ M "A- find any good fresh fish ts^^»]^ -^^ -^ ^-§- there. ^^1^- f *t^!• I do not think you will like %o] 2.^. 4^-i: S.$r Korean food. • ~?-?\ -*};*] >&£.. I suppose there are plenty MJ ^Z}^]fe t>\ ^j-^J6*) of fleas in this mat. v^ J=- o] ^ ;g -^ -$&■ 2. (b). I do not think the minister ^4>7|. *>}Z\ 6]"H H^vJ- has arisen yet. '^'Stc -^ii- 250 THE VEEB. CiiAr. I. \ III. Sec. 13. Do you suppose the steamer J^s^-vf ^2}■*,] $Hr"xi has arrived yet ? *} £.*] #^-x 4&? (Addressing an old man). I suppose the postman vf v^-^f •^■^l**] ^1^1-^71- passed while I was out. ^lM^^A ^4i- I suppose the eggs are all ^ -c\ -^^^ ~$£~- gone. Sec. 13. — Intend. 1 Intend is rendered by the stem of the verb with s):-^-_^ or .a.*} "§"■&-• These two are really almost interchangeable, but the latter is a little stronger and conveys more the idea of definite purpose, although this distinction cannot always be recognized. 2 Sometimes also the same idea is expressed by the use of the future relative participle with 7&. 1. I intend to go by the nine *}$■<*■] $Hf7H 7>«>3. o'clock train. -TA- I intended to let you know, Ml 7r **| tfl] f2*^. but I had no time. t%% Dte WM ^ f5l*. I had not intended to let ^7r 9\W*\ SHerfe Mr. Yi know, but he 7]& *H^ °Ffe -fM heard it without my **. S5U- knowledge. I had not intended going, ifl7T- 7r2)=fc:~ 7]-& 6H but as that person advis- $d*!M- -3. *rf 61 13"$" ed it, I went. 7] <*] # A- I intended building a house, MJ7]- ^-i"*!^ "frSl^lH- but I could not afford it. *]%•%: *&*] ^ t bA& Chap. I. § III. Sec. 14. THE VEBB. 251 T intended to use them, but &*ty*}7)- % M J. . could not. He intended eating it, but %{ £.?\-c\i\. % ojW^ did not. I intended to go, but some- y\^\ "$"$j3j v\\r &J t^*] thing came up and X -^ ^J-j.. could not. 2. He says he intended to go, Q y]^ &J-CJ 7\x\ji -A- $ but did not. -ej o] -c]-. I intended to finish the book j. 4iJ4h aj x-j/^1 ^^ 74^ yesterday, but I was sick «j o] 3J^ .£ -$-<>}.&. and did not. Sec. 14. — Want. 1. Followed by a noun. (a.) Need, Kequire — the verb. /&£.. (b.) Desire to have— y •§" £_ or by the use of a verb with ^y Ji as in number 2. 2. Followed by a verb. (a.) Desire to do — ■$&. joined to the verb by the particle ji. (b.) Wish it to be— 5J4. or a circumlocution. 3. Meaning " how about," how would it be."— verb in «)=, aL^4i, or conditional present with a$«] ~$£_. 4. Used independently in questions signifying, for what purpose, etc. — a noun or pronoun to signify the thing purposed with the postposition 51. 1. (a). Do you want this ? 0] 7$ -£HJ.£. ? 252 THE VERB. Chap. I. I III. Sec. 14. I want a chair to go to =£s 7r7l«*] JiSl ii2l4i. Chong No. Do you not want some *}.£. 7-J£ *>}*\ A^Sl? small ones ? I do not think we shall need *fl *JZ^]i£ .£.£ ^-£- any crab apples to-day. £rS] ^}-§ 5- ■§".£.• 1. (6). Sujini wants some grapes. -fr/Jl &] 7r 13E 1 "S t-f-2. ^&. Do you want a small S^Sl If6?*! "$"»+ 7}*1 puppy? jL ^4x? I want a Chinese tailor. •f-5{- £ * Sec. 15. — Wish, Hope. 1 Desire to do — same as Sec. 14, 2. (a.) of this chapter. 2 Hope that a thing is, or will be : — (a.) Simple desire — verbal noun in 7] with accusative postposition and "U e]-_5>, ; or conditional present with future of S.4i- (b.) Coupled with doubt, fear or regret— conditional past with 5.4t. It is also correct to use the conditional past alone as an exclamation, and this practice is much in vogue among Koreans. Sometimes also the past tense of V ej-ji, is used. 2. (a). I hope to-morrow will be %]*1 3£ ^ S.?]§ V ehfi- fine too. 254 THE VEKB. CflAr. I. | II[. Sec. 16. I hope that that boy will be tsJ $ $) S. ^«] i| 7l f a scholar too. V 5J-JL- I hope he will soon recover. $\ t] vj 7] % V 9J"iL- I hope it will be done by 3.?]] «]■ $| 7] J "^ «>A- the day after tomorrow. I wish you would tell him. ^ ^ ^-^j 5.^8 4t- I wish it would not rain. V|7r 6H A^,!5.^'Ji. 2. (b). I wish I had a little change. ^^ ^ $l'M'el ^ 2.31 ii. I wish you had told me -cj ^^-^^^^ 238 Ji. sooner. I wish that dog would'nt a 711 7r *>]• H 31 ^^ bark. S.9J! 4». I wish we would'nt have t>) ^.a\] %-t>] a^ 5f^l^i any more snow. 5: 30 4i- I wish I could learn 3.^ ^ ^1^ +7> 51^ Korean. ^I1^- I wish I were a little taller. .2§. ^i ^ ^^. I wish he had come yes- • *>^ ^l^1! ^''e1^ 233 :&• terday. I hoped it would be plea- A£ftl 2?l"f V 5t 7$ sant to-day, but it; is v\^ ^J-^f ^^lA- doubtful. I hoped he would come ^ ^f^AS #7]- V St by that steamer, but he ^i H 6]-vj ^-4.. did'nt. Sec. 16.— Need. 1. Followed by a noun — Same as Sec. 14, 1 (a.) of this chapter q v. ; or by the use of the past verbal participle with the postposition t>y. CiiAr. I. I III. Sec. 17. THE VERB. 255 2. Followed by a Verb : — (a.) Negative — By future relative participle with (b.) Affirmative — Same as must see Sec. 10. You need court robes to enter the palace. 7r5!A- You need a new hat. You need money to build a large house. You need flour, sugar and eggs to make this cake. 51 W 6laJ Ar-^ ^ LI 2!*- 2. (a). You need'nt wait any longer. You need'nt serve tea be fore six. You need'nt lock the door when you go out. Tell Mr. Kim he need'nt go to Chong Eo to-day. As we have a long time yet, we need not go fast. 7£7A 6J*- Sec. 17. — Seem, Look. 1 Appearance — the appropriate relative' TAX*.- participle and — 71-JiA. £fA. or appropriate tense of verb with vf j£ &., 256 THE VERB. CiiAr. I. \ III. Sec. 17. 2 Keport— the verb,, followed by a e] 6> or form used in indirect discourse. 1. The fire seems as though ^s] *iQ S-^^Sl- it will go out. The fire seems to be going -fr&l *x*lfe S^lA- out. The fire seems to have gone ■§<>] nQ .2. $=«>].$.• out. When the man came for Ar§ ^1 *}*]*% ^U 1 the shoes he looked a ^#^33 Xt"ac1 little angry. 6] *]"• Those pictures seem to me ^ a^^lfe ^ 3.^1 61 to be hung a trifle too £.& ^-71] ^\1a^^- high. When you talk to him he ^ $rt|«i|fe: *f«f ffe seems to assent. S^X^i- These mats seem to be t>] *&/%(>] *]?■]$. S6ef dirty. 6lA- This gun seems to be out of »] 4j-°l tiJ \J-7jj X4i- order. It seems wonderful that you ^jiSb: -*.£.*1 ^'it can send a telegram to e]^ o|^- That man seems to be very aA>f Wl ■T- **!* clever. S^ojgsl **. That child seems very tired. 3. Stl7r *1 + €■1 £#01 A. It seems to be a fire. J£ \f:jj Xi' He looks to me like a thief, vf Jt7]b: X*-}^- X4i- The man who came here _£.|s ^S61! ^^i ^5 b) this morning did'nt look &J.g. Af§ ;£*] aj-v^ • like a Japanese. if § «] oj-e]-. It looks as though it will £.}£ *!"7r -§-7]-_a..4.. rain to-day. He had intended to go to .£.§ T^^l^r" "^SJ^H seethe sights to-day, but 5&*]v£ «]7]- £1# "5121 it seems as though the M-JiA- rain will prevent it. Last night it seemed as t]x\] x^«]fe ^«] H^ though it would clear. X *$" S ^ b] rl"- It does not seem as if there ti|-lJ-«>] ^l-*] ik7i X*l will be much wind. ^t Ji lt does not look like peace. Slfig'g'^ X*l ^tii- It seems as if this leak is' nt e>] ^lfe7^| S^I*! going to stop. 6}-^^ Xi. 2. It seems there was a fire <^*1| *$^=- $j-*|7r ijji in Chong Dong yesterday. 3. 5] &|\ It seems there is a terrible *]^J- -f--^**] ■§■ ^^l famine in China. ^.sj -c]- ■$".£.. There seems to be no steamer A]^}-^. Jfl'g-.S.S, 7\\z running to Chemulpo now. ^f-fr-^i0] <$~c\ if.fi.- It seems you've bought a /•]$} <%£>. as| b\. watch. 258 THE VEEB. Cifap. I. \ IV. § IV.— THE INFINITIVE. In Korean there is no true infinitive ; that which the French grammarians denominated the infinitive, is so in no sense of the word. In neuter verbs it is the low form cf the indicative present, and in active verbs has little or no use except as a mere designation of the verb, much as we say " the verb to be." Tbere being then no true infi nitive and the English infinitive having various senses, it will be rendered therefore in various ways according to. circumstances. 1 Wben it stands as an object or subject of another verb — by the verbal noun in 7], or the relative participle with 7&. For this infinitive with auxiliaries, see § III. 2 Signifying the purpose, or object, with verbs of motion — by the supine in Sf or ef-. 3 Signifying with the intention of, — the desiderative base with jl or future participle with vJ-jL.* 4 Following the means, instrument or agent — the same as the preceding (3) ; or, more properly, by the verbal noun in 7] with the postposition <*J. (see, Part I. 174). ,.£>•' Equivalent to the verbal noun — the verbal noun in 7] or tbe relative participle, with 7& or ■=] etc. G Equivalent to "if" and accompanied by " it will " or " it would " — the appropriate tense of the verb with ^. 7 Following verbs of command, direction, or advice, — the imperative verb in sj-jt or 5]- al "§".&. sometimes con tracted into eflji.. (see Part I. 1 229). 8 Following verbs of promising, requesting, etc. — the form of indirect narration in -efjL. * Note — This last is but a corruption of the desiderative base see Part I. H 238. Chap. I. ? IV. THE VERB. 259 1. It is wrong to waste time. -Ml^-g- *Jtl61 JLMffe; Are 3'ou afraid to have your v| »}j 7] ^ -f./44| -§■£. ? teeth pulled ? The government does not ^Jf 2. I went to get the vase that x^*ij j^ig a§-£ ^fs| we saw the other day, ^{--ej v) tf£;tj Jf-7|. Af but some one had already ^J-^""2! 61 eT". bought it. I went to find the children $ til" *r*le1 ^|"^DHs: but they had all gone to *j£/i\ -c\ *}"'g\2.3. ~%&- school. I went to meet you but you S.^ -§• 5ivJ-ej ^J-Tjd^b: didn'tcome. £*] oj-Cj -$"$J4.. I came to pay my debts. «! Tj-j^Sj ^j-j,. 3. I raised my hand to strike. AE^Jefjo. .£.-§■ £.*&&.- Did you do it to make him a. A]-f ^^71) fvfjL angry? asf?i] fSJJx? 260 THE VEIiB. Chap. I. ? IV. Did you say it to make a n. *}* 'S^Jfe *rf "1: fool of him? ^lv|.aLae^l-r5J4i? He bought some arsenic to ^-]f ■^•6]e>a. «]#-&• kill rats, but his child ate ^ H 6> 7l 7> ^3. it and died. ^5J^- I want a wagon to send t>] :*}-§■ *flf\3.3. A'H this freight to Chemulpo/ ^A+^S Sd^- ^- You had better buy a rat fl f #7H ^1 "Sit A^ trap to catch the rats. 7JA] S^Jdfe- I must have some nails to fflf ^-*l7H -£t 5i &1 mend the box. *>]= 5*5l4v He asks for some money 73 V} *}■ # 4 el=A ^ •# to pay for his supper. I^M-A- I should think it would MJ *JZMfe <>led ^-§r cost fully a thousand 31 7l *] ^ M & 6W dollars to build such a ^^\i^- house. How long does it take to ^#JL^1 ^ "M ^ send a man to Chemulpo? /^M- S|3]£.? Call a plasterer to repair #5. **l7]«l «] *<* 61 the inside of the roof. -t^-1 &.tf9\- Who was appointed to ex- *j5i ^A ^7l*f| ^TT1"! amine the students ? **1 4r "$"S3& ? 5. I do not know how much 1 «jl 71-fe^l ^°FH- I ought to give, to go on 4 *] e»> 5. £ *1 S.^ horseback. iJS^i' Chap. I. g IV. THE VEEB. 261 We went down to the beach -f-^171- tif-cj- -?j£.3, 7V±. but the waves were too v}^ ^Q :g-7j 8. He promised to give me five £. ^J -^- oj- jo. -§• t^ vj dollars, hut he has not. &]-H ^.$3 £■• He promised to meet us ^|#i y]/^ ^M-Sl^N* in Chemulpo. # Sf t^l6! ^ I promised to go, but I M] 7r 7V ^ «> ot # ^ don't feel well. fSHM- ^*1 *fi. Shall I go and tell the seam- *J5L ^ 711 7r*j ^-l- stress to come to get her *}*l3i JLefji. ^ 5 &\ pay? Sl7r ? § V.— PASSIVE CONSTEUCTION. Koreans like most orientals do not find much use for a passive construction . As has been said in the Gram matical Notes, a passive form can be derived from all transitive verbs. In many cases, however, the use of this passive, except in certain sections of the country, is con sidered inelegant. When, then, the foreigner desires to render a passive construction, there are several ways open to him. 1 In some cases, the use of a passive form with certain Chap. I. g V. THE VERB. 263 verbs has become so general throughout the whole country that it is not considered inelegant. 2 There are in Korean a number of intransitive verbs, or intransitive forms of expression, that may and do commonly take the place of the English passive. 3 Where neither of the above methods are admissible, the English passive must be rendered into Korean by a change of the form of the sentence. This change of form will of course vary according to the circumstances :— (a.) When the passive construction can be rendered by the active, with the indefinite " they " the sentence will be translated accordingly. (b.) When the English sentence is simply explanatory it may be rendered by the past and sometimes the present participle, generally with 7$. (c.) When the passive clause is the object of another verb, its verb assumes the active form, and is generally, translated by the participle with 7& or |J. (d.) " To be " followed by the passive participle ex pressing past action still continuing, is rendered sometimes by the simple active construction, as in (a) ; sometimes by the participial form of the verb, with 33§l4*> (or negative, with *j 4»); some times by the simple verbal participle with $1 4«; and sometimes when intransitive verbs are used, by the past form in ~c\ expressing continued action. 1. Where were you bitten ? *1 ^1 § # H $J A* § r1 H 5W 264 THE VEEB. Chap. I. I V- Soon Yongi has been stung &«§-&! £7r?f-i- %S\ 71] in the finger by a bee. & 61 $J 4? ^l 61 *N He was arrested by the 4f~$ <35J£ "£**] 3.SL police, on the twelfth day Si\7\] ^tsjA- of the sixth month. One is open, the other is -£v|-:g. b4^5L ~$tf-£r shut. 5t3M?*Mr]-. At Chemulpo, Fusan and *fl-t-S.Sr ^W ^I'tH Gensan, trading posts *J ^ "If' T1* ^ *1 -§• were first opened. ^f]sj;&. 2. Don't let yourself be cheated. ■=£•*] «}•.&.. Man Chini has been whip- ^ o| 7]. a.i>\ f\ * 7] «] ped several times, for t^^\ ^ ^] °l-*$Ji. doing that. This child was vaccinated 5.^ £]^[ ^71)>M <>1 S by a Korean doctor, $J 7^ -f^fi *-1 %&■ A fire arose in Chong Dong, ^ :f. ^ $]- *] 7r *-M and about half Seoul was -M -§ *>1 7| ^ # 6] *-r burnt. S-^"^6!^- About when will the new -4^ *fl *3<>] tf^lM- *\ Pouk Han temple be $|5Ji«? finished ? It was finished long ago. Qtf «]■ ^*] JL^IIiL- Not one has been ship- "£vf3£ ^Md 1f*l 6H wrecked. if^^i- Is much sugar brought to $! v\-c\; •f--^-^ -M-^6! Korea from China every 2.*d4HI] ^t*I *4£.? year ? CHAr. I. § V. THE VEEB. 265 This receipt has not yet t>] ^^.^.t] 6]- 6} fr-Q been signed . 5J *] t>\ v} •$• ej j» . I thought foreigners would i|-^- A}-g =-6] 35. ££.7^ be expelled immediately. vf ^ -§• ^ $t&. Has the carpenter been paid ^•■fr7]- ^^ "Tr ## for the bookcase ? «£ $fc4. ? While I was in Seoul, I Aj# 5J£ *J«rf] ig "^ was taught by a man ^rll^I^l ^1^4i- from Pyeng Yang. 3. (a). Has this room been swept ? ^j- ^sj y. x^ ? Tobacco is used almost ^-^]§ 7-J-rl -^^M everywhere. 45.5. • I understand that in certain M] =Hi] &J-e} t-fej-tf] countries the criminals are ^ fe 2j tl"a ■2- if AS. beaten to death with jCfSj 4£l'cl" *§"§*! clubs. ^^T"- Diamonds have recently -^ ^f^-g- -£^| &}-tf)e]7|- been found in Africa. <*]tf *J-^i>. At what time is the rice a} V &![&] tt| jg ^-4r harvested ? -£■ _£. ? Where were those oranges a -fr^J *>]*] -r$d4i? put? 3. (6). This (boat) ticket was o| /gi£7}- ^It^X -rl^6!1 bought for a friend, but # 7]X\ &J o}-^ &]-*J he has not yet come. &]-«-J £!•.£.. This certainly was written c)7-|A] r| ^ 0] ^J-§ii Q with a lead pencil. 7]*]£l.- 266 THE VERB. Chap. I. ? V. Was this letter brought by b| *j*]7|- SJ-4 ^1*13. the Euiju courier ? 7r*1 •£ 7|*] A? Was this cut with a knife »] 7^A] ^-i. V] *J 7}*1 or with scissors ? A 71-^ 3. ^ tl 7^] A ? What is kanjang made of, #*<£■#• -f-^^S. c.1?^: and when is it used ? Tf^H ^ 3. (c). I should like to hear the komengo well played. Before I went to America, U)-^*) 7}. 71 X^]fe xff I had never seen a can non fired. Did you ever see a man's fe 7|t head cut off ? 3. (d). The roof of that house is -o} ^ ^ -§■ -#• 7} S\. 3. tiled. H My itis in the drawer, wrap- -^I^J" ^-^l JS.^ b:"?l S. ped up in paper, and tied J)S -Wf-jL 2e.4J *.S with a string. ^^ ll 7?A].&- None of those shoes are well ej ■*! ti}- V H -^ $ 3d sewed. "^M-H ^Js.. This fish is'nt well broiled. o) A%Q ^ -J 3} &HA- It was hidden under the diM-JL 'fjrS] 3l*)| Z^"} roots of a pine tree. $1^ *1 61 *]■• It must certainly be hidden b]?\ •£*] ^ »| 0] $\Q*»] somewhere in the garden. xS i $1 7\ A] Si.- Was the lamp lighted in the ^* # *»] #-§• ^ ^ H8 ? minister's room ? - Chap. I. g VI. THE verb. 267 § VI.— CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. We will but consider three classes of conditional sen tences in this place. 1st. Simple conditional : — These are rendered by the simple tenses, present, past, and future, with ^ in the conditional clause ; and the future, or sometimes the present, in the conclusion. 2nd. Supposition contrary to fact : — This class of sentences may be rendered by the com pound tenses, or the forms of the verb in =i , with ^ in the conditional clause; and the future perfect in the conclusion. Quite often the conclusion will take the future participle with ^ *$".£.. 3rd. Improbable supposition : — When the supposition contains the idea of doubt, " if " may be rendered by **J, with the interposition of a particle expressing doubt or uncertainty as 3£, or by ~7\^. Note. — As was remarked in the Grammatical Notes, this particle 7^> has often the idea of time, and may generally be said to give the idea of condition, with the necessary notion of time. In common use to-day, however, it has nearly always, the idea of doubt. If you let the fire oat, we -g £x*l7l] ~$v& -T^lll6! shall all take cold. «]■ ~Q3\ #3j4i. If the steamer leaves to- «]7]- ^|^J ^ji4^3 -?*el morrow we can't go. ^ t>) ^ ~>\ 2] £.. If he goes I'll go too. n.l\ 7>Dd M-X 7r3|4i- If he has gone we can't ^M]^ ■^-^\i\ li^'U^- help it. If he has already sold the *4f- ^M ^StM^ ^1 books, no matter. Q&- 268 THE VEBB. CiiAr. I. i VI. If he were going I would a. *}% '4'c1 ^i *fl7r go- #3! A- If you had loaned me fifty a.&\ S.^ 6l *fl7l] -g^ dollars then, I could St.^ %•£ ^^^^i ^ have paid my debt, made «]•£ ^T"^-31 ^"^r -E a little money myself, # ^j! 5t^I ^I6*] S."^ and paid 3'ou back with S]7l] «i&| -£. -2j4 interest, in five days. ^!eJS ^T" QHVl^- If you had told me she was *$ 51 31 ^l" -31- ^ 14 *1 ^ sick, I would have gone t>] 7^tsi\ M| j\ zf t& there yesterday. "§"$j4s.. If it were not raining we ti| _£.*] Q^V& -T"^!-0! would all get horses and -e|- § $Jjt rfc^JJlS. go to the So Chang ^J-^lJx. Myo. If I were goiug to do it, I 3. ^J "tril^ li ^M would have done it al- "§"$321 Al ready. 3. If it should not be raining jx **( tt] .£.*] t>\ v| at that time let's go. "$"7-| ^ 7\ % *) 'c\- If he should have gone, 7fc 7]^ ^7;] 5: 3* 7j-*1 bring the letter back. £.^ &}■ If you should be going to tf % y\ 5] 7]^. Mj^i*] Seoul I wish you would -fr vf ^ -§- 6): ^. oj take a letter for me; 5.3' ^- If they should be spoiled #-$$3 7]^ «]■ St-Sr^-a. he says he will change "$".£.• them. Chap. II. the NOUN. 269 CHAPTER II. THE NOUN. With reference to the rendering of English nouns in Korean there is little to be said here. For the most part, they are rendered by their exact equivalents in Korean, which can be found in a dictionary. In some instances, (and these from the nature of the case are not a few) where the idea is entirely new to Use Korean mind, new words must be formed, either by the use of ideas known to the Korean, or by the bodily introduction of foreign words into the language. This' latter course however, except where the use of Korean ideas would make the words altogether too cumbersome for use,, is to be depre cated. In not a few cases where the foreigner would use an absti act noun, the Korean would prefer to transpose the sentence and use a verb. The heat in this room is t>] ^ xfl^fo] ^ ^-^. very great. Mr. Yi's kindness to me e|>M»g-e>] *fl;fl] *flt£6l was very great. ^S^l tTSJii- It is not necessary here, to give further illustrations of the noun, as these are found in all the sentences. 270 THE ARTICLE. Chap. III. CHAPTER III. THE ARTICLE. There are no words in Korean that exactly express the force of the English definite article. As has been stated before, the Koreans are not, for the most part, in the habit of affixing the appropriate postposition to its noun unless it is needed to avoid ambiguity. The addition of the postposition giving definiteness, has often the effect of the article the. The indefinite article is as a rule not rendered into Korean. The absence of the proper Korean Postposition generally gives sufficient indefiniteness without any addition. It can however at times be expressed by the use of the Korean numeral ~& {one) placed before the noun. Note. — The other form of the numeral, "fcH'i is placed after the noun, emphasizing the fact of there being but one, and can never there fore take the place of the English indefinite article. Sometimes, this indefiniteness is expressed simply by the absence of any postposition. ■The books have come. 4} $ *>] $&£.• Books, (plur. nom.) have come. Chap. III. THE AETICLE. 271 The patient took the medi- *g$l6l 5f^. tJ^J^vf 4 cine, but he died. $3 J». A boy came and brought "* o $1 $\-tf *}-§• 7]-^ the books. ^"4i- Bring me a pencil. o£^g 7)-*! A^-l2!"- It is a letter from my <>]7]*\ ol^J" *rte ^ 3^ friend who lives in Ame- i\ j£^ ^^1A- rica. He is a famous gentleman a.6] 7j- ^^" *r a ^"^l -^" among the Chinese. n|"* -^l^iL- Dealing in rice is a profita- ^ ^-^ -$\r j\A\ .371] ■%■ ble business. 5| "*; ^ •*. _£. . I heard the news from a M)7]- a 4l ■§•-§• ^ # *}f Seoul man, when I was SJ71] s.^ fe«| X*l staying with him. wj-f- /qj^] :=3j £.. It is very strange how an •^■Vj6|7}. ^Ji1^ ^^j owl can fly in the night Q Vb: 7f<*] ^I-f- better than in the day. 0]^"^"iL- 272 PRONOUNS. chap. IV. CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS. § I. — Personal Pronouns. As has been said before, the use of the personal pronoun in Korean is very much restricted and on this account we would again urge upon the student the necessity of omitting the pronouns when speaking Korean. At times however, for emphasis, or to avoid ambiguity, and also, sometimes as a matter of politeness the pronouns or words to take their place, are used. The regular pronouns can be found in the chapter on pronouns in Part I. Other words are often used to take their place, as ^*[ (little man) and ^f jJ (my body) etc. fori; S.^e-1 (elder brother) H#-^M {aged father), etc. for you. The English possessive pronouns are formed by affixing the postposition S| (of). Note. — In many places where we would use the pronoun of the first person singular, the Korean would use the plural, and often for first person plural, they will use the plural %-s] together with the sign of the plural 1-. See Part I. fl 60 ff. Chap. IV. I I. PRONOUN. 273 I brought the box, and the a fflfe ^i\- 7\7?\ <^3. servant carried the ^.^Le>]jr "*|-^1 c>1 ^-jL bundle. $&'3s.- This is different from what ^| ;{. ^ref-jr 7jsr|. 'Q £.. I ordered. The ladies rode in chair?, ^^M|#^ -SL^S# S-*] but we walked. uf ^ej^r '§5J4:. Some of us would like to -f-ef ^-«H] ^jj \?|£ej: study history. *r e>| -c-[ e-j 6}^. Everything I say seems to *fl Hj- v\-c\- _£*$-§• -$i-}-7l] offend you. -§-*r .2. ^ &].£.. Did you leave the door -^ -g- v)]7r %i>] ^^ open ? \- vj: ? There was a man here an "* ^ t>] /.] *£<*] a)- ? el hour or two ago enquir- ^j] 5f./v} ^-§. *J-:*J-.&. ing for yon. That fur hat of yours just ^SJ ^S^7r *% Ji&. fits you. My father died three years -f-ef 6|-Hj-*j $uf x^j ago. 2e}. 7r^4t. Come out to my house in -^-e| i)^- ^}_6.S. Sj- the country, and spend a *1| wjo -*]_£.. month. You're a little particular. ,3-'tle'| £.%■ Ay^S-i*. He's a man of abilility, but *|5.tc $lAjvf. Ji.;*:^ *| «r he lacks energy. -^ -£•_£_. Are not these yours ? t.) ^J -»£J y^X\ 6|-^J^? He offered me a hundred ^ ts| .£.*[ «]£{ ^.nj-ji. dollars but I would not "*"$J7^ °J-fe: *t*l 6fH take it. ~§"$j4v 274 PRONOUNS. Ciiap.TV. ?I. Skc.?. Sec. 2. — Compound Personal Pronouns. There is no one word in Korean, that gives exactly the force of the English word " self." It must therefore be rendered according to the shade of meaning to he ex pressed . 1 When it is 6imply emphatic — simple personal pro noun with the emphatic postposition $r, or personal pro noun alone. 2 One's self as well as another, — personal pronoun with 2E- 3 Signifying one's self as distinguished from others — by the use of jjl"*], or ;$;»], or by the repetition of the pronoun. 4 Signifying alone — by £*}. 5 Of itself— by *J2c. 1. I'll lend it, just as soon as I vj-b: *]" v\SL 3J- ^J H finish reading it myself. • ej t>] «J\ When I would'nt eat it vffe *J*1 BH "^°4u:"?l myself, do you think I'd \A]y\] -§■ •§■ 6}v«+? give it to ycu ? 2. 1 tripped on that sill two or vfJE a ■^jt^ *^\M three times myself. ^ Aj tj *Q *>] vf v-j «] We ourselves could'nt sleep ^-ejH -5r ^fe^l -?-cr last night, so no wonder -i:\f^l 3.^]fH 3J"7r you could'nt when you Jt.^ ■% ^iTj*] *]•# were so near the fire. "g^J ^J4«. Chap. IV. ? TI. Seo. 2. PRONOUNS. 275 3. I'll go myself. ifl7]- *1*1 7M&. You ought to be able to an- a^-fe ?61 %*J l\^t swer that yourself. JT-+"7r $I-£ 7] *■]£.• He said that he himself m\. ^t] -g.5fc &*&*& would give five thousand ^.uj-jo. "$"$34i- dollars. I cannot clear myself before ^3|«r >£3j!g ^J=cfl *f$| God. «J^ f^ fijA. 4. I doubt whether you can do ^-fc| :£*]■ f7|. *l-?-*l it by yourself. ^t4i. He is unable to teach so a. «f f!\ % tj"<=}- :£.*]■ large a school by himself. -? H ^^- *j 4. ? 5. Do you believe the world ^*] >jZ|^lfe <»*M|7|- came into existence by ^| 2c ^ a ^ 4i ? itself? § II— RELATIVE PRONOUNS^ Like the Japanese, Korean is without relative pronouns, and the relative clause is rendered by the use of the re- relative participle, which comes before what in English is the antecedent clause, and acts as an adjective governing it. For instance, the Koreans do not say " The man who came yesterday " but, " The yesterday came man," t>] *1| .£ A} ^ . It may be well to add that the tense of the relative participle will of cause follow the tense of the rela tive clause. When the antecedent is " it " or " that," either expres sed or implied, it is rendered by 7j, or of a person by «>]. 27G PRONOUNS. Chap. TV. ? II. Sec. 2. Who was that you bowed to *1 ^ £1 * "*" ^ 61 7\ just now? ¥=?\8.? Who was that who bowed ^^j] &* I^S6!?!- t- to you just now ? ^-ji. ? He is a fellow that used to ^*<| -fel7l] *}-Sl AS be a servant of ours. $I«i ^ o] $.■ What is it that crow has in r=} 7]-^} <& <*] ^ ?W its mouth? ^AlA? Let us see what you have £.<*] $ife Z\ # -&& in your hand. ^\x\- What the rats don't carry ^7r 6H T^tf ?lt off, the- ants eat. 71) 6M 7r °-J 4v- Have you done what I told m 7f US. ^ 1^ 5! V H= ? you ? What was the name of the t\% % >^<*] *{■*] ^ «>l^i king who used to kill flies vj^sj H^<>1 ->M when he was a boy ? A] A ? The horse I gave so much a.^fl\ ^ *&*] ^-3- # for, is not worth his feed. % t] %\ tj £ -^ # 5. * ti- Did they take the carpenter ^-g-Aj ^^ "§"6V ^ who fell off the roof, and -¥-^1 ^1 ^1 ^ fl sprained his arm to the O.S. ^^ 3{"4i? hospital ? Who was that woman you *>}*% ^IM-1?! 5 t] ^-€r met a little while ago ^|^«>] Tfi? with a baby on her back ? In which drawer do you ^^ ^ ^ItM »1 V keep your lead pencils ? 7-|<*l A ? Chap. IV. g III. Sec. 2. PRONOUNS. 277 Is'nt this the book in which J*J*] ^ *!-&. b]7]*\ you put the letter ? *>} ^\ £. ? Where does the clay of t>] ^ ^ c. ^ fe fr 61 which they make these 6^!>M Ai? bricks, come from ? I can't find the paper in o] *J 3^ 5. £1 8 *r S which these books were ^>-7T- ^A- wrapped. Where is the book that you vf"g -^r^ 1fSi *461 were going to give me ? *>]■$] $J £ V H $1 ?r § III.— INTEEKOGATIVE PKONOUNS. The English interrogatives are translated by their equi valents in Korean, which may be found in Part I. 66 ff. For convenience and study, however, we will give a few sentences below arranged in the following order. 1. Who, is rendered by -jrj or jt;tS -nr, with the ap propriate postpositions. " Whose " used as a substantive is rendered by -}f] 7$, ¥]*}■ Sometimes also who may be rendered by the circumlocu tion, *>-)yAr§ {what man?). 2. Which :— (a.) Used substantively,— 1>] y £j, or 5J"=i^. (6.) Used adjectively,— i>] V or $$■£[. 3. What:—* * Note. — In many places where we would use " what " the Koreans employ some other word. The Koreans would not say "What does Mr. Yi think " but " how does Mr. Yi think." They would not say " At what time " but " At which hour," etc. In many places aUo where we would usa wliat substantively, the Korean uses it adjectively and vice-versa. 278 PBONOUNS. Chap. IV. \ III. Sec. 2. (a.) Used substantively,— *?•$}, n'-'&Ti- (6.) Used adjectively,— f- £ . 4. What kind of, what sort of,— QQ. Who invented the tele- *f-7\ *d*l-ir t°l t% graph ? Jx ? Of whom have you learned o] #j A?*l ^71] ^l^Ji? hitherto? With whom are you liv- 3f.=f- ~$3L X*1 Slii? ing? Whose shoes are those ? ^ -Si rl tlM5 ? Whose are those apples ? ts] -f-^- £1 7M.&.? 2 (a). Which do you like best ? $J^ 7}£ ^."f" S.SJ- f A? Which of these two books t] j=, QJfrv,] s]\- 7\X\ was printed last ? af v+3H «^4i? Which shall I do first? $}£ ^ M)7> ^-*1 1f 2 (6). Which road shall I take ? ^ V ^i. ?H5l^? Which carpenter shall I *] V ^r^rS -S.^ ^I5l?r ? call? In which room did you put What is the name of this o] -^ ^ £J :£ e>] -f-*^A|.&? fish ? What is the name of the a tfQ vj-Jr •=] ^]^t>] place where they get that -r^-M A ? coal? What do they call the river of-jE. t>|^^{= -jj- &J:£o| this side of Mapo ? Jf. frj a| e}- jl •§■_& ? In what box [did you put it ? a. 7]§ frj V flj **] H 31 A.'1' 280 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. CnAr. V. Sec. 1. CHAPTER V. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Adjectives have been divided into two classes, qualify ing, and limiting, the latter have again been divided into articles, pronominal adjectives, and numerals. The few words necessary on articles have already been given, numerals and qualifying adjectives have in part been treated in Part I., and a few additional bints will be given later. There remain therefore for our consideration in this place, pronominal adjectives, or adjectives that are sometimes used to take the place of nouns. Among these ■ are — All Either Neither Such. Any Few One Same. Both Many Several That. Each Much Some This etc. In the following selection of these words it will be noticed that some not commonly called pronominal adjectives are given. This is because at times they do act as such and take the place of nouns. ^Sec. 1. — This, that, such. 1 This:— (a.) Used substantively — &] 7$ . (6.) Used adjectively — 1>], Chap. V. Sec. 1. PKONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 281 2 That:.— (a.) Used substantively — 3.^J, tf7i- (b.) Used adjectively — a., tsj. 3 Such:— (a.) "Like this"— t>]Q. (b.) "Like that"— j ^j^- •tf, -g{7£, r^ej, etc. are used of things near or in sight. XL. -Lid, a.^1, etc. are used of things more or less remote or out of sight. Followed by an adjective, and in certain other places where the adverbial form appeals to the Korean, as more proper than the adjective form, the adverbial forms of °1*3> a^l, t^e} are used. " Such " used substantively, will be rendered by tbe adjective form with £j, where it refers to a thing, and with 6] or A]-;| when referring to a person. Note— The remarks made about the use of the plural ending, H in the chapter on nouns in Part I. 46 ff. apply equally here, and to all pronouns. Unless then ambiguity would exist without this postposi tion, we will be safe in omitting it, and in translating " these," " those," etc., as though they were " this," " that." In fact it may be said, that not only are we safe in omitting them, but that we would not be speaking true Korean in using them. In the use of the adjectival forms, we would remind the student that in Korean, there is no agree ment either in case or number between the adjective, and its noun. It will also be noticed, that in some places where we would use "this" with a noun, the Koreans would use a noun in which " this " is implied. 1. (a). Is this a mosquito bite, or a 6J7-{/-] 3.^] 7\ -^r^iL • flea bite? »|^.c] *^iL? This is neither colloquial £>]7-|>*| ^1^3E 6T"SiL nor book language. -ft J? 5. 6HA' 282 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. CnAr. V. Sec. 1. This is neither cast iron nor *]?]*] *rQ 3t 'Hi- brass. ^-^H 6HA- Have you any silk exactly ^^| °1 53*1- ^ X i£ like this? ^7r 51 4i? These are much better than t>] ^f 6| s^ a} ^ j£-e]- yours. ^1-T" !£•£.• Do your trees yield as much s.% S\ S^-^^ *>] 6] ?A 4 fruit as these? X*i tt*! ^A? 1. (6). I have not even yet finish- t>] *$, *} 2j X "^ r%r ed this book. Ji$tA- I want something to put e] # *fr-£ a| f 4 this water in. *f*lA- This house is too large for 6] ^ 61 1? ^ 71] *-1 Jf- you. ai. This is the best day we JL^fl 1} ft^l AS ^61 have had in a long while. -cfl^ 5.4i. This year we have had a -§- tlfe t\^ ^-4h *£-£ bad rice harvest. Sj $Jii. In these days Koreans are *>]/$• e>]k S.'Sl Al"f 61 beginning to regard all -£ /fl tf -§■ ^ t)| a the world as brothers. ^6]u: 7j-£ *]*); "§"-£. These apples are all bad. t>] -f-iJ- t\ ^^ii. 2. (a). What's that (not seen) ? a 7} a] -f-*] A] A ? You wont need as much as a *}U ^t*I ^1 6d 2jA. that. That is just right. 3-7^] 4= ^5^. Put these in the box and «>j7l& ft] 4*1] tj 3. CuAr. V. Sec. 1. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 283 those in the drawer. . ^ j\ £ ^ $" # *"1 What machine is that ? ^7} A] Jf£ ^]*)|A? 2. (6). Have you read that book? -L *4 ^ b] -i$t4s. ? You had better not eat too a 4^fe H^ 1t*I *f*l many of those cakes. oj-^r 7}A| S.5l4i. I have never met either of a A}f .£. -=f «]■ 5}\f those two men. r^7]-^^.. Do you know how long -^ ^ t>] Such fine weather as this *>]s|7l) _s.;g. |JjJ S^aJ is common in Korea. ;£. "§".£.• 8(&). How did you make such a &} «j ff\ •$ 7] **| a. *£ mistake? "sl-frl "§"$j4i? Nobody but a fool would uf <*+ e] ^ «| b: i U say such a thing. ^*$"fc; Af5 61 ^jii- Why do you always make %] ^i*^*] -?•■§ ^-§- such a disagreeable face "§"e]- "$^ .x^J #■§■■§• when you are told to do *fl V H= ? any thing ? At such a time one does'nt a^j ^)Jfe $d'e1^] "t^6)1 know what is best to do. S.^*] 3. ? 5} £.. Such talk as that, does more a^i ^"-^ SS^j e] jL^l" harm than good. t§7\ "Q£.- Why do old Japanese ships 6J.5L \j\\Z& \»] fe $| J1#«>1 have such high sterns ? :xej ^fJx? ' Sec. 2. — Either, neither, roth. There is no one word in Korean exactly equivalent to any one of these terms and they can only be rendered by the use of several words. Where it is cither or neither of two, if this idea is to be expressed, ~g--f-*^|, (among two) with or without one of the demonstrative pronouns 6),;x> or T=j , must be used in addition to the word used to render either or neither, as the case may be. Where it is of several, •%**] with one or other of the demonstrative pronouns is necessary. For example the Korean would not say, " Will either of these do? " but " Of these two, will one do?" "For the rendering then of "either" neither " and " both " we obtain the following rules. Chap. V. Sec. 2. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 285 1. Either:— (a.) Signifying, one;—- f-f-«ij fM". OT if-f-*1! with 7/j preceded by the relative participle with or without "§"vf. (b.) "One or the other," or " both ;—- § -§• «*] with ftj-SM- of persons, and with b}S.^ of things, or b}3. with the name of the things repeated, 2. Neither, or Either, with the negative: — The same as No. 1, a. and 6. with the negative, or 6|-S3t with negative may be used. Note. — Where it is of several, of course, 5 will not be used. 3. Both *&S1 0] • «j=, with the noun or its equivalent repeated. 1. (a). Is either of these pencils <4£ S$Sj 7] yours ? Will either of the se suit "e nit. :*3 you? Is either of those men-of- a ^ ^ ifij-*,1|l iTv-|':ci- war an iron-clad ? -e| 7j-^ «>1 AH $l7r <* Did either of your sons 3.^ ^^ #^"w) 61 xt**l come here yesterday ? ^ i]. oj 3] ^ ^ V H 1. (6). Either of those will do, a if-jr^l b\S. 7]*]tf- hand me one please. &V}*\ H "^H" ^ ■?■.£.• Either of those sticks would a -f- ^"Elt6) ■§■«*] 6|- CI be strong enough. 7} A] vj- y >rj e>] ^ •TA- 286 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Chap. V. Sec. . Either way will do. t>\5.Z\f\M £.91 &■ You will find that character a. -#^ -r ^rd it**] in either dictionary. *>\3. ^d^^H" # 2. Neither of those pens is o] ^f- ^f-«] f M"H ^ good for anything. ^ ^J4i- I think neither of those a ■?■ ^ "f^l A^r^r houses belongs to Mr. t>\3. i\*\*\ tM^^I Kirn now. ?J 6>M "f 6r.£-- I hope neither of you is ^ ^-g- f*tf 61S£ wounded. 5!;*]*1 tf?H ^4-5- Does'nt either of these colors ft] -f- ^Hr61] ?* 5!"u: suit you? ^ fijii? You must not touch either t>] -f- *l 6]-S. T^IM- of these books. g.*l*l U"6}^ d£?}l£. You cannot trust either of a ^ Aff -§- 3. Both of my flower pots fell M] ^ g- &1 -§• -c\ &%. off the shelf and were <*} M V ^ *| 4 -f ^ broken. ^4i- Please lend me both, for a -f -c> Xf# ^^ •f-^li-- few moments. Chap. V. Sec. ?>. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 287 You must certainly do both. -|| -c} ^k^Y^k *$" *3 b\ These ornaments (for the t] 2c^|"*f it ^\ ^-f- person) are both beautiful. "f"JL- My parents both died while ^-S. ^^161 M- a13iil I was a child. x}e>*] 2£e|-7].>^4«. Bring both the hammer and *J2E^1 *$"jl -^ "^jL £ the screw driver. -c} j\x] ^.v^e]-. Have you looked in both -^ ^. «Jj e>| Sec. 3. — Each. 1. Signifying every one individually "each1' may be rendered by tjj--c]- or 2}-. 2. Signifying apiece — -5J or -$"vf^}. nj'-c]- and <*] follow the noun while ZJ- precedes it. Note. — Frequently Koreans use " each " twice and sometimes oftener, in the same sentence, where we would use it but once. For example where we would fay, " I will take three of each sort," the Korean would be very apt to Fay, " Of each sort, I will take three each." We would note also, that the distinction made above cannot be rigidly adhered to; and as in English "each" and "every" are at times interchangeable, so "^H^j and Drcr, niay at times be used, the one for the other. 3. Each other:— A^. 1. Each student lives by him /^2 v\ c\ ZJ- ZJ- 7] $ self. -$".£.• 288 PEONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. C"AP- V- Sec' 3" Each soldier had on a dif- ^ «1 of-cf -cj-g "3:-4-§: ferent uniform. ^9Jji. Each man does as he likes. Zj- Af f *fl ^ | ^ S. Each came up in turn and Zj -*}|re| ^eflSl tytf received his share. *fl ^--fr ^§tii- Each horse has its own Zf |d] *1| ofj=L 5J&. groom. Each child recited in turn. Zj- & tl 35^1 3. £!§}£• 2. Give one to each child. 51?! # "sH"^ -?•.£•• Put a spoonful of tea in &| S}^61! *} $ -fr?]-^ each of these cups. m A] ^ *j e}-. Put a stamp on each of e>] ^!*l**] $1*1 "§"4^ these letters, and mail %*\3L -f -3]^**] -r them. H 4- I'll take three of each sort. Zj *] AS ^4| 7r*l 51 A. These lamps have two e>] ^ ^W]^ «-&| -f*] chimneys each. $1^.- Give each man three of Zj A}f Sj 71] Zj-^j.S.3. each kind. /4|aj ^-^b}-. You must put three hinges Zj- -g «*] Zj *} . /jj AJ -f- on each door. °] ty ^5l4i- Those two men hate each a. -r Al§ >Ms=. "141 other like cats and dogs. f 7] "§ jL^c-I*}- 7l| Citap. V. Sec. 4. PEONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. , 289 Men should help each other *tS-fe n ti ^s. /-is all they can. H«* **WA- Those two men love each a * **S « X*! other like brothers. *1£ *^-*\£. Sec 4.- — Some. As was remarked in Part. I. 66 ff the Korean interroga- tives serve equally as well for indefinite pronouns, and hence we get the following rules for rendering " some." 1 .Somebody — ^fj}, y?- 2 Something— ¥•$$. 3 Some one of a particular group : — Here the " some " is omitted, and " one " only is translated by "$"vf • 4 When it represents indefinite designation and is equivalent to ' a certain : " — 5j^. 5 Signifying a part ox portion — jot =3). "Some... some " becomes S...3E or s.^-S.^- 6 Signifying an indefinite quantity : — {a.) Used as a substantive — it can only be rendered by some such word as i§. or S. 3) b: • (b.) Used as an adjective — it is not rendered. 7 " Some more " ; — (a.) In addition — ^ . (6.) Left-$Jt]6H2. * 1. Somebody is knocking at T=-7r ■$:■££ ■^■1? ^l-fi. the door. I am positive somebody t%^ -^7]- ^^.7]^ 6h5t.- has told it. 290 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Chat. V. Sm 4* Somebody must go to Seoul i ^ *}*1«1 ir7\ M^^ to-day to get that money. £.£ ^"Y &3!^' Somebody came to see you iS A^61] "T^r- this afternoon, but refused jL8| ^ °fb: °i^ to leave his card. tM'S -feJM f5JA- 2. You had better plant some- ^3) Jf $J ^A^ 5.2J&- thing here. Something fell down and. £.£ «-]• § «| A] *-g- woke me up at about four ^»M *H *M v+I this morning. '''ISI^- Have you not put something ^M-feS -¥"5d- 61 AJ# heavy in this drawer? #«] 6H ^VM1? Have you not dropped some- Jp.$J Af*]*] *>H fSJ^x? thing ? 3. Can you spare me some one «>] ■f-^l ~$tf- "£ ■§"+■ of these? $l4i? Will not some one of the *>] %\\ $lte £^ f-*l coolies from this neigh- "$"v}- ^j~ d& 31 -& V. H borhooddo? 51 ?r? Some scholar has written a $J*1 -gr^ol A^ ^61H" history in about fifty S^&'MI*!^- volumes. Some general with but two JJiJI *fl*M #£*] 61 # or three hundred soldiers SJ °J ^tt 7lV^|ja. defeated the Chinese army ^^ i£*I 6]J1$J^- last year. Chap. V. Sec. 4. PEONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 291 5. Some tables have three legs. /I) -c e| ^3£ 51 ^. Some people sympathize aj-^- JQ e*r Aj-^x^ with England, and some 5Jji 6]-Bf-Af sq c^ with Kussia. AfJlH 51 Ji- Some said "go," and some 7ref*r AffS 51 .a 7r7">] said " don't go." *fvf fe 4f S $H 4:. Some among those soldiers a. "*g «] ^-61] Jj^Joj were cavalry. -e] 3f 5J3J .a . .Some of the English kings *>§^ vj-g- ^-6i] -e]ej*c were wise men. "J'S^L 6l7}- 51'MA- Most blind men are igno- ^r «Jj Af § o] 74 jM -d- rant, but some are cele- -^J -^r^nf-jr 3.^**] bra ted scholars. -t1^ £ "S'^SfS 51 4i- Some of the most celebrated t<|] &J -^- °| * Ar « * «h] men have been blind. ^ rfc^X 5IAl4i. Make some white and some «j ef Jr $\ 71) -§■ jj. ^ 3j V black. ^t,] -§- ^ej.. Some of them are better a-f-^] v-J-^. ;j}t£ 51 A. than others. I keep some of my letters, Hj ^J*] ^-61| ■ejsfjr -^ but most of them I burn -f-vf- y]^ t|- -£|-^.£. up. Soung Yongi put some in ^Sffe &•§-«>] 7f *4*J the bookcase and the rest dj.^) tjij ^^^Ife Tfl are still in the box. ds. 6. (6). I want to embroider some "^^l 4rl Jt2 ^Jv silk. Tell the cook to make some -^4- "^ 2. Things :— (a.) Something — ^^J or -¥•-* with a noun, or the relative participle with 7^j. Negatively — the same with the negative. (6.) Anything whatever, no matter what — *}£. 7-| A] uf , ^3.7] AjeJ-H, -^A]*!*!. or ^f-^ followed by ■ej *] . Negatively — by the same with the negative, except that t>}3L7]*]tf- becomes *}3. 7&S.. This same negative form is very emphatically rendered by the use of the relative participle with :jj"§"v).;£ ^4:. 3. One or more, any at all : — (a.) In affirmative sentences— not rendered. (6.) In negative sentences, signifying none at all — 3LH*JE. or *§"x4H w^n ^e negative. i. Any more :— (a.) In affirmative sentences — $jti or T!i- (b.) In negative sentences ^ with the negative. 1. (a). Is there anybody in the tytx] ^y\ §J^.v room ? Did anyone ever attempt ^w] Jf.7]. /•]*J"§'$3 J« ? it before ? Did not anyone say any- ^7}- b\ 3. t2 b\ H thing to you about it ? "$"$"elH5'l7l-? If anybody should call, say Jp7J- ^J-/^ ^tTj^ •£ I can't see them. -&"c?Jt *$"64^ 294 PE0N0M1NAL ADJECTIVES. Chap. V. Sec. 5. Cannot anyone translate t>] 7]§ *&<$ 161 ^^.? this? 1. (6). Please call anyone of the J or soldiers. foj ** *M*1 M I or That's a thing that any a. l\ -§ 6> S 5 "§! H* boy ought to know. ^ 7^ -*] St. Anybody who knows On- Jp^^*] ^i^r 6}"fe: *!■ muu can read that. § ,£. a. 7} -§ tj-"*! rl ii. Is'nt there any one who ^I3E 7£ Aj-g 'U-^VH can go? 547]-? There is'nt anybody who $] &]- H S tT-3*- AJ"fe lives without sin. o]7|. ^"vfJt -^Jji- Nobody came to see me ^ 3J^ *j6i| 6]-.2.H. $f while I was sick. £7\ «>]-v) ^-^^i. 2. (a). Is there anything in my Mj *£<*] -?-^A| ,= 3} it? eye? Did Mr. Kim send any- Q /J\ ty o| ifl fl] Jft. £J thing to me ? .S. ^ & ""^ H 51 T\ ? Have you any business to -^--§ -£ £J 51 4i '^ attend to? Did Mr. Yi tell you any ^j>M# ^£ i*-& ^f news? ^HSW Chap. V. Sec. 5. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 295 I wish these boxes had 6] =fl]^- -^^J Q s.^ nothing in them. A]^J 5.5J4t- Did you give anything ? JJJ.&J ^. &J^ V H 51^ '^ Did you say you had no- "J |J ^-ej\2. ■§" $J V ^ ? thing to do ? 2. (6). One can accomplish almost ^ 6] 5J X\ ^ ^ aj t>j. ja any thing if he is ambi- 7$ 2 ^41 "tf" .&• tious. Any soft wood will do. J^-* v|.,2,-^;?;| 3i*$"^ Any one of those colors will ^ ^ZJ-W] e>] «I -f- <*]$>; do. *>} 3. 7?*] vf f ^ Give me any one of these a. *]•;§• -§■ «) &J-.S, 7-{ >*j cups. efS fM- t^JL- Not any one of these toys t>] ^ej- j].&. <§-tf) & $J will please the children. ^E61) 3lb:3j "^^-fS There was nothing there 7]^/^ vf ^. $}•-§-£ 7J& that I liked. &J-J2. ^j£ ^-y^. 8." (a). Are there any Chinese a^ ^$] ^I^7J- ^.^ A <• characters in that book ? Are there any men-of-war ^lH'.S.*1] ^l-g- i?"^ 51;&,? in Chemulpo now ? Are there any American -^ Note.— <>\3. is more emphatic than ^f^-. There are also many other ways of expressing these same ideas by a change in the form of the sentence, but enough are given here for all practical purposes. 1. (a.) Everybody expected war. Jf =f- t=J *] *\ £ t] ;g -§■ In India everybody has to tl S ^" *^] fe *r =f- ^ *] go to the mountains in m **] -fttfj ^^^h-^ summer. ^J4i. One ought to be polite to -ft 7^*] ^^^^a]: f everybody. 7]*}Sl- 1. (b). Everybody can go to see the &r.2.ef-3E ^fl^fr^-g- -£L51 President. y£Jt7\ 5$4i. Every Jew had to learn a -^-c)J *]■;§.£. &}-.2.eJ-;£ trade. qq \ _g. *] £ ^j Every Korean must have a 5_Aj Arjf-£: 6}\E.e}-;H 298 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Chap. V. Si:c. 6. They send every one to the &j\2.e];£ * ^*i| JL1^^ same prison. 1. (c). Please make every one sit -<=]- Q fl] ~$ />]£.. down. When I opened the door, M]7f ^ Si^- 3.5. 6>*j everybody said "You H^A*! ^r^- *^* must not come in yet," Si"6!"- The weather was bad and Q3\7\- Si^-S-H ^ «] 54 every one in our house fe; ^rSII6! -E.3E ^^ took cold. S.^j4». 2. (a). Some people think that ^^ <*]£*] -c} 7§±, ^-g- everything came into *>}}£ *>]7\- 5Jix- existence of itself. Have you enough of ;every- Jr*^X|',ti*l ^ *& -*?*1 thing, to last till you get ^.7]y\ t} ^ f 3S V H= ? to Pyeng Yang ? It seems to me you always \\ i7!6>l if-£r -?-6;)Al find fault with everything. ^*1 ^J^tfe 3.® 2. (6). You seem to think you know -g-^ b}37^]9\S. 6)"b: everything. % Hfe -2.^ £>].£.. In a little while the Japa- -$ o] ^^ A>f 6] cf.2. nese will be able to make 7\ /-] ^\S. £ 1 2J&. everything. That baby wants every- a i>]z\ Stlfe: JJLu: thing he sees. . *)}3. 7r*l3. ^*J "$".£.• Chap. V. Sec. 7. PKONOMINAL. ADJECTIVES. 299 You must'nt give the baby *t>}7] S]71] ^^^I^i^] everything he wants. ^^fk^flS ^ -^*I They can teach everything ^■^^•^^1^ b}3.7]A] at the government college. efx -7 H *} ^.jjj j. . 2. (c). Leave everything as it is. «]• .x^s -fi- Every thing in the house *J Note.— Sometimes with a relative clause, the repetition of the word will take the place of JJ. 3 No:— " (a.) Not any — negative of verb. * N. B. In this sentence it would not do to say simply J?-&1 *| They looked at one another ^3. «T -2.7lfe "$"»+ but nobody said a word. ofJllH ^ t"*l BH Nobody can sit up till after *}*}*} ^••f *?*1 *}*1 twelve o'clock every- <&3. 6>§ ^^ ^^~ night and get up early H^W^ *H 61 ^If*! every morning without ^lfe;6l SS^l ^Jii- breaking down. Are none of you wet ? &K2.H £ *1 £ »1 ^ £. ? Nobody expected peace so ^££ a^ffl 41 6] ^l"^l soon. « -£#&■ 2. The house caught fire, but *] «*] -£t>l ^*1»+ H7J& nothing was burnt. ^J4i- I took the cover off, and ^-7j-§: $H *4- *f£ looked in, and there was 3J5I ^^^i 6)t:l"- nothing there. None of those boats is very t=} «J -§■**]' "2^4^ A^ § fast. ^I7r 6JJi- He showed me several, but Mf 71] He1^ ^iS^uj-Js none of them suited me. "?E«*1 5lfe 7^ ^Ji. 3. («). I've had no fire all day. .£.£ ^-^ #«>] a}*}^. Chap. V. Sec. 8. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 301 Are there no snakes in this t>] -=^ >!l #-£• ^i? neighborhood ? I found no mistakes in the -#*H Q% "g^ ■£ essay. *]-^^x- 3. (b). Do you say there is no 2/8 ""Ik XS*! .^-^7r kerosene in Korea ? <$ ^ ^ 6j ^ ? Are you sure there are no 3.3]*$ #<*! ^ ^ -2.^1 7r mosquitoes in the net ? "£ v} »] 2 ^} fe ^ .Are there no strawberries in Jj-^ *l] *| 7l "§" «4S ^j 4i ? the garden ? Is there ro one in this room t>] -$ **} ^ Aff 3E^] who will go ? 4. We have no more pears but Vl fe ^ ^ £. H- #-c- S.^- we have some very nice 7-fA] ^I^i* persimmons. We have no more red ones, ^^- 7|& "^ ^^.^ ^-c- but have some black ones. 7J& S1!^- I believe I have no more % JJJ*] ^ ^| -$£_■ letters to write. Sec. 8. — All. 1 Signifying everyone, the whole number, or quantity — .2.H, ■>=?. 2 Signifying the whole duration or extent,— -£, -&%, g, £, or *c\. 302 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVE. Chap. V. Sec. 8. 3 Signifying the last of a thing,— *£ or Q may be used. -&> ^> uL precede their nouns, the rest follow. 1. You had better throw these e] 7& «]■ v|] &} U ^j vd all away. 5.^3 &.- These letters are all for t>] ^^Ife 3.S. "l^AS America. 7\}z 7]A]£l- The cherry blossoms must ^H-^. *£% SH ^^ have fallen off by now. ^ 'H £1 *1 A- Tut all those needles in the a H}£-|- £E <*;£# box on the shelf. -fj] $Jb: ?■)]<*] ^h Take out all those books, ?•)] 4«] 5Jfe *4-§: ^ and arrange them well, Ht>] ^^tf ^xi*^\ in sets, on the book shelves. ^J-fr x}x\ *£ -Wftj-ef. The hoop broke, and every ^ «J7|- •e*J^>H #"1 bit of the water ran out. ^J"^6^.*.- 2. I shall probably be in Seoul t>] $. 74 -g. %.<&*. <&)-§• all this winter. 5 From Nam San, they say ^>tM ^-l^l 7^ «t almost all of Seoul can be MJ^jL ~$£l seen. There was not a man in all ^Jig- •§•«! £]^ *rf-§: the village that had ever -g. t>| 7]. -§"14 H ^ * * seen a foreigner. "cj *>] "cf*. CiiAr. V. Sec. 9. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVE. 303 Mr. Song has travelled over ^-/^ #.£. 7]°\ /M]7fl ig -c\ nearly all the world. « i-i *. 3. Is this all the tea there is? x}7\. t>] •«£ t>]^ ? Is this all the flour there is ? |J 7J-S.71- &) ^£ '. 61 A ? Sec. 9. — Several. 1 Number : — (a.) Quite a number, — <*} 3f in its various forms. (b.) An indefinite number, — 5j. 2 Kind:-,*} *),*}>*} e]S, ZJ-. The distinction made above between o^a^ and 3J, is not always adhered to by Koreans. The difficulty with «»}SJ for "several," is that it may mean a large number of almost indefinite proportion, but this is generally expressed, by the strong stress or emphasis, laid upon the word. The English word "several" may also be rendered by the Korean words W%, (two, three, four) Al^t}^ (three, four, five.) 1. (a). There are several pencils in 6] b}^l ^. 1. if). We met a coolie just now *]-iJ- 3j .S.^0! 7\x]ji. carrying several parcels. 7ru: ^£ ^5 SJii"^- He took several boxes to the £.£ *}% "#6.3. ^ =fl|i river this morning . 7\ *1 % A • We met several pack ponies -3-3. ^^ ^ ^-4- •^-°l' laden with cash, on the 3j 5J^4i. road. There seem to be several :x 7lf -f-^] 33*1 *1fe lame ones among these JsL^&l.fi.. dogs. i 2. You have several (kinds) ^£| i\Q<*] S.-^: ^Al beautiful flowers in your -^j^J6] $!&■• garden. Birds build their nests in *\\ y f Zf fi^jftg ji^- several ways. 7}»J "f; *|.£.. At this hotel, they have t>] -^l}**]^: ^.aj e>] *1*J several kinds of food. e>]g. %$,&.■ Koreans wear garments of 3,^ All-c- £§ tyty several colors. e>] 3. ^Jt- Sec. 10.— Few. 1 Few (not many)— *};£, ^t^l tt4i> which in Korean are verbs, and in rendering few can only be used as predicates. Note. — To be with a few is rendered in the fame way. 2 A few (a small number) — ]5j or by some indefinite number as -r^i ^, or A} ^} ^|5!- The particle -f- (number) prefixed to Sinico-Korean words also conveys this idea. Chai\ V. Sec. 11. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 305 Few foreigners speak Ko- 5.^1 ^"-§- ^fr^fe: Q^ rean well. A}§ t>] *}.£.. There were only a few there t>] xfl «J 61} -)\ jj Aff e>| last night, but we had a *?£ *l 6H 4 ^ "g good time. $t&- There were only a few sol- n|-3f ^ ^ j^tf) ^ "?l7f diers at the American of *l b\ H "§" 53 33 legation, but they were TfJ-jr «]■ -§• *) i>" $•! A] H all brave, and we were 7^^| ^J>*JJi. not afraid. 2- Go to the garden and bring $]-^{ 1 The rest of— *>]^. 2 Not the same, separate— -e]- § , or by the adverb f£ H . 3 Besides— *>]^J, »1$M- 4 One more in addition — «| , "^M-^- 5 The other one of two— f vf, >fif *4> ^5 3J> or by a change in the form of the sentence. "The one.. .the other "— 1rH-$ — lTvT'4b" G People generally as contrasted with one's self— ^ . 7 Again— /»£, -eMl- 1. See whether the other chil- ©]^ §tl#H 14 "SH" dren don't want some too. Jt b\ 9\. Please tell the others to *]Si\ *rf ^«|3E Si come in too. JL*^ "$&.• Are the other boxes the same *]$\ tN|53L 3.7]7\ Bl2J size as this? X4i? The other ones will be done 6]^ 7l£ "SI St "fr^ in a month. _ $15!4i. CnAr. V. Sec. 12. PEONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 307 I'll take another newspaper. t>]$] -Jl^*! "S Jt^Ti-. You had better take these &|£| $J ^ .&. ^ $^-§- coolies, you may not be J^i\. &J X] H 6]#-& able to get the others. ^*r 7JAJ S^' Ji- 2. . I came by another road. «]■« tjj^ ^j,. That's another matter. ^.Tf-fe r]"g H6lA- Another color would pro- «]■§ *J}*| s3^ *A- bably be better. As I am a Korean I cannot £.Q /.]. g c] vj f£ H fe sit down in any other o£5J J^y]. *Jj.. way. He really had another a. Af- § o| .AJ >*]=.&. -d- « : reason for going. $J &| 51^^ #?J -*].£.. 3. I have not another cash. ftl^t-3]fe £§X ^iir- Is'nt there another pencil in i^J*}- =£•«) ^i^g&l o] 7-T that drawer? «V^| *},«.? If you intend to study ^H} j§ ^li^l2}1^! 61$J Chinese you must get -*! ^ -§• 5J *>] fy -£~%. another teacher, (besides "§\5.. the present one). ■ 4. This bookcase is a little »| *[*ft>| 3£-3x. -^AH small, I'll have to get -=|:7j-£ "^vf ^i ^6]«>1: another. ~$?3&.. It will be all right even -f-jg -§-vf -e] ^ A] 7:] though you don't put on &|-v] -^<^S S.^J'4x- another stamp. 308 pronominal ADJECTIVES. Chap. V. Sec. 12- Please order me another iL-f^I^ •%: £ ^ ^ copy, of the O Ryun Sfi^ ti> Haing Sil. Bring me another pencil. *i^J ^M-"15! jm&rfv}-. Bring me another cake of ^ "£*<£ c1 7r*1.£.- ink. 5. Where is the other ham- 5f*| /£ *M- M*l $1 mer? VM=? This is too soft you had o]7]& ^ Sil^M *t5 better take the other one. 7}-t 7r^7Ml5.- I gave one to Soun Pogi f 4£ ^-^M -^ "*" *+ and one to Eung Whani. £ -g-^<>l ^5i4i- I like this house best, but *J.£. *^*\i\r 5.3>r e^fe prefer the other location. "^^T7!- B.&- 6. Don't give too much credit > S] ^ •§ t=J ^ -^ *l to what others say. ^*1 °1".£.- I don't know what others V^. ^jfl] /& Zj- f *!*] think, and I don't care. 3L = vf t^ *]•!" tl*l ^7*1*1 ^41. 7. The news has just arrived, a£ e>] n| oj c|-*r 4it£ 3J- of another victory. ■/] ^ £<- ii- Did Mr. Pak say that if he ^ # ^ 61 * ^r -ftf , went to Fusan he would 7]-^ *£ /■} ■§■ .!=. ^S-SL send another telegram to 'tg^A f a ^ H 51 Seoul? 7r? Chap. V. Sec. 13. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 309 Sec. 13. — Same. 1. Not different— By the different parts of the verb X£. °r X~$Si. (io be alike). 2. Not two:— -£,£J. 1. Put the same quantity in all Zfr ^ ^] X*l M*| sf. the bottles. Those two boys are the a, -^ §■$] 3|7j. Y^.. same height. Is " Oltarago " the same as -f-xj-eJ-aiS}. ^-JieJ-aL^)- ' "Olsorago?" X*SVH§l7r? The meaning is the same, 4|£ X't'M- iz>S7r ■# but the letters are a little "§-Ji. different. Though you make them of XlE 7f#AS "^"Sj ^1 * the same material, make ^l"^^) S^e1ef- them of different colors. Are Buddhist temples all *| -51 *c «J t>) t^-g] -ej- built on the same general X&. <* plan ? I told them both the same -jf £] 7\] -c\- j£ g ^- _*. thing. ^i^^.. It is the same as last year's ^ y *§ Sj. X&- disease. 2. Were all these prepared by £>|7-{A] -c} * Af^o] Q the same man ? 7-f -MA ? Can't you two read out of "g *4 7r*l,a -§6] ^.j*] the same book ? ^.-^ \- vj: y 310 PllONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Chap. V. Sec. 14. Let us both stop at the £ ^*H #f %*]*h same hotel. Are you all from the same «f ^-ifr Arjf *>)£.'? town? Sec. 14— Much. 1 In affirmative sentences —the different parts of the verb ^t 4x- 2 In negative sentences— j^-"*! with the negative. 3 Too much— i-iJf-, s\%], with and without ^Jx. 4 So much— a.^fl] either alone, or with the verb ^t>h.. 5 How much— Qv}. About ' how much— ^JnJ-vf. Sometimes also another word such as tfl7H will be added. If it is desired to call especial attention to the price the word 7}- will be used. The Koreans use this word ^of in places where in English we would use simply how. 1. Is there much money in tsJ fl) **] ^ 'ft*! S^ 4t ? that box ? Was much rice burned up ^*1 #-§: 3**] ^3 61 during the drought last &*] "J.&.? year? Do they import much kero- *4-fr7> 5.^1 1?t *T i=.21 sene into Korea ? .£..£. ? Is there much fruit in Ko- 5. ■ft61] ^4 ^ii? rea? 2. I don't have much head- *\ v] st\.t] QS.*] &£.• ache. Chap. V. Sec. 14. PKONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 311 You have'nt taken much ■=*.*] ^7]^] $1 $]■*] M^l pains with your writing. ^H "^'5f'c?- I do not like Korean food ^7> 2.^ -s-*] 4*1 Sil very much. "$■*] 6J-H "$".£.• To tell the truth I do not ^-fe. 4*J 7rJL -$*] feel much like going. &ti». Do not drink too much. ■£ tj-^- «ij *] v}&. There is too much sugar in *]•**] Aj-^j-o] t}^. ^j.. this tea. You can not sleep if you *[•'§ vj-f. »J o.ijJ ^. drink too much tea. %\ JL- This is a little too much. °1 3d # ^-f- ?t4t. You must not spend too ^ vj-f. oj-*| a^*| ^ 6]-6): much money or you will -ft «>1 7r\f- ^igl J». soon be poor. 4. If you eat so much candy $J ae]fi] t}.fi.«J ^3'4i- you will be sick. I trust him so much that- 1 MJ7}- a'f a ^^] 5J.S.H would lend him whatever I^M-fe: ^3. ^^J ■?■ he should ask. 21 A- You need not take so much a. JQ*] A^l*1] .l^lflj pains with that letter. $} «£> 7^ ^J 4i. Do not drink so much -^ ^x^\fH ^t*I ^^1 wine. °FA' Do not put on so much /^ -L^\f^\ ^t*I ;4*1 coal. v\^- 312 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. CuAr. V. Sec. 15. How much for the lot? 2£^6] #*1 ^0KS.? How much did you give for t>] \?) § ^j uj- ^.jj. ^4^? those pears? About how much salt is e>| •§•<*] ^.j* ^[o)-vf there in this water ? S.5J .&,? How much vinegar did you ^.7r ^Jo}- >j $fccl\2. "§" say was left ? 5J ii ? About how long is that a. fl) Zj7]7r t)}7)| ^ box? o}vf £).£.? How much silk shall I get ? >g ^. ^ of Afej 5J71- ? How much is the annual ^-f*] SJl£ ^&J tp}J 71} income of the govern- &|n|-v}. sjj^v ment ? Sec. 15. — Many. The Koreans 'do not make the distinction between many and much, that we do. Sometimes it can be done by the interposition of the word -f- (number) and ^-7r 'Jtii, " the number is much " means " there are many." As a general rule however, the simple use of the verb ^i^. will answer all purposes and the context will tell whether it is quantity or number that is referred to. There is a dif ference between how much and how many. We find then the following rules. 1 In affirmative sentences — the different parts of the verb ^4« ; and in negative sentences — the same with the negative. '2 A good many — The word " good " is not rendered, *$£. alone is used. CHAr. V. Sec. 15. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 313 ; 3 A great many— ?j^ or tfltH etc- with *i£.. , The English phrase " a great deal " is also rendered in the same way. 4. Too many— vjJjS., ji}.*}, etc. with Q^., As was said with regard to " too much," tftj. may be omitted. 5 How many— 53 . About how many 34 *] vf . 1. Confucius has many dis- ^>£}r ^]^.7\ Q±. ciples. Many of the Americans n] -^ A} ^ t>] ^ ^. s have blue eyes. e>| 7J. Q^. Formerly there were not fc]^**] «>]■=$• $]3^] %7J many ironclads in the /ge>| Qk) ojjj. American navy. Many Korean flowers baVe 2./^ ■*£ s.^. -§J:M| vj-^r a very sweet odor. 7^ ^£4i. There are not many sheep 2.^*1) Most of you have heard this ^1^. "A% ^ 61^^ I suppose. ^3!^ A *§"-£.• Although some of them a. -fj- «] ^ ^ $ *| have not yet heen told, oj-vj ^fj SWM" most of them probably 7]^ «]■ ^* *^A- know it. I gave most of them five ^7\ 7\ S>\ «]• ^ ej= *] hundred cash each, but -£53*14 ^Mfe H^ some of them left early vf ^ ^1 H ^ *1 6> H and did not receive it. "^"$j4i. 2. HV^f ■■!«*! #a&? Which box holds the most ? i H V fl| tfl ^ tt*l Then I will have the most. | 7r*l-£-- I a 3j ia ^^i- mig ^*i Sec. 18. — Eiiough. In rendering the pronominal adjective, Enough, the various parts of the verbs y y "$".£., #•#"*" A. *} el"i. etc., verbs meaning, " to be sufficient " should properly be used. The Koreans, often, however, use other words or phrases to express the same idea. As, they will say "That much will do," "That is much" etc. When we use the word enough in English, we do not always have the idea of " sufficient for a purpose," we often mean "plenty," "a good deal," and the Koreans in Chap. V. Sec. 18. PEC-NOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 317 this respect are almost more exact than we. Remember ing these facts, we obtain the following rules. 1 Signifying a sufficiency, and without the verb " to he," either as simple adjective qualifying a noun, sub stantively, or as an adverb we may render " enough," by 2. To be enough— ^ ^ -$£_, ^4. -§-_£, ^j-bJ-^, [etc. or we can use a.^, (that only), or a^t# (that much) with the future of such a verb ^.S.. Negatively — the same with the negative, or a negative verb, as JjL-^-^.5. may be used. 3. To do a thing enough. (a) In affirmative sentences — the ^adverbial form of the verbs. {h.) In negative sentences — the same with the nega tive, or ^ without the negative. 4. Enough to, — future participle of verb, or fut. past. with ^t#, or 7& ; negatively, the same with the negative. *}Bh£. may be used. 1. Thanks, I've had enough &S&&. v}\£. *&*] ^$j£- already. How many nails shall I ^- 33 |j 7rx1 A^|$«i7r? bring? Bring enough. t}^"*] 7r*1 -5-H eh Be sure and put enough ^J^ *}^[ ^t}*I Mef"- sugar in. 2. Is there enough sugar? ^l-^6] ^ ^ "$"A? There is not quite enough t>] sj-^61) ^r^l S-w sugar in this cake. -r-# "§".£- 318 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. CHAP. V. Sec. 18. Is this enough ? t>] 7\*\ ^^A? Six inches will be wide *$<>] a^ *] ^^ •$$-■ enough. That's enough. 3, QW ■S^^. This won't be enough. *>] 7^ -*• 7%^7&&.- Was there enough coal ? >^tt y$ "^SJ^? 3. (a). We've walked enough now, *l-S--£ \3^*J -gr^f- "§"$! let's go back. *H S.9)- 3*1 rl"- You've read enough now, £1*1] ^^"*! £|$J*1H that will do. 3.^1 ^fjL As the coolies have rested ^J£ 3.x& 41 *d*l H *]M long enough, let us hurry #*] «]■. on. 3. (6). Haven't you had enough &H t}^*] °4*1 6H to eat yet? "§"$!£.? These potatoes are not boiled «>] #*I 6H 1 tfe enough yet. 5d4x- You have'nt taken enough 5f »>*J 1 ^Sdii- medicine yet. 4. Have. you enough stamps to 3. ^*1 ^QQg- -t^IS put on that letter? SJii? Have we coal enough to last ^1 ^ 4- >*?*! 4£ ^H till next spring ? $lii? Have you studied into the <%# 3.Q-& $ ttf -#*• subject enough to really iTSfA.? understand it ? CnAr. V. Sec. 18. PEOKOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 319 We had enough plums to **]*] *2t: n ^l? send some to all our m Ji^ tf-^ 5J friends. >&&■ We went to see them and f*j7r 2m *■* ^i instead of finding them •H -^ol a*i^ £i starving, we found they 4r -^-61 ^*"1 \l3d had enough rice, stored 51 »2 7]£ ty*A£-- away in bags to last them a whole month. 320 THE ADJECTIVE. Chap. VI. § I. CHAPTER VI. 1IIE ADJECTIVE. The previous chapter having treated of pronominal adjectives, there remains for us here, simply qualifying, or descriptive adjectives-. As will he seen in Part 1, Korean has but few true descriptive adjectives, and as a consequence, in translating English into Korean, adjectives must be variously rendered. 1 Used attributively — either a simple adjective will be used, or a past relative participle, which will then, as in English precede the noun it qualifies. 2 Used predicatively — the verbal form in the appro priate tense will be used. Note. — When two or more adjectives qualify the same word, they will be rendered by the stems of the adjectival verb with 3L, and the last only will be inflected. It must also be remembered that often where we use the attributive, the Korean uses the predicative form, and vice versa. ]. Tin's is a rainy day. _£.|s u|^ ^ 61A- Those are very pretty a 7& *]-f- jl"£ ^ *|j£. flowers. My sister has dark eyes. -f e] ^ ^ •£ ■£• s* o] ~£&. Chap. VI. |IL THE ADJECTIVE. 321 That is a large house. a y]X\ § ^6|j^. Koreans wear black hats 5.*f *\^£- 71 o ?\- and white coats. ^^ ^j .& y ^ You will need a thick over- ^7{.£ ^■S.^e) §! AJafc coafc- ^214.. Koreans like bright colors. 3_^ A}f ^-*- a) ^jj. That is a good fire. a ^ £:g -^l A. There is a large white J|-^J*1| * ^ji ^J 7H dog in the garden. 544.. He wears a heavy gold -^7-f-g- ^- ^-#4- ^4t. chain. My mother sent me a -fef &}n|.u|7}. * a ^j silver cup. ^ JiMjofi.. 2. Japanese are very small. ej.g. /.J-^ o| °. xjj. American women are tall. p]-5£ uj^oj 3J ^j^. The road was very muddy. ^^. tfl^H} §m^, Good coal is plentiful in s.^. /^ ^/g«H| d]-^. Korea. Those chairs are very a. j2.SJ fe ?|-f « strong, but they are very "§"3J offer «.^ 4.. heavy. That dress is very pretty. a £aJ "1^- SfA- That overcoat is thick, .a, =e.wj.6| x^j*. Most Korean colors are &Q #^-&- 7]# «]■ bn'ght. #*,7> 544.. That fire is good. a jgcj 5,4.. 322 the adjective. Chap. VI. ? II. Beo.1. That gold chain is heavy. a. i£ Ait ^"7$ £•• He was a tall, strong, hand- 3j 3.3L -f] M]jl ^$J-@- some man. A}<§ t>]$3;2». I had a large, gentle, and M]^ * ai & "§"jZ. fleet Chinese pony. A«g -f-^- | $[^4. § II.—COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. Sec 1. — The Comparative Degree. As was seen in Part I. in the chapter on adjectives, the idea of comparison is expressed largely by Koreans by the use of the simple positive. If there are a number, and it is desired to know which is the best, the Korean picking out simply one, and saying "This is good," will mean that it is the best. Similarly where there are only two " Of these two this is good " means, This is the better. There are however, cases where the expression of the compara tive or superlative degree is necessary to the sense. The comparative degree may be expressed by such words as ^ {more) y-^i (to be better), jfc]- (than)t$m (from) . In connection with the use of these words, we must always remember, that in Korean the governing word always follows the word it governs, and the £.-c\ or &i];^, will refer then to the word which precedes it and not to the word that follows. ^\ being an adverb, pre cedes the adjective or verb it qualifies, and we should re member that as a rule Koreans do not use ■*] with jt^J- or t>)| tf , either one alone, being sufficient. For the render ing of the English comparative degree we obtain then the following rules :— 1 Signifying in a greater degree — ">=-] preceding the ad jective or neuter verb. Cnxr. VI. I II. Sec. 1- THE ADJECTIVE. 323 2 When two different objects are compared : — (a ) When than is expressed — jj.-c]- or ej\jJ[ affixed to the noun having the quality in the lesser decree ; and the adjective in the positive. (b.) When than is not expressed— the postposition $r may be affixed to one or both of the nouns, or •f-*l) {among) may be used with the positive : or t^ may be affixed to the adjective. 3 The more — the more, marking the introduction of two correlative clauses, may be rendered into Korean, by ,$. ^.. 1. Would it not be well to tie a j£i§- 1>] ;§ -e\ "g -g e>] that bundle tighter ? ?] fe 7j*J s.*| <&*!! Ji? You must be more energetic. "°1 J?->?«} -§■ 6} a£ "$" #['.&. I wish you had waked me •# "^ ^J-^- *»J ^-"el ^ 5.31 a little earlier. *] £_. They are pretty well made, i?!)^"^^ -f-uj- .3S. but I wish they were a -e] ^$J*:-|iij s.^f *J j£.. little smaller. 2. (a). Fusan is hotter than Seoul, -^-tf6! tf% £.*} -eJ^J. The days are a good deal ujjf *l)jr -§]y\. ^.g. longer in summer than in _a.rI" ojjo. 7jjj_. winter. He is a good deal taller Q-t] j£c]- 3j ij]J^. 3^ than his wife. Chairs are easier than jin- ja-jf-e] £1^7-1 _£«]■ ?J rikshas. ~t>jb.- I am about three years MJ7J. ^.A$ _g«]- $v\ older than my brother. -7-"*) ji.. rt24 THE ADJECTIVE. Citir. VI. I "• ^C.2. 2. (6.) This is the prettier but the e>l 7}£ SfSi °Ks a other is the cheaper. 7^£ ^A- Of these two houses, the one a ^ 1H ^7V* nearer here is the higher. 3 »] t^A- Mine is the stronger horse. ^ I *>] f! ^1A- This is the better pen. 61 3tAl ^'4:- Mine was the greater fault. ^ *li§- ^ 3i- My sister is the prettier. -f ^1 nf^ "^ & "$"■£" The quicker the better. *I *# S.4- The more the better. tt^ * 5 S.A- The more one gets, the more ^i 51 -& ^# ^ ?V*l3- he wants. 'S &• The more I study, the less ^1^ £ ** 4*M I seem to myself to «l ^-24* * > -s- know. gEC, 2.— The superlative degree. As was noticed above, unless the sense requires it, Koreans do not employ the superlative, the positive answering all the purposes. If it is necessary, it may be rendered by the ordinal tqg (the first), prefixed to the adjective. Which is the best hotel in Mi-*) 61 V 4^61 ««S Seoul? 5.4i? The first plan seems to me ^-g- 7fla7> ^ *i*M the best. *HU SIX f A Chap. VI. \ II. Sec. 2. THE ADVERB. 325 He is the richest man in nj-^- CHAPTER VII. THE ADVERB. English adverbs may be rendered into Korean in various ways. Methods for forming adverbs from adjectives, with their various distinctions, may be found in the chapter on Adverbs, in the " Grammatical Notes." We have not here then to deal with these, but will simply consider how a few of the English adverbs of place, time, manner, etc., are rendered into Korean. § I.— ADVEEBS OF PLACE. To Korean primitive adverbs, the various postpositions can be affixed. Sec. 1. — Here. 1 Signifying this place — c^^J, 6|e|, e>|3J etc. 2 Signifying this neighborhood — *>l-2r^. 1. Here it is. t^^J §J_4.. Here is where I lost my c*};t|7j. xfl A|3| £J*J V watch. ej^J T=1J£.- Here is where Son Doli fell <$3\l\ -^#<>I "?M *t into the river. *|^ ^1iL- Chap. VII. ? I. Sec. 2. THE ADVERB. 327 Is the book you bought b]*)] ■$ *Jt>] &};»} $Ji'r) yesterday here ? Sou Dongi and Sou Jini -fr^f-o] -$-ji -fr^I«>| -^3, were here just now. ^-g- o^^| J^tf ^f-^.. Do they make pottery here ? <*} jj a^ Af jj ^-j. ? Do they generally drill the *g -"?] 1-|£- ttfn] aJ^jAf soldiers here ? 2.3} -$•£, ? Has'nt some one been writ- ^3) A} ^7). a^*| &}-vj inghere? '§'$Jil!, Bring it here ! 6] ej 7}-5^ j^v-] ej-. Come here with the baby ! a^HJ $ -§J 6] e| -c E} _& Tell Nomi to come here. -£t>] tjj t]v] A^f-ji. Then we must certainly ride a 3| "§" vj o^j|a} il: ^"H" in chairs from here. J2.5-& ^bY ^51 4i- How far is it from here to ^JjA^ ^^f-^ -^-Hj- A?A| the next hotel ? ^ oj-vf ^ £. ? '2. Are there any deer about oj -^7^'61| o|^t>]3E ^ here nowadays ? =£- oj 6J j» ? Do they not have a flower _£.!s ^- Sec. 2. — There. There— t^, -c^j, 7^, a©j. The difference be tween -cf and a noticed in Part I. If 72 extends to these adverbs. 328 THE ADVERB. CuAr. VII. \ I- Sec 3. There's a man with a dog tg^] % 7>*].B. l\^A and a gun. ^ 51 fe -4S 31 &• There have been fires there, ts| ^J -£^1 -£«>1 *1 + very many times this ^^^ !i^ii- year. I hope Mr. Chyeng will -fe] Sl.T\ A?*] *&/**& wait there till we come. 7]*]M 71^^ 2. Do they make much kan- y]^M 7i*& tt*I £^i? chang there? What kind of a ship is that t^j|>M c^fe: 7j*l ^^ they are building there ? *1 £l ? That's all right. Put it ^3|*| <&£. 7M Jctfr down there. -^A- I think most of the silk ^ *JZHfe »*M ^4 thread comes from there. ^ £.J£ 7^1 -M H" Sec. 3. — Where. 1 Interrogative— *]■$], *>}V:&- 2 Eelative — ■?! with relative participle. 3 Somewhere— a^l, 6^1^*1, ^^M- 4 Everywhere, wherever,— by «}*] with the relative participle ; by two negatives ; or by such words as ,*# (four sides), %%,^M etc- 5 Anywhere— t>>»-?m., ^S^*!. 6^1^^1- 6 Nowhere— *>|\2.-S]3t with negative. 1. Where does the washer- v}?& *] e] a^lA? woman live ? >CiiAr. VIL 1 1. Sec. THE ADVEEI3. ■ 329 Where was it that you met JL§ *>}%£**] Qtf^ 5J Mr. Kim this morning ? vf-ej -c|7]. frj -=].£.? Where is this flower pot t>] *gg e>] *>]i\7\- -^«>] cracked? ^4i? Where is Mr. Yi? ^]M^ b] t\ $Iii ? Where is the spoon I left on -# -f $] ^ -fr7r?J- ^ ■?] the table? 5^Jx? Where is the shirt I sent to •'g-^ ^.^ 4. *} $ 6} «] the wash ? 5$ .&, ? Where did you buy this c| -^/ft.6-. H^1>M -Si^ fish? Do you know where these c] j£3£7|. &J"S|A} 7>}^i grapes were grown ? *] &> v} 7]. ? Where's my dictionary gone? ^ ^^a] *} s] 2J-Jx? Where were you going frjxil nj.^- /s|j6i] 6i|-cj when I met you yester- y\\r ^ <>]&}_£? day? Where does the best rice tfly 5.^. ^0] t>]-c]tf come from ? vj._£_ ? 2. Is this where we take the ^J]7|. V] ^fe: "S|iL? boat? Hsre's where we have to ^Jj/^ ujg SJ^r -c]_g.. show our passports. Sit where you can hear. -g-^j -c]^, ^£a]_£.- 3. Is'nt there a bridge some- e]=J t^t;] 7j-«h] -e e} where on the river ? *j 4. ? 330 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. § I. Sec. 3. Are there not fireworks .§.£ «J-tf] a^] rl*] somewhere tc-night? "Hie. if if*! ^l4t? It seems to me I saw a a-j-c] ^7;] ^ 2J *\aJ second hand one at some You can travel anywhere in ">}J3£ ^*1 el-?^61! 5|"S*1 Japan without a pass- "Qt\ "SH 5! Al port. 6. He is nowhere in the house, ^^jfe- b}3. ^j5£ ^jii- There were no fish any- .£.;? tl?**]^ •^'»de>] where this morning. t>}3. "*l3c ^^^i- Foreigners could live no- ,fc|-5f ArS-e- ^*£ ty=f- where except in. the open Si] **J fe b\ 3. "?] H -5c ports. *r§tii- § II.— ADVEEBS OF TIME. Sec. 1. — Always. 1 Invariably— <& *1| *1 7;] . 2 Continually — -j? , i=.^.. 3 From the beginning — :£.%] with or without i*!^- A?*]. 4 At all times— f^, Q$. 5 Signifying all — x{. 1. Is June always rainy ? ^f-^-e- vi^I "^1*1 ^°F^. ? Does the king always have ^i?- ^b: ^1^! "^i^l i-rl a guard? ^ b] S]X\3L 51 J» ? I suppose the waves are M] ^2f^]fe §'19'e>l tl^l not always as high as . cj*] t>] ^^j 3=-?;} t>)-^ this. Hi. Do you always put out your ^]xi| r^;*] Aj^y-d] -f-7] light before you get in ^01] -g- £x£.? bed ? , ' " 332 THE ADVERB. Chap. VI I. § II. Sec. 1. 2. Are you always in pain ? 2=.^- xt3.£.'? Is the eaith always in mo- *# 61 e -§•"§" Si. ? tion ? Before you had the small- ^^Jjk. ^?1 ^i^lfe: #. pox weje you always ig &J "S'SJii? well? Is a bird always on her 41)7}. £j7| *J "fl.^lls nest when she is hatch- ^. ^ -L Ji-iJ-*}^!**] ing. her young ? 5j4i ? Is a sentinel always walk- &7% -^t] &:% ■§• A^] ing when he is on guard ? ^r ^s. ^jj*? 3. Have you always lived in ^e| tf-2r/J\ *]-iJ- A?*] Seoul? ^$ti.? The English have always t>^ Aj-f £%] A}% been good sailors. 2c. ^ ^ *§".£.• Have there always 'been £%] i-*^**] Jg3c7r §1 eight provinces in Korea? 3}4i? 4. God is always the same. ^^J^ ^J^ "£ S.^r It is always best to do right. -§fl] "$"ir 7j£ "f^ I am always glad to see Ji ' A} § JL 7l f # that man. «> #ii. He is always telling lies. ^J^ 7-J J ^ "tT.fi. That baby is always crying, a *>f^l ^J T^ "§" ""^ eI"- CuAr. VII. I II. Sec. 2. THE ADVERB. 333 Although the Koreans are ££-*£ Aj-j| $}<$ ^j- If .£.-<=] always eating rice, they ^L^X -#*| ^4i. never refuse it. Are crows always black? 7rnI"fl fe rT" ^4i ? Do mapoos always wear ^J-J*.^; cj- ^7^*1 Mjfc.? felt hats ? Sec. 2. — Whenever, 1 At whatever time — ^i^l1^^] or ^V^^I*!. 2 Every time— f^ v}^} -with the relative participle. The above may also be used, but this is the better. 1. I'll start whenever it is con- &■) V Aq) -el 7;] "^--*1^ venient to you. ^""jJ-S H<*] ^«43l4i. Can I borrow your dictionary t>]\- jqj ^7;] y\. *J u| whenever I send for it ? j^Mj tj} ;^rj _&. m a. We must go on board t>] V *qj cl 7;] ij] 7]. c ej whenever the ship comes ^7^ ^6]= "§"3J;&.- in. Be ready whenever Mr. Yi t>] V ^)| j^7f) Sj^t;] comes. ^IvM^ ^]y|-^-£^ ^. 2. Whenever I go to Che- *flijf.S. i\ \? n$ v\-c\ M]y\ mulpo it rains. .£..£.• He gets angry whenever he -g^ffr #1J trj-i;]- ^6] argues. *-f.£.. Every time I read it, it £]-§• &[ vi\-c\ -ej i>]z^ seems harder. 2.*J= 6lA> 334 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 3-5. I have a headache whenever ^ V] t} -§■ ^| *\ «f T smoke. -f^l 21 2- Sec. 3. — Generally, usually. Generally, usually— £. ft] , i$7% *IM> tM- What kind of a pen do you :£.«>] ^-* ^^ ^5. ? generally use ? Cholera generally comes in ^| % ft] :£. 6] ^ jf **] §1 4s.. the summer. We generally have tiffin at %■%■ £ A]«H] ^Q-%: one. *?} Jr • We generally take a walk -f-ej^ftl ^]7l] A^^l in the afternoon. "^^] "§*.£.• It generally rains a good ^ *|3J <*] iflts] U]7V deal in July. ft"*] iLA- We do not usually have 3.^ #^Mfe £ftl ■£" much snow in Southern ft*| .£.*] ft 4:,. Korea. Sec. 4. — Oeten, frequently. Often, frequently — 7\ £;, ^jL. I often have headache. -r^6] ^jL M-JL- Come and see me often, M^ £.7]^ 4i *f when you come to Seoul. JL*]JL- We often read together. 42. X*| ^it- Sec. 5. — Sometimes. 1 Occasionally, now and then, once in a while — 2 On certain occasions, at particular times— $J ft W|fe< 3 Indefinite, — ^ with relative participle. CiiAr. VII. I II. Sec. 5. THE ADVERB. 335 1. Even the wisest plans some- ^^ ^£ ^j^ gj.^ ejr]- times fail. -^ ^^-7]- 51 &.. Do you still go to the palace e>j J? t>] £ $J -c\=l -c)\ =g «h| sometimes ? ,= ej 7j._£_ v Why do you not let me hear #| ^j--^ ^AjS 6}-v| from you sometimes ? -$■_§, ? I meet him sometimes, but /*)j3. 3}x~J- x\ ^7^\\r not very often. Qi.- You may go occasionally. $ICH5" 01 <4 7fA- Once in a while I take a $lcl"w" )&Q *}A- nap in the day time. 2. Sometimes one does not ^J^i ^k $Jci^l "^"H6]1 know what to do. s.f ^d*l JZ.2.S.. Sometimes she sings even fcjig ^fe A«E ^J" J£.cl" better than she did to- i.eflS *£ "^ ^ "$■.&.. night. Sometimes I half suspect $33 *ite Ml *jzH we have made a mistake. +*? I6! -a* 1a •TA. . When we were in Japan tf£«l g-g- Sit *1 last year, it sometimes $te*Wis 51:*! I 2 rained for four or five "K «1 #&• days in succession. 3. I eat rice sometimes. *{• °J *r ;qj $J j. . He comes sometimes in the °|-§^1 J^fe Wj 5^4*. mornings. 336 THE ADVERB, Chap. VII. ?II. Geo. 6-7. Sometimes I cannot sleep «J- *]X4f- *& *rte "1 all night. %&.• Sometimes not one of the ^ v\-c[ \jj_£ ^ 7|-§ &}^ boys knows his lesson. $ $] y\ "f'vj-s c4 fe W| 5U- Sec. 6. — Seldom. Seldom — ^2c. followed by the negative. I seldom have a cold. v)-\r ~%3\~7\ %}c 6|-H = £l- I seldom smoke in the v|-*t ^ ^l^j ^^1 ^ic. 6}H house. ^ 4i- I have seldom seen him of 6] ^ t] *r j. A]- § -§• ^ 2c. late. 5Jv}.*l ^- fSJii. Sec. 7. — Never, ever. 1 Temporal : — (a.) On no occasion, not once — *1] or ^1| with the re lative participle. If emphatic, "* "^S may be used. (b.) Invariably not— ^J*^*], followed by the negative. . (c) At no future time— *>}5. f^ o] e}-H with the negative. (d.) Never before — .a.*! «]{c with the negative. 2 Emphatic : — (a.) Not at all — *>}£., SS.^1, with the negative. (b.) Positively not— |J*g2, ty^sL, with the negative, (c.) Under no circumstances whatever : — /fl $ aj ^ 3t, y,tt if^ X and the like with the negative. Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 7. THE ADVERB. 337 1. (a). I never had toothache till % £, •§• s) 7). ^r *] ^ I was twenty. *1^§-61 l^iS 'U'MA- I have never ridden in a ^a "^^JS 6|-H 5^.- chair. This grass has never been t>] -§■.&. >&y\ ^]]y\ cut. *$&.. Does small-pox ever prevail 2£^^]5 ^ *} 6] >g-*- in Korea? js^jy $j£? Have you ever been robbed ? j£*J of*} -£*fl7r $l& ? Had you ever been to Seoul vf 5fvf7| xjtfj aJ-§- $]. befere you met me? -g-^J- $1*1 £. ? 1. (J). Some people never get up ^1*11 «1*1 *J2} *j ?£«] fe till seven or eight o'clock. ^ ef vf 7;] &j ^ *]■ f Do you never take, sugar ^*1J ^j *j.a,j A^ k3 in your tea? ^^^A? I never take wine. ^i^i&l 7;] -£- &]• °J4«. 1. (C). Will murderers who have ^ S.eJ.2. S'cf'g; *f$l escaped by bribery never £j £[_o. ej-jj. ^q) 5|.E be punished? ^j-*] oj^^? I will never see him t>}3. mij e|.^ -cyx) ^ again. ^ jjj.. The soul can never die. ^^6| 6]-.2. ^ ^f-2E ^ 338 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. ? II. Sec. 7. 1. {d). I never saw Buch flowers a^^lfe: 3.^ -^ -£ before. Ji&ii- Did you never understand a ^d^lu: :e>j4i? it before ? 2. (a). Are diamonds never found 2L-*i M\z -3""?Mftl in Korea? XJZ.*1 *M 4 A. ? I never see him now. ^1 «• 2E.2.*1 -5r -£■•&•• Korean ladies never go out. 2.^ -?-?l # 61 HS^l -§■*] »H fA- 2. (6). I shall never love any one ^7]- ^^2 b}3L 4? so much again. 61 ^H rH :t«W I will never give him an- «Mfe $*$sL "£ €H other cash. 6H ^ SI^- Never do a thing like that «Mfe: ^3. aej ^ again. v}*\- I can never consent to such a^l £!«&• H^S. *J^£ a thing as that. % •+■ ^j &.• 2. (c). He can never study J apa- Sec. 8. — Again. 1 Another time — ££ or «j-A|. 2 Once more — /S*>Q. 3 To do over again— -ty gor J.^. 1. I'll call again. a£ _£.e| t] -c\. Be sure and call again. J^.-e] /£ _£.*].£.. Do not do that again. -c}/.] a 7j "f"*] °I-^. It just stopped raining, and «|7}- ^-^c]-7f- a£ AA- it is raining again. 2. Sing that song again. a£ -g^J a 2c ^ f^]A- If you don't understand I Sha]^ a£ £i*J ^v-J will explain it again. =. e| ej t] -c[. 3. You will have to doit over -tys *$"°i*l: 4^51 4i- again. You will have to iron these 3. £-£ 5SJ-/3 ^-^.ej *J clothes again. -§■ e»} 6J: ^^JJ Js.. The legs of this table are t>] -# '=e|7,r X*l 61"H not alike, you must make -^H 3f^ c1?^6^ it over again. &2!A- Seo. 9.— When. ] Interrogative: — («.) At what time— £pi|, a^V^- 340 THE EDVEEB Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 9. (b.) Until what time— #*<\X?X], »]V1^- How long— Q*>}. (c.) About when— ^vf, HV^S-g- (d.) At what hour— *\ V*]. 2 Relative :— (a.) At the time— ^ or *} with relative participle. (h.) By the time— #1)51*1*1 with relative participle. (c.) After the time— :£. with relative participle ; some times 7-f^- will he used with one of the simple tenses. 1. (a). When did you write this ej^^f ^jxf| ^^'? letter? When do you intend going *fl#.3. «*] t>] V^ 7>e^ to Chemulpo? ~§".£. ? When would you like it to ^1 ^ ^ «? £ *] he done? 5t 51 A? When was that? a ^J 1. (rf). When shall I wake you ^V^l^] 2. (a). Which of the boys was it j£.-gx}«] -cj^- -^-^ «, that answered when you $) 7). -r^Ji. ? called? I will send word when I *fl ■§•.£, ^J*] IT^6)] jjv| write to Chemulpo ? "§*2l Ji ? When the Japanese am- ^J_jL t^^lc] c^ej ^-acjj bassador comes will he tfl -JJ- ^. "g H] &.V] y\ go to see the King ? jij j. ? He broke it just when it Y}- -ef- ^^* #$<*] ^js. was about done. 5}^i- What did he say when he ^J-^^I #§<)] -f- &} *] ej-oi. was arretted ? -§- g -e) vj 5J7I. ? 2. (6). It will certainly be done &*} #|j 5]^aJ c^ tj- when you come. s] JJT^. The letters must all be ^jxjJf -§-^lj 5j*|Af ^ written by the time the *] § -c]- #.] ^ 6} at postman comes. ^^'.i.. 342 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. 5 II. Sec. 10-11. 2. (c). When you have swept and #-§; *fr ^3. £*1. ^wl dusted the room shut the ■£ "5J <>}*}. door. When Sou Dongi comes £^»1 * M Bl # 6t back, tell him to put e] ^-§: ^M H^JO. these jars in the box. if iL- When this sugar is gone e>] Ar* Then the boys will be a *H $ t] A H £ old enough to work for £>. s. V\ e1 ^-ft ^-^ themselves. ,3 2j Ji- Then there will be rail- a#)j *-£• ^S.7}- $13] 4-. roads. Will you be ready then ? a /^ 2-g- «> -?N]7f 4. Then the wind blew so a :£k tiJ-^J-e] tfl^£"$" hard, we could not go <^A^ 7}.^] -5^ "§"jL 3£e[- and came back. 3f-4s.. Then we got in a boat and a. ^t.^| V]% ^jL ■& went to sea the fire .sj'ft T1^ lTe1 21" works. ^4i. Then I will go to the a $.**] ^flli6*! =.21 palace. 7r2|4i- Then I studied. a :£ ti.^ MJ7]- ^'Jf From then on I stayed 3. ;£. «.«} Then I asked him another 3. «]•■§. -c|-g ^-g- Jf.ef question. _5L$tii- Sec. 13.— Now. 1 . At the present time : (a.) Definite, /] #, 7;] 346 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 13 (b.) Indefinite, -ft*I, ^%J, 6l*»l, iL**l- 2. Now as opposed to formerly — the same with fe. 3. By this time already, — $l*fl. 4. Next,— o]T= ^ «] . 5. Than before,— ^jt We are just out of it now. *]# XS rT" ^■4i- Kerosene is very high now. /•] # ^-^-7r «| + u| #(•.&. 1. (6). There are a good many ^%] 5J^1 7^7r ft^ SLty mad dogs about now. &| A- Nobody seems to make ^y*l|fe ^-if- -Q%\ C] much money now. ^7j*l ^ ifu: .E.^}1 *1 Ji lt is very dear now. £,/? o] ^Qo] y]^ji. ■2. Nowadays Koreans don't «>]>*. t]\r 2,/^ /•]•;§ ft] f*- wear the large hat. ^J-^ &X] &H -$•.&.. The Japanese government «>1^t>]fe ^J-g- ^J-?» w]^ • tolerates Christianity now- oJl-^-SL "ffe: '/^ 5L adays. s*c -efl"§".£.. 3. Most of them will have *H 7^ r> ^$t 51 4& • been sold by this time. Chap. VII. i II. Sec. 14 THE ADVEEB. 347 Your house must be about ^SJ ^ ^^fe $l*fl rl" done now. 5 3t>3 ^ f -Sa lt's too late now. $1^| ii^4j.. It would be useless to send S]Q -r-^e1 .SL^H 3E, for the doctor now. £1*1] 4H1 *$£.. You had better apologize $1^1 fe *}S] -§"fe; 7^A] now. •£?%&• They will probably be here £1*1| 5- -§-^ -*-£.. directly now. It is boiled enough now. £l*fl «]■ ^ 5| 5I*]"- Tea will be ready directly £1*1| *} 7J- 3J- «]■ s\ 5J Ji. now. 4. Sou Pongi will recite now. 6] ^-s-^] -fr-^- «>] £|£. We will read Chinese now. -r^j#«>] t>) «]■-&*»] ^JlA) 5. The tide is running out *>}ty jt-cj- 2L4t7\- "°| t*i more rapidly now. s y)] \\i\ £.. I am in much better health ^ JLC]- 'MJ •§■«>] "^ ^ now. ~t> £.. We are having less rain ^ji1^ u] ~% £..£.■ now. Sec. 14. — Already. 1. At the time spoken of, — *J 5] , *}/^. 2. Prior to the time spoken of, — ^l^. 3. Equivalent ■ to so soon expressive of surprise, — Note.— With this last t£M also may be used. 348 THE ADVEBB. Chap. VI 1. 1 II. Sec, 15. 1. The wind has already be- «£^ ti>f«>l %7] *\*X gun to blow. "$"$!£■• I have already applied for a $J ^ DS'I ^ T1- "$" passport. 53 &.• He says he has been waiting t>M £*1 *tt 6W 7' for about an hour al- "C^^a. f & "°1 61 ^ ready. I was going to give the ^r^*H ^*1*]«M. f shoemaker a blowing up, Sl^H QM xl" c.""??} but they were already «* § "^ "l rl"< done. I have had plenty already. *£M *"& °1%.£-- 2. As I have already explained t>)% ^ e^ vj £ l\ H ^f- several times. He has already declined two «>1# <>1 #*4 # ^ -2- or three times. f % "^ 61 c>- 3. Have you finished already? e>] V *61 ^ t"$4^? Have they come already ? *>] V <* 6] % & ? Are the cherry trees in ^V *&] ^ ^*1 »1 blossom already ? $J £. ? Sec. 15.— Formerly, used to. Formerly, used to-^-g., ?&<*], ^7^^- Formerly all ships were ^.g. S] % rh M-J2.S. made of wood. c.1?^^. There used to be no jin- 5.^*1 -£-£.&■ ^.%7]y\ rikshas in Korea. ^i'M-i.- Chap. VII. ? II. Sko. 16-17-18. THE ADVERB. 349 It used to be thought that ^tf] tfj]. xg-g. 2£*r the sun went round the -?£• Q$k£.. earth. There used to be a temple i^ 7-f ^ «f| ««J f«f ?g *>] $\ here. *&£&.- Formerly foreigners could e>| *| «} *r ^ -a}- A].|fo] not live in Seoul. tfitM ■£*! -$r"$"3J4i. Sec. 16. — Hitherto. Hitherto— 1>] *q| A?*] , *1 %A?x] . Where have you lived ej*q] A?*] *>]<;] tf ^ hitherto ? $t Js. ? What have you studied &]#|{ yi?*] -?-^-§ ^-^L hitherto ? "§" °! .&, ? As I have lived without *]■=£■ A?x] SL7] Q ^jL eating meat hitherto, I ^5t*|H ^ n-J3j4i. will not eat it now. Sec. 17. — Eecently, of late. Eecently, of late,— e>] * o] , ^|, ^j^. Have you read any new ^e| ^p-* -<1J*| e>]rj- books lately ? ei 53 ii ? The government has re- *g.u. *i]aj 6] ^c>] j\\g_ cently bui!t a new cus- *| J?J-g- *]$jii. torn house. Did I not see you lately in *j/qj £J.ji/4 _&*] 6]-^ Japan? "$"$Jix? The king has not come out «>]y^c>|*r ^-^ 7^ 6)-M lately. f$34i- Sec. 18. — Ago. 1. Ago-?g, ^j. 2. Long ago,— J^x*. The Koreans generally, how ever, render this by the relative participle of the verb, 350. THE ADVEJtB. Chap. VII. § II. Sec. 18 with *] or XJ) followed by the verb j£.e]-.£., to be long (temporal). 3. Several days ago,— ^J^6*]. 4. A little while ago,— *>}*%. 5. Just a minute ago,— $1*1], *]-£, A]*J}-. 1. He died three years ago. #i£ *i*] ^j $Jrfe. I wish I had written a "£ I ^ #] ^ *1 S f $! month ago. ^ ^ 5.$ HI "$"$!&• How many years ago was /^ ■§•«>] 33 1] ^^J S] SJ^? Seoul built ? 2. I saw bim a long while ago. .£.2)] :*£«*] i$t4i. It was made long ago. g. "g *)] 7\ £.&}£.- He promised to lend it long ^M ttiH a^ Wt ~£ ago. *l]7r Sl*\Sl- I knew it long ago. ft *]7l- i^i, 3. There was a dealer here the ^^«] ^*7]- jL^. ^*] other day with some very J 7\%\ SL %£.- pretty fans. I sent him to the office a t}fy *j*1i jL^J-jL while ago to mail the -f 9]-^ «*] ji^ 53^- letters. Mr. Kim was here an hour *>}*% :?} -M 1M i ■%■■*} or two ago with his IfM. $•<♦ S^l^- nephew. 5. As I told you a minute $1*1] ^ <§ * ^S- ago. Chap. VII. §U. Sec. 19-20-21. THE ADVERB. 351 I saw him ride by here a *] -^ o] e] ^5 ji *] CJ. few minutes ago. 7].*r 7j^ j£$£;i.. Sec. 19.— Just now. Just now-£, %X\ #, /]#, ^-^ etc. I have just been seeing some 3**] £■ 7|>y «>) j£. *i.*r dancing girls perform. 7^ ^m. $4*. The clock has just struck. ^°J Qs] ^-*J}- 2J4.. When I've just given him -£$• g^jf -£$J fe«| as one nyang will he ask 'g-wf -§".£.? more ? Sec. 20.— Till, Yet. Still, yet— a xf, *H, ftf3}:£. Are you still sick? a *l ^J *| £tJi ? This pail isn't full yet. e>] ^.6] 6)-*J t£ k}*] Is'nt dinner ready yet ? x^ «>|-*j 5: (a.*^) *t Sec. 21.— Till, Until. 1 Time:— (a.) Up to — A?*]. (6.) Before— ;fl*q Jr. 2 Degree— s# with the verbal stem. 1. («). Wait till he comes. ^7] A?x] 7l^eJ.&. I read till dark. 6^ f- 7] ^ y $} A. I must wait till twenty five M]A] ^^i-& -*?*1 minutes of five. 7] c ej ^ oj: ^,5] ^.. 352 THE A.DVEBB. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 22-23. 1. (b). I can't go until ten minutes £.*] <$-§• ^lfc: 7r*l past five. -£ ^"51 ix. I can't leave home until the e|3J j£f 2.4. ^d^lb: middle of next month. ^ <*H *■) ^ ^ 2. I read till I was tired, ■£"$■ 3L# $ $J4i- Don't bend it till it breaks. -?-e-|^l H# 3J*1 »?A. He pulled the cat's tail till -fH 3t# JtSM ^^11 she bit him. ^-^ ^^4s.- Sec. 22.— By and By. By and by — 3li:l'7r w^n future tense for future, and past tense for past time. By and by bring me some 3Icl"7l- ^-Sr # 7>*1 hot water. Jfc.^ *f-. By and by go to the post- $1 We must start soon. ^ ^t^-e): ^-5]^. It will stop raining very w]7> 3J- 5t*l5!4i. soon. The rain came down in UJ7]- ^*| ^ 6W ^ H torrents and soon the roof ^ oj- aj- v| -$■ c»} /^ began to leak. ^ -§- e>| *] 7l *\ ^ Supper will soon be ready. Ji.ef-7;] &]-H iT0^ *1 I will soon goto America to ,£.sj-*l B]-H i""4"^ "I"^ study. 6S ^.«. faf eej '2. I take a bath as soon as I H^vf V&M #A] ^-%- get up. $«]-. As soon as they get on board ^J-jr^61] JL^ Hi^i -^-Aj they begin to smoke. ^^] 1) 71'g *]*}; ~$£>. He died as soon as he heard j=s iQtf 3J- ^&[ &■• it. As soon as he took the Sf ^6. ^^ -4 Aj y medicine he got better. ^ ^. 354 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. \ II. Skc. 24-'25-2S. I'll go as soon as I have x\*4 aA^ % *>3l £■• dined. I'll have a bath as soon as ^-Sf- •£*] ^\ S^fe ^3. it's ready. -^ i^Jit- Sec. 24. — Directlt, At once. Presently — X]^. ^]^J-, etc., may be used : immediately — ^/.], 5£, 35-^1 w etc, will be needed. I'll come directly. *15 &3I4&- The bell will ring directly. *l*fl $1^ *l3Iii. Let me know what he says a. ^HM •^■61^1 el"Jt immediately. ^fe 7^ * ^ f £- Serve breakfast at once. *>}*• 3* -§■ fcj ef-. Send that man away at n. -*•]•« £(■/.] vfla^ jjj, once. MJ ef-. Sec. 25. — Before. ^J*l]. The same word is used with nouns or verbs, but the English verb limited by before, takes the form of the verbal noun in i\ ■ 1. We must start before ten. 2. Afterwards we moved to $. «)^ jg*}» .e^. 6]^. Pyeng Yang. "$"$?:&.• He was better for a while, i£. }Jr]"7r ^C^lfe; -ej-$- but afterwards he be- $^4i- came worse. 356 THE ADVERB. Chap. VII. g II. Sec. 27. 3. It is already after twelve. ^^ -^ *>) A] 7]- *l#ix. I can not go till after four. vi|*| *\\\ 7] *d<*j*c ^ lie started a little after /1| A] -3§. ^vfAj *$%£.. three. Sec. 27. — Long time, long. 1. Long time, long, — St^H, or a form of the verb SL^}Sl (to be long). 2. A long time before : — (a.) A long time requisite,— ^.e]- *] 6];3^u: follow ed by the negative. (b.) Where the idea of necessity is absent. — The clause qualified by before, is put negatively in the substantive form followed by the verb St.9} Si. to be long. Sometimes the sentence is transposed and the equivalent of the English relative, when, used. 1. The hot weather seems to •£■£«*]£ ^^\7\ S|-f- last a long while this SlQ S.'fr *>]£.- year. I cannot wait long. £.e|| % 7} -c e| Tjj £.. I will not wait long. ^.efl af- H 7] « U| 3J £.. I ha ve'nt seen your father a^^^^ A^H ^l & for a long time. *] -£ "§"$JJi. ' He has been sick for a long Sl^ ^ *>] H5! &.■ time. I have been studying S.'ft 'S' 2. (a). It will be a long time be- iej-*! <&& /j ^ ^/£ fore you can talk like a AH *)U ^J" -£ ~$£. Korean. slotc]-. It will be a long time be- ^ef- *| <$■% ^^ -Qg. fore a railroad will be A?x] %sL7\ ^"H*! laid to Ham Heung. -£ -g -f -Srj^. 2. (ft). It was a long while before -f-ej7f- ^w] &J j^Bf- 7j we went home. ^]yy J^sf-^. It was a long while before -f-ef^f-e>| sjIt1 <££ ^1 we became friends. ?;|7j. ^.HJ-^.. Was it a long while before £j -5J- *ff6l |J -g- ^^ foreigners could travel *}3L ^\ erH "S H ^1 anywhere in the interior -£tr X{\y\. _^h{- ^ g V of Japan? H^r? It was long before the a vj-e}- ff'&J ^7]- igs country recovered from 5) 7;] oj-tj *]7|. a|_o. the effects of the war. £t&r A.. It was a long while before *g e>| 3)|*} -§■*] £>]-vJ I recovered completely. *] y\ *]■%■ At last he got angry. M-^-61] ( ^-f^] ) ^ °| §111.— ADVERBS OF CAUSE, MANNEE AND DEGREE. Adverbs of manner derived from adjectives etc. are not treated of here. Sec. 1.— Why. Why — $], ^^J^t^ or by some circumlocution. Why are the Japanese ft &{.£ Aj-f 6] Af-f-g- leaving Seoul ? ty^-i. ? Why does wood float and $| vfjlis: 4£.a i^fe iron sink ? 2)- &J- 2. The way in which, — participle with 7j. Note.— How, with verbs of knouing, etc., may often be rendered into Korean by the future participle with ^*>fA. 1 & 2. How is the road from here «^^]^ £| ^- l\l\ *zA to Eui Ju ? ^ o] 3d "SJ * § ^ H How do they make Kan- #*£-§■ y^^l £•"?£.• chang ? Do you know how they Ar*l-§ 6J^?1] «j.*r ^ print photographs ? &]-.£.. Did you hear how your ^ ^lTt7> $J^?1] -^Sd^ friend was killed ? t £?A. Before he came to Seoul *\4r £.7} ^H ^S ^"^r he did not even know ■§• -^^A- how to hold a pen. Does that carpenter know ^^-7\ H^ia^ ~$)s. Ohai-. VII. J III. Sec. 4. THE ADVEEB. 361 how to make rocking jlSJ cH^l" 6J"A? chairs ? He knows how to construct HJ- °Hl b: • Si c1 Tfl "5 a sentence, but he does ^ ^^ n[|r ,&..&. .3. not know the pronun- U-. ciation. It is very strange how a w] Sec. 4.— So. 1 Manner: — {a.) In this manner — e>] ej •$■.$.. . (b.)_ In that manner— (^23-£ 2 Degree : — (« ) In this degree — ft] 2-171). •(&.) In that degree- HB^|- 1^71). Note.— For the distinctive difference, between cj ami a, see-Part I 3 So that, so— as,— s.^., and the forms of the verb Xi'with ${.. 1. Be sure and not do it so, do JjL=j a.^fl] ^sl e] af^j it so. ~$£l- If that's your opinion, why A 362 THE ADVEBB. Chap. VII. ? III. Sec. 5. 2. Tell that man not to make :x Aj-f ^^ W-^l ■3- the shelves so high. «f?1] ^*1 Sf*l ?? H-^. "Ti lt would have been well if JL^fi) ^ttn 6H you had not been quite so fS! ^'d 5.31*1 £.• hasty. 3. It is so bright that it hurts «1*1 £«>1 $■£ H# my eyes. 9^1 4x- It was so hot that the grass %t>] i?h 5# ^$! £.• withered. He is so tall that he looks j£.7l Q h# *\ ^SL- awkward. That is not as good as this. 3.7$ t,]7i sj- X*l 5.*| I don't go to Chemulpo as *14 X*l *>£■ ^lH"-^ often as I used to. 6H -#rh Sec. 5.— Like, as. 1 Manner: — (a.) In a similar way, — A^ or X*l. (6.) In the way,— tflS.- (c.) To b3 like ; and like used as an adjective will be rendered by X~$£'~ m its various forms. X£ prefixed to %\% has the force of exactly, and ^ also has this effect. Like this is e] «1, like that i«l or ^ej. 2 Degree— *}% ox S[X*\- 1. («)• If I could do as you do, I v}X ^ *^ t"SJ *lHl would be glad. S.?J] is- Chap. VII. | III. Sr.c. 5. THe ADVERB. 363 I should hate to work like a coolie. He lives like a king. He dresses like a China ^•^ ti m *£ y$j man but he talks like a Sjtffc £-& *ff *|g Japanese. 1. (b.) As I have already said. W tM «^ ^-Tb: Try and repeat the conver- sation just as you heard it. Why didn't you put out #| *£g rfls. *J^J -§;-£■ your light last night as nx] t,}^\ tr5JVI+? you were told ? Make it round like this. ©ma %%n gl ?.&.. Just like this. ^ 61 ^s. (c). Are the Japanese iron-clads £-& «*d s SSI exactly like the English ? n 4 ^ xi? Have you any silk like this ? °led 3* SU- Have you any silk exactly °) 5J 4 ^ XI ,9*7l. like this? 51 A? Pens like this are useless. ftl #4 Xt % £ v] 6J4t? 2. When one is thirsty there ^r } 2. £. Jf- ^ H 'S w] the house and tell Sou 7]- A} -fr^f-6! ^^ £| Dongitogofortheaoctor. ^J-^ ^-§-e|-Ji. ^M^. Sec. 6. — Very. 1 In affirmative sentences, — ^1-?-, ^^t6]. 2V*!> i» 3jel, -a*I,etc. 2 In negative sentences except when interrogative, — 1. This pen is very bad. c>| -£A] J Ji lt is very cold I . ^ ^t 61 ^1 4v It is very dear.. jt}-*l wj^f-^. 2. The sky is not very clear i§ t\ £ e>| a ej ^ nJ *j to-day. -5ciT.fi.. It is not very good. a.?] 5.*] *y:4i- They do not like each other jl &j 5.$ ^ 6j H H £.• very much. That .fan was not very 3. 3£*]7|- a^J U]^*! dear. &H "§" & ^ 61 ^t"- It is not very cold in Seoul Aj-i"6] 7*1 •§■*'] JX^l ^]*] in winter, ^l4i Sec. 7.— Only. 1 Only— Hh •$•&*!. -a.^tt- 2 Preceded by if, — iQ with the conditional . 3 Not later than, yet,— &J-5J ; *}J;.3j with negative. 4 Not until,— TflJf-. Chap. VIJ. f III. Sec. 7. THE ADVERB. 365 J. It's only a dog barking. y^y]. ;*|*J ."L&Jt:}-. As I only came as company :§.*} ^.s. •#■ *£ £1^1 $1 for you, why do you want vf -$- 3. /ty£e£;a. -$-_$_ ? to quarrel with me ? I go to Chemulpo only once * ^ Even Soun Yongi can read &•§-<>] 45E. ^1$ *1>M 1 Chinese pretty well. -£ -f *>}£.- Even to-morrow will do. %] $J »1 «}H. ~*/2l4i- Chap. VII. \ III. Sbc. 10. THE ADVEKB. 367 He hasn't even eaten rice &}£ ^i" 3£ 6]-H ^^.S to-day. -ej ©] «].. Soun Yongi didn't even £.]£ >*]^I wjfe £ >§-«>] 7{. sweep the room this *$■-§• CHAPTER VIII. NUMERALS. With reference to numerals little need here be said. In treating of them from the Korean, they have virtually at the same time, been considered from the foreign stand point. We then saw that Korean numerals might be either adjectives or substantives. When used substantive ly they stand in apposition to the noun they limit, and consequently hold a position much more emphatic, than when used adjectively. Hence, if, when using English numerals, the number is the special thing to which atten tion is to be called, it must be rendered into Korean by the use of the substantive form. If on the other hand, the number is simply secondary, and only mentioned incident ally, and its noun is the principal thought, the adjective form will be used, and it will precede its noun. In rendering English into Korean, we should also re member, the Korean constant use of " Specific Classifiers." Many of these cannot be rendered into English and con sequently when we render English into Korean, if we would speak idiomatic Korean, the proper classifier must be introduced. A careful study of these classifiers must then be made. It has been noticed, that there are two classes of nume rals, pure Korean, and Sinico-Korean, and while they may be used interchangeably, it must not be forgotten, that where a Sinico-Korean numeral is used a corres ponding Sinico-Korean noun must also accompany it. 370 NUMERALS. Chap. VIII. While the importance of this rule may not at first sight appear to the student, its neglect is altogether wrong, grates upon Korean ears, and will cause the offender to be regarded as ignorant of one of the fundamental rules ot Korean etymology. With reference to ordinals and frac tions, enough has already been said in Part I. Eight in this place, we should speak of the method of addressing a letter. In this matter, the Korean is more logical than the foreigner ; his plan is the reverse of ours, for instance, he would begin with the country then the province, city, ward, street, and end with the name of the party addressed. As sentences illustrating the use of the numerals, oc cur everywhere throughout the book, none need be given here. Chap. IX. Sec.1. THE PREPOSITION. 371 CHAPTER IX. THE PREPOSITION. Tbe English prepositions may be rendered into Ko rean generally by Korean postpositions, simple or composite ; verbal participles ; phrases ; or, where the sense is clear without, they need not be rendered. From this it will be seen that the Korean equivalent of an English preposition, will always follow the word it governs. Sec. 1. — At. 1 Signifying place :■- — (a.) With a verb of situation — *l|. (&.) With a verb of action — <^\/J{ or simply tf. 2 Eeferring to time — *f). 1. (a). There used to be temples /Jjt*] "S-& 'i0] S^^i at Seoul. Are there no tombs of the %■#] ^ ^.o] ^Hw) Whang dynasty at Song ^J .£, ? Do? I wish there were no mos- ^^J;6*} 3.^]7]- ^j^j 1!l,?i quitoes at Pouk Han. ~Sl^&.- 1. (b). We buy our vegetables at -^ *& **]Aj ^l&fe -tyi.. that sh9p. y 372 THE PEEPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 2. We stopped at Pyeng Yang Jg ftM *}% ^- f $!&■ three days. We rested at Oricole. Sl^^ MaA&- 2. I got up at half past four £.£ ^ *te ^1*1 this morning. What is in that box? ;x flj *1 ^1 H?J V H= ? Is there a hole in this tea- e>] *r?H T^ 5l^? pot? 2. He probably died at Tokio. %-7§tf -£-&• A "§".£•• I must have dropped it at tg $ ^-s. *H How much wine do you £J'£6'] tf^tf -£«>] Q suppose is drunk in Seoul uj-vf. v4 % X "$*.£. ? in a year ? You can't get good chairs i)-g- Ajfe S.^. j2.-g--g- in the country. $i-§^T"-"7l- ^Jii. Which is the longest street /4-§- Ajls *>iV Ho) a in Seoul ? -f- 7l £. ? Which is the largest island ^*jw] 5J^ ^ t] o.^- in the world ? 3 A ? It's in the leather trunk, 7f^ $?$ #w] S.$\ S. wrapped in paper. #}■ ^"J^. I saw a fox in the woods. <%-% Q$\ ^{JL'g Ji$t&, You can go to Chong No e]^ .g. :£.&£ «h] =f-3.**| in twenty minutes. y\ £.• You probably put it in your -fPje]*)] u] ^ .*J ^ pocket. "tfii.. Sec. 3.— On. 1 On—*]. 2 On the top of, on the surface of, — ^--£\. Please write "Mr. Kim" o] ss]%><>\] ^/^^- «>|e|-;n. on this envelope. *!-?•.£.• There's a stain on my hand- vj\ -ftTH**] fr) -§■«>] *$4i. kerchief. There's a fly on the celling, ^i*^] 3j.e|7]. 5^^. You went home on the first. ^. "tTS.4*) 'S **] ^&.. 2. Is not that a dog sleeping on -cf nj-e. -|.$j yty^ ^j*] the floor? 7^7}. af-vj^ ? My hat is on» the table. M) 3J ^ JJ-£j 3^. I dropped a stone on my Q -f-£] ^|4^ ty&\j= foot. 3i4i- 374 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 4.. Sec. 4.— To. 1 With animate objects— S\ 71] , ^^j, or **}, which last is honorific. 2 With inanimate objects— *i| or 3. ; oft times also the simple accusative postposition -§• will be used. 3 As far as— A?*l . (See Part I. 107) . Note —With the indirect object, the postposition is frequently omitted. 1. Give something to the dog. 711 -f-SJ # ^Sl- Don't lend it to anyone. a7^ r\~A ^d*l %^A What did you say to Mr. -£A| # 3. How much is it to An Dong &i:f. A??;] ^^ *g oj-vj: ? and back ? I went to Pak Dong but I »$%■ *?*] ^Ajvf ^JvJ-^ did'nt meet him. ^ "§"$Jiv Chap. IX. Sec. 5. THE PREPOSITION. 375 Sec. 5. — From, out of, off. 1 Preceding a noun, — vTEj, ^tf- 2 Preceding a verbal noun, — the negative with future verbal participle and "§".£.. 3 With verbs of receiving accepting, etc., equivalent to at the hand of— S]71] or ej-ei] -will be used. 4 Off, in the sense of detached from, is generally ex pressed by some form of the verb. 5 Off shore — ^f$\ or ^J";£|-M dependent upon whether there the accompanying verb is one of situation or action. 1. About how far is it from here ^?\M ^ ^S.*?x\ %*} to that tree ? H-3A? Hang it from the fourth nail *£ jg ii*n *>$m on the right. 7\SL. I rode steadily from six in 6i-§ *m ^ *m ^i the morning, till six in *?A !-§•■£ J.&.- the evening. Can you borrow one from H£*J«W 31+ *U? next door ? Take a pound of sugar out ^ WM *rt £^ of that box. **M*K Empty it out of this bottle 61 *§ **]M **M tf and pour it into that. vg 4) j=l^ ej-. Take the books off this *4-i: <>1 -8- *W 3K table. 2t*W- I fell off my horse and Ml § *M *M*1^ sprained my foot. tte*15I&- 2. Is there any way of keeping «# 6H H-7^1 t +7* things from moulding ? 51 4x? 376 THE PEEPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 6. Be careful and keep the $ t] #^I 1" *1 ftf*} ~$SL< children from taking cold. I received fifteen dollars *}^ # He took off his clothes. ££ «J ^ 4i 5. Two large whales were J^tf ^J|/M ^- -aefl # killed off Fusan. $% £.. Two Chinese men-of-war Tflis-JL ^J"$] -f"^" tiJ ^1 have been off Chemulpo it 61 ^[ H. ^ S^- for over a month. SJ^- Sec. 6. — By, through. 1 Of the agent— SJ 71], tit a], <*]• (see Part I. 1 101 ff.) 2 Of the instrument, by means of— S. or i,S, ; or *s| ■Jr«<| which, if the English preposition it represents' governs a verbal noun, is preceded by the participle, or verbal noun in 7l of the appropriate verb. Chap. IX. Sec. 6. THE PBEP0S1TI0N. 377 3 Beside— <§#. • 4 Of time — w), or more exactly ^ *] Q3.. 5 From end to end of— ■%■ *£•«>]:, ^f-j4*f"6):. 1. I had it made by a black- M|7f. r)}*j- ^Jet] e.^- smith. ^ >J». This book was written by a 6]*1 2.^ XJ-g ftjci] Korean. *£•&• I was struck by a stone. ^7}- •§• tt^l ^K^^i- I was cut by a knife. Mj7]. ^j-x^ ^*}$3;&. 2. He went to Tokio by rail. fss ^-^ 3j4i. Let me know by telegraph ^^1 .S.S. -35- ^71] sj:?l] immediately. "§"&) ■*£•£.• Were you not awakened c]*)] ^^] ^I-^ il by the earthquake last t>}\] **]$$&.? night? I could'nt sleep all night -f-fc; «=|-&tf] *}*] 3c ^ through his crying. -Jr ^4i- Host fifty dollars through ^>M# ^-ir<*l Sc'dQ ^ Mr. Kim. *{;&.. He lost his whole fortune ^J ^Jr ^■§■^1 $lfe through the burning of 3$|-§- <]■ |J*J V ^4i- his house. He avoided such a mishap §^3. 7l-7];(5l-ar6*| .2.^1 by riding on a horse. J£ jm) y\ ^j 4JJ 4j. 3. Did you ever stand by a #JL-fr 64$1 "M^a^H water-fall? 54 71-. 378 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 7. Let's see, you live in the 3.^ 61 ^ *$$\ 3«W house by the bridge ? ^ *1 JL .3. el= ? This brook runs by our t>l ^ -M H ^J| V^ house. 71-J5L- It will be ready by noon. I rode through a crowd in a &*? 7} I ^ *r1l 2L$ jinrikisha. "?H ^4 "^5J&. Sec. 7.— With 1 Of the instrument, — 3L or 6.3. 2 Together with, in company with, — "§"jl', £ 7r*l ^» * 3 Belonging to, connected with,— «] or often not rendered. 1. You'd better tie that parcel ^ %■% ii^AS. *lwd with a string. S.*1A- Wipe it with a cloth. ^ iS % M 4- That man writes with his a A>f ^^-S £>.&. left hand. Chap. IX. Sec. 7. THE PREPOSITION. 379 I argued with that man a. AJ-jg -f-jt ^^)vf for about an hour. ^ \J- "^"JjJi. Send the pears along, with j£2§ V] "§"3. Jt^JL- the grapes. I put it in the corner with t1 -*}**] -f-'ft 1?5L ^ the umbrella. $i Jv Then I'll go with ycu. aej -^ ^VJ£}- f^ That which is called " Ojun- 6^*1 S\ SJ ef -§•£ 7j£. hoiem " is the king meet- "2"^-7}- S.^- Q^S. ""J ing with all the officials J^Bf -af^f- S] g"$" to consider affairs of state. fe y] X\ .£.. That old man passes the x^Sxl-cr ^1 *J -^P3?6! time each day with his o^e^ £J$i^}c. "^JL^ many grandchildren. 4i^"^"A- I came with a Chinaman. ^^"^fS *4X*I £}".&.■ Do you expect to get break- vJ."$\jl X*l ^-t- t^l fast and study with me. ^w> Is there no key with this 6] *]$] £.e}Y| <$ £.? watch ? Is there not is a wick with e>| 4) ^f- -3 *1 7r *j ;&, ? this new lamp ? Was there not a letter with e>] f)|6l| j*Jt;j ^*J.&? this box? 380 THE PREOPOSITION. Chap IX. Sec. 8. Sec. 8. — Without. 1 Preceding a noun : — (a.) Not having— <$*] affixed to the noun. (b.) Unless one has — ^j^^i. 2 Preceding a verbal noun.— the verbal stem preceded by a negative, connected with the accompanying verb by JO. ; or, the negative base with &J2, and the accompany ing verb. Emphasis is added by the use of fe after jL or 2. 1. (a). This letter came without a o] ^*l7r -T*5 ^>M stamp. %&•• Why did you make it with- $g £ *M ^*1 S1? out handles ? 53 ^ ? These sulphur matches burn o] /4^-^»l ^fl ^"^ ^*] without any smell. ^£t~- Don't go without permis- *]?}• <8*1 7r*] °|-^- sion. 1 (6). You can't open it without *£$ ^*^ %+ ^J£. a key. Mr. Kim can't read any- <&7$ Q*^ 3>MtM thing without glasses. b}3L -#^ 2E ^ 2. I suppose it wouldn't do ftj-of ^1 &H fl* 3M for us to go in without s.21 7]-Ki S.*l &*1.S. taking off our shoes. You must not go without vf f ^71) f *1 *\ H letting me know. If Ji.tr 7r*l 'f^f-- Chap. IX Sec. 9. THE PBEPOSITION. 381 Don't buy sugar without ^^-J "§■*! &2h: A}^- weighing it. -§• A]-?;] wfe}-. He went without {taking) •%•!& t>}^\ y\~r\sL ^i«. an umbrella. Bring me the lamp without ^s]^}-^-^] ?} 3. ^ -§• (putting on) the chim- 7(.^ £..£.• ney. I'll go without {eating) sup- *i ^ »fH ^-2. 7r2l:&. per. Will you go without (talc- §1 H tk A} S 6|" M m#) a guide? ^ ej ji 7r3Jii ? Sec 9.— Of. 1 Possession, — SJ if expressed, but more generally not expressed. 2 Apposition, — not rendered. 3 Partitive : — (a.) Some of a group as contrasted with the re mainder, or emphasized, (hence frequently ac companied by a pronominal adjective) — a ^f- «?, «f. (&.) When no contrast or special emphasis is ex pressed the of, is not rendered. • 4 Made of,— s. 1. The nails were rotten and %*] -e} ty^tf ^J 5] *l the bottom of the box ^f^^. fell out. Don't you like the smell of 5.£ ^HQ MJ #*fl 3£ a good cigar? 2.^ 6H t"A? Don't handle the property >jSJ *]|f- {??;] 7;] uf-e}-. of others. 382 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 9. 2. In the province of Chyella ^ej- S^l 5.$ ^ §lii- there are some fine houses. In the city of Song Do ^3£ ^ ^£1 &-& It-*! they raise a great deal of 7| ^ JL- Ginseng. 3. (a). Some of us would like to ^-s] f-^l $3^ A>f o| study history. ^ ■=*! 1 ^liol A]s| Many of the Japanese dress ^J-g. Aj-g •f-«) ^ -^. in foreign clothes. ^ fe *>]i\- *&&.. Many of them don't know a •f-W] ■# $*1 ■^^"3. how to read or write. -# A] &r -f- £fl<: Many of the Japanese |J.g. Arf <§•<*! &J^ ^ speak English. »] 7l- ^^i.. Few of the chair bearers m. "5" "S" *fl A "tj -*? *l live to be fifty. Arfe 6l7r tt*1 6H , 3. (J). Please hand me one of a^ "^«4 -£.&■ those pens. One of Mr. Kim's daugh- tM* *t«>l ^ *H ti ters was married yester- £|^J 3i"4s.- day. 4. Make it of pine. 44SS a""?^- It's made of flour, eggs, ?J 7>3.£r *r£J-4 Sit and sugar. 2. ^r !*! ^i- Chap. IX. Sec. 10. THE PREPOSITION. 383 Do you intend to build the ^ ^^2c *leJ:a "§"§ house of brick ? V H 51 7> ? Sec. 10.— For. 1 For the sake of, — $] -§■&):. 2 Instead of, — •=] >*1 . 3 To serve as, to be used for, — s, or AS-" 4 Considering that, — Sb:> iSli' 5 To be delivered to, — fij 7f\ with a participle of some such verb as ^l "$".&. or ^-Sl- 6 To be used with, on, by — He died for his country. vfej- -^ •$"&]: -#>$> \\>j{ J.. The doctor to-day recom- _S.ll ^^61 £ % 4t "$'7] mended me to go to the -^i?*}: ^=l#ii 7reJ-JB. country for my health. "tl "$"$! it- 2. Do not use scissors for a ^ll-ti AS7]-?I1 3£*] knife. v}St.- 3. What are those boards -tf ^^S*] ■^•b] -*3. for ? d&2jA- That wont do for a pillow. -oj 7]A] -^-*} A^ * 384 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX.. Sec. 10. He will do well for a Q*l *S ^ ^ X 'tS- teacher. I bought it for a thing to % M^J 7]*%. %.&.■ put pens in. 4. He speaks very well for a ^\^ A}§ «LS.fe «J" *£ foreigner. "$".$.• He runs very well for a child. 6 tl Sfe ^ ^ "f »+A- child. It was very badly done for a /•}f*.S.fe 1* ^ him. f5jA- Isn't this hot weather for *\& <&3\7\ ^"i^fe: Seoul? *\$A tf£.? 5. Mr. Kim has a letter for 3^#61 S.^Ajl *&~£ you. *3*1 31 &• Yesterday I gave him « q*H ^# ^ ^ letter for Mr. Song. 31*1 ^5i it- Mr. Choi received some Htfty*] &.%ty "t" ■£ money for you. ^1 *&&•■ 6. I want a key for this box. »] *H # ^^ ^M" Have you a cork for this t>] ^ «i| ^ Hj-S] f 4 bottle? 51 £.? Get another chimney for &| ^ <*1 #■ ^ 3] A£f «+ this lamp. *r AM4- 7. Did any freight come for £>>M M]7ll ife ^ $* me a little while ago? ^iHSbr? A letter has come for you. S."%A^j 31*1 %£.' Chap. IX. Sec. 10. THE TREPOSITION. 385 Soun Yongi has gone for &-§-6l7r -f-e| AJT^j-^i-i my watch. 3f4s. Send Soun Yongi for it. •&-§-'') ^f^l3! JL^A. Have j'ou written to Japan 3. ^ *f*l21 ^-S- ^9*1 for that money ? 4*} j» ? 9. I went for the doctor, but £}£[ J|LH2] ^-7^ v}\r he was out. ^^ Ji- Some time or other to-day, _£.}? *>]\- &${ ^*] ^^f^ you must go for the car- fH2| j\t>\ ^ 5l4«. penter. You had better go for four ja-^T ^8 ^ -t-^3! 7r1lJ more chair coolies. S.^'11?- 10. I don't think you can buy Mj ^Z}^] *g^{ AS -£ one for ten yen. -^^ "§".£.• I bought it for five dollars .£.%! 6.S. *}Aj l|-^J and sold it for six. .£. S. jg-§j;it. He sold it for five thousand -g-*J ^^ ^J«] jg-jL dollars and got the money. ^-e]- «£$£;&,. I'll go for two nyang. -f-^f «h] 7\$l£.. 11. Please sharpen both ends e>| &JfJ ^ 3J- &HY ^ of this pencil for me. X| .£.. Buy some toys for the $$] ^^ -?-£• Ar-r-Al.£.- children. Wont you buy a horse for vfj § <& Ar ^.gj^? me? 386 THE PBEPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 11-12. I want you to write two ?g-e>] v-f !§ ^J*] -g- tf letters for me.. $■■<$ 5. ?$ &.■ Sec. 11. — Across, over, beyond. 1 On the other side — ^JvJ or \^ t>]. When it is simply across, it is 7^v^ ; when it has gone over, it is ^ e>] . 2 Further on than : — *| v)-. 1. Who is that over there ? ^ 7£\J cjfe 6\i\. Jf- What's that house across Tj^ ^vj -cj *j «>| Jji..* the canal ? ^ 6] £.• The kite went over the e£ c] ^ ^5jS *d M house. ^f- 4i- There is another temple he- ^Zftf ^t>] 7].^ a£ ?g yond Sam Kak San. -$v\- 51 it- 2. It's a little beyond the ^j-f- «e| S# *1M" Kwang Chung bridge. 51 A- Fie lives just beyond the o)-^ ^/♦^i ■# ^1*4 American legation. -tl^l"- Sec. 12. — Among. Among — •^•gi]. I think you'll find it among ^ ■f-^] *]-5J ^fiL the tools. Who among us will obtain -^-ej ^-n] Jf.7]. jg:^ w^-§ office first? f2Jii? Is there an Ok Py en among a. -f-*1] ^^1 51 it? them? Chap. IX. Sec 13-14-15. THE PREPOSITION. 387 Sec. 13.— Among. 1 On all sides «].$. 2 About and round 3£ef, -f^- 1 and 2. There was a crowd of po- * -f- e] £ ^ o] ^ -§• <*] 4-1 licemen standing around JfysL ^jJx. the house. Let's put some flowers ^41 ^*S <*]Q #f around the fruit. % /•] «]*. He walked three times <£-§■ >M|^ J?4jL "g^A- around the city. The rats ran all round the # ofcj-^fsi ^^AS kitchen every night. H^f "SHA- Sec. 14. — Before. In front of— %#, ^J^. He stood before the king. *fl3r-*f- <#$\ *&£.. He planted a tree before the *J $■£] M-3.I ^5j4i- house. Sec. 15.— Behind. Behind— f)$J. There's a well behind the *] ^J$J -f #0] 51^. house. The key has fallen down ^'g^f- ^|$] =.^1^1 ^ ^ behind the clock. *^ Ji. Please hand me that book ^)J] *4 # ^ ^ ^-^lA- behind you. The troops marched behind ^-g:-?f ^|J] *JMl7r *? the king. ej-7]. % ^\ 0] «]-. You go first and I'll come ^-^. ^.^ 7rji vf-h: t12] after. 7\7$£.- 388 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 15-16-17. Sec. 15. — Between. Between — >$•«>] «J. There's a well between the S]^^ ^ »]• ■%*&] *$ doctor's house and mine. ^ 6] <*] -f-trfc} $^4.. It has fallen down between ^ "frja. *j *J J? &| «*j *tf &\ the bookcase and the wall. *3 ,£,. Sec. 16.— During. During ^ t>], :§.&£ with or without the postposition <*]. He died during the night. ^ ^o] «] -^$jii. How were you during the ^ ^.o] &J-eJ -§"/].£.? night ? He worked very hard dur- Sec. 19. — Instead of. 1 Before a noun, — ■?] aJ. 2 Before a verbal noun,— the verbal stem with Q3. or the verbal stem preceded by a negative with ji.. 1. Did n't you put in salt in- Af^- -c|^ j.^. £ v-jtt stead of sugar ? \- vj: ? They arrested the father &]-g -c|>£[ t,}v]i\. *}■ instead of the son. ^ 4. . Bring Korean money in- ty .£.xj ^1*1^] 5*d stead of dollars. :§ 7^ Ji.^ef-. If you go instead of him it a. AJ-|§ -=J^1 7].^ 2, will be well. 9jJ .£. Instead of going to Chemul- *fl"!r.5. Q j\.jL Jf^t po he went to Fusan. 6^^ '%&.• He sleeps all day instead of &J -§■*] ^3 ^jj.|j *)-.£.• doing his work. I think I'll build instead of ^ A]-*] &J.3, *J ^ -^-j^. buying. 390 THE PREPOSITION. Chap. IX. Sec. 19-20-21- Sec. 19.— Over, Above. Over, above... -f-$], -fvS.3.- There's a sign over that ti]-g: -$•$] tl^t 51 4v door. It's hanging over the shelf. ^>^ -?-$] *}£}£.• There are a lot of buzzards x^ -ft -t-JLS. 4iel ?1 flying about over that <^ ^ *] § *+ 7>A- mountain . Sec. 20. — Under, below. Under, below — 51$]. The books are under the &?$. 5]$] *4 *1 51 &.• shelf. . Go and put it under the -tf 5j$] ^c> T»1eh table. There is a dog under the -of n>f. °l£) «»}f ^e| verandah gnawing a £fe 7l| 51 iv bone. Sec. 21.— According to, in accordance with. 1 Dependent on, regulated by— -cfls.. #\9h 2 Of opinions, teachings, etc. — AS.fe- 3 Of statements etc.,— ^^JS., ^Jfc. or ^ S.- 4 In harmony with,— Sf*J-ir.£.. 1. The rate differs according -#^^- ^S. #>M ^^A- to the number of char acters. The postage differs accord- *g*] -f-^] *flS -f^)7r ing to the weight of the ^ Si- letter. I change my clothes ac- ^^g *\*\ ££ #3.*} cording to the weather. ^ Ji. Chap. IX. Sec. 21. THE preposition. 391 They're arranged according «J t^s, >H 3f .fJJ &, to color. I may go or not according ^ \i *1 ^1 ^ ^ *| ^ to circumstances. sjfe tfls, "^2Jyj.. q. According to the opinion of 53^ AfjfSJ >^Z}- ^.Sfe some, this is a mistake. o| -;\ a| ji e^. According to my opinion M)>JZ|- o.Sfe 6|*14|--<=} this book is not worth ^i. ^J4i. much. According to the doctor, he S\Q ^"i-fe ^^ *>1 e}- has the small-pox. ~§ -e] t>| -cf-. According to the doctor's, S]^J "^ej-b: ^S. *§?!-§• orders the patient was i)#ii "^^ 3!" A- taken to the country. Is that in accordance with -3.2J|J-&,^#j!].S}- Japanese custom ? -§■ £. ? Your view is not in accord- -g^S] ^Zf6] ^S. £]■ ance with the treaty. *j-?;j aj^. That's not in accordance «>] 7j*] S.^5] 4>Sf aj. with your agreement. «)•?;] Q&. 392 THE CONJUNCTION. CuAr. X. Sec. 1. CHAPTER X. THE CONJUNCTION. English conjunctions are variously rendered into the Korean by particles, verbal moods, and the participial forms of adjectives and verbs. Sec. 1. — And. 1 Connecting nouns — by "$"jL (repeated after the last noun), or 3J- becoming &]■ after a vowel. 2 Connecting verbs and adjectives. Wben the sen tences and clauses connected are : — (a.) Co-ordinate — by the verbal root with ,2. or «j the final verb only being inflected. For distinction difference between ja. and «} see Part I. 194, 200. (b.) Subordinate — by the participial form of the verb of the subordinate clause. 3 Equivalent to, "but" "yet" "because" "when" "if" etc. — it is translated accordingly. i " And-so-forth " is translated by— £{....£}.... «]-. 1. Please buy some pens, paper 5 t] ^ ^ "§"-3. 5.JJ "§"j1 and books for the children. ^ ^SL -fj- A} ^-Sl- For breakfast we will have S^^lb: ^ 3r *f*r '^■fi" rice, tea, and bread. tj Jj? 4«. 2. (a). The chairmen put down 3Li£\E-;il£>l JL2LS V^ the chair and went into it 2. t'-fiS — Sf the saloon. 7V j.. Chap. X. Sec. 1, THE CONJUNCTION. 393 I dreamed the house was ^-«] *J -^e>| if ^ on fire and woke up with jj,ji. -=§-vf- 4?) $J Ji. a start. I met Mr. Kim before ty*&**] ^tf^-k -&J*- breakfast and proposed X*l ^-t* "^J-jI. "$" that we study together. $J £,. 2. (6). I intended to cross the river 7j-gr >yt--f 7J-*] ^2)-«) and go to a hotel. •svr'-2L "§"$3:&.. The ball went over the fence zg-o] «£-g- ^^7]-^ *J-3) and we cannot find it. ^-7]. ^4.. It rained and we could not D]7|. £].,*.i <*} vf 7;] -£ start. "?"5JJi. 3. I told Mr. Yi what you told ^J*^] ^l^ ^~k &\ me some time ago, and tf tyty "§" $J *! H -X he said it was not so. ef *| ^J^j-jL ^$|4t. This roof was newly thatch- t>] ^J -£--£. 7}f^- "g ^ ed barely a month ago, *&**] Aflsg. v] «^j£ ^ and it has begun to leak -ty 7] ■*!*£ "$".£.. again. Sou Dongi did not put on ■fr^-«,l i[ ^^t-g- ^*| much coal and the fire ^*l 6?H HM^ ~&t] went out. ia^4i- Put them in the sun and *i $) Mj &J 2c ^ 3$ they will dry directly. ^ H TjJ .&.• Everybody else gets them, «]■§ Af § .£_ cf 63^ and why can not you. 71-^1 ul"?] $1 1?-cr "5c 4. Pie has pens, paper, ink, J^sj. s. J] $]■ 'tj s}- *} etc. % &, 394 THE CONJUNCTION. Chap. X. Sec. 2-3-4- Sec. 2. — Both... and. 1 Usually the verb is repeated with 3E...5L- 2 With adjectives, simple 3. following the roof of the first adjective is often used. 1. There seem to be plenty of %-S\ $\Q *lfe -^^| ^ both roses and camelias 2. QsL -f-tj^ S ^t^ in your garden. S^°]A- It both rained and snowed JL§4- ^:S SL3L V]5. to-day. %&■• 2. There are many things that ^-j! ^]* #^1 ^tit- are both useful and or namental. Sec. 3.— Too, Also. Too, also — 5E- Bring a spoon too. -fr^r^ 3E. 7>*J.fi.Hef- They have a custom like 2.CE. 1^ ^^ISlA.- that in Korea, too. Does your right eye pain -§•:£ ^ ^-3E. <&3.£.? you also ? Did you forget to speak a^H H*1^>h? about that too ? Sec. 4.— But. 1 A disjunctive is much less frequently used by Koreans than by English, the former preferring a transposition, and the use of the concessive. 2 It may however be rendered by its Korean equivalent v}\r, or 'Jfc/MH. which may be joined directly to any one of the indicative tenses without the elision of its termina tion ; or connected by 7& to any indicative form, when 7j{ Chap. X. Sec. 5. THE CONJUNCTION. 395 replaces its termination : or to any participle, and then the participle qualifies 7j[ . 1. It is good enough but the 5.SM- #*1 ^A.. price is high . The screen is old, but it is t>] *§ ^ o] ^ 7] fe: $i $J well painted. A]sj J2.3J.&. ^ 3.^ A- That ring is good but it is a a 7>^*l7|- S.?lu: ^5.3. little small. Sj # *-} £.. 2. It will probably rain but I ' u) -§- ^ -$7$ v\\r •£<$■ must go. t&3] <$ &.. If you want to go, go, but 7rH>1£ 7}- 7^]- 0fb: ^-^- come back early. 3Eeh i^^. I tried to get him to write Qt] »\ ^-^^-^t^ ji&j; for me but he would n't. T^^fe 6H 3!^- I tried to sleep, but it Vj-f- 7\*\5L $1^7j oj-^r thundered so I could n't. tB} :§■ o] i^ ^j- -£• b\. -£ My brother likes Korean ^^4. S.^ -§-^-|- 2.^ food, but I cannot eat it. -$-:jJ ^A^H H-iS -5r Sec. 5. — Though, although, still. 1 Although may be rendered into Korean by any one of the concessive conjunctions, — vf, 3£, j\ H Sf, etc., and a stronger, form {even thouyh) may be rendered by *] eJ-S with a relative participle. 2 Even so, and yet, — n.V\?j{ oj-^r, ^elffijs, etc., may be used. 1. Although he is still very sick 6]-5|;H *]-?- *vl*l •R't he will probably get well. x\ v}-^ )£ "§".&.• 396 THE CONJUNCTION. Chap. X. Sec. 6. I suppose we'll have to take ^ g <*] *>>H S.2l3£ 5d*l it, although it doesn't suit. "f^- ^ Ji- Though he's a rice man he ^-%\ s}<*}5. "£iE 2. $1 will not give a cent. -^-JJIii. He wont give up smoking, ^}-\?]7r -g-^l 'sll-f- 7M$> though it's injuring him. ^ ^I^l ^H-fg^l He's getting pretty oW, but # ^&^i 7lH*r 6H he is strong yet. 5L 31*^ *§"i- 2. Still, you had better apolo- aej^j v}\£ A>£j ffe gize. 7^| £#&. Still, it will cost a thousand a^f^S ^Hf-fe Se1 nyang. ^ if3!4x' Still, it would be better not a^ "$"^ 3E 41*1 s^ to stop. fk 71*1 S^ix- Still, he can't possibly be 3.^ -$ H 3E A5)=Dd 43 here for some time yet. 3t ^5^4i. Sec. 6. — Either, or, whether. 1 One or the other. (a.) In simple sentences — vf-. (6.) In direct questions connected by or, Koreans ask two questions without or. ■ (c.) In indirect questions containing whether, followed by or — the verb is repeated with *] or 7r, sometimes by v}.. 2 Either one or the other, no matter which — ^*1... *d*l- 3 Either with a negative, and equivalent to any more, or any bether, — 3£. Chap. X. Sec. 6. THE CONJUNCTION. 897 1. (a). To-day must be abowfc the £, ^ e>] xg i=j a}-^ o] vf third or fourth of the vf:g. 5,-g. sj_§>.. month. Let me know by letter or ^*| jjiuf -M-§ AS by messenger. j| I told the carpenter he -^-^ "=£} .3. 7j-£ tJ- might make it round or -^711 ~$"$.X] 2.*l7ll square. "£"^1*1 "§"^^2. if$!4v I don't care whether it rains V]i\- £.tQX] 6fH i^i^l or not. 3^1*1 &:&• It is no matter to me whe- -^."f" tQt1\ f>}^ ~$"Q7'] ther he stays or not. -^JJf *j 4i. It does n't make any dif- tflvfS Tg*] &\-\] t$t] ference whether it's bam- ^1^1*1 ^tiv boo or not. 3. That wont do either. a #51 3- £2! j.. There now, see that ! You *} a^J _£.£. -$$.5. -r*l can't do it either. * t^K- You mustn't leave your *M 2 #«] **1 **1 light burning at night ¥tf- either. You can't go either. ^ 2 7r*l *Z*h He did n't say a word about a ^JH Bl-S ^H 6H that either. f&*i «>]^. They don't say that either. a^e^a 3E *M*£ *\*]*h Sec. 7 Neither-Nor. Neither... nor — X...2E with the negative. It is neither a flea nor a ^# H *Hi 2*1 3£ mosquito. 6HA- There is neither a table nor j2.^ 5E. $3L -# s *d* a chair. %^\ «>lch It neither rained nor snow S I *tt£ «I 3£ 6|-H ed for a month. SL^- it 2 6]"H £.£.• Chap. X. Sec 8. THE CONJUNCTION. 399 Hereafter I will neither ©1 ;£ Ji^Jh: ^J*l 2E. borrow nor lend. sjs? sH*l 3£ ^13' £. He can neither read nor ^ _y.*J 3E -5r ~§":a. -#2? write. ^^13£ -£ ti Sec. 8. — If, unless. 1 If— "d- («.) In simple supposition — ^ with one or other of the simple tenses. (b.) Supposition contrary to fact — ^ with one or other of the compound tenses. 2 When " if " introduces a future effect or consequence (sometimes expressed in English by ' and ') it is frequently rendered by the verbal stem and jLfe. 3 Mere supposition, equivalent to " in case," " supposing that " if that was the case," etc , it may be rendered by 4 Even if. — relative participle with *] ef3E or verbal participle with 3£. Unless, is rendered the same as, if not. 1. (a). If it is on the main road we 3. zj You'd better not buy them #$3. /£ S.^-7^1 6H^ unless they are cheap A}*] ^H^fe 7]*] and good. 5.39 ix- You must keep quiet if you <^3\ «3f £*& %Q~^ come in here. ^ t>\ "f"5lit. If you will lend me your -^"Jo] *£■£ aH'd ^i penknife I will make you j? "= Sf ^ e) 6] «]•. a kite. If he hasn't got up yet &H H21M-*1 6tH tj! shall I call him ? ^1^ <*|-f^$j7r? If you haven't put it in the ^-^] Jf*] &H t^.*!^ room, where have you t>]^] -r$Jii? put it? If the bridges haven't been ""=B]7r "^^M^l 6H carried away they pro- "$"5!^l^i 2}1 ^3*1 bably got along without ^1^"^. a "§".£-■ difficulty. If he is out what shall I % 1. (&). What should we have done -"=e}7r ^ M-JM1^ $i if the bridges had all ~c\ fl] X] vT#l/3-31-? been carried away ? If I had not had a horse, I &1 ^ -d\r& SH?1] how could I have come? ^•2J4t"? How could I have studied ^ ft] *j*} "^^ SJ1^] unless I had a teacher? •#-§■ ^l^J^jl. ? Chap. X. Sec. 8. 'I HE CONJUNCTION. 401 If I had studied at once, it ^-Jff ^^ ^5J ^y± would have been well. £.3J3Jix. If he had come yesterday &] *•]%>] -j^-e^ JL $£*!.&.. I would have seen him. If I had gone yesterday I a^xj-k) ^-ei'^ S.9Y$k would have come back. 2l4t> If you let him have it, he'll y\x^y\.y^\ -$-i£ #tf*I spoil it. r]-. 2. If you are going to-morrow, %\ &f y}-*} jife 3Lg--§- you must get coolies. &} 6^ &y 2J Ji- If you go to Chemulpo to- %\ &J ^1^^.§ ^r-B-fe morrow you can't come °i ^Ife -^- iL^JJi- here. If you don't take care, you £.$ *>\i-\ "^"jtfe JfLef will break it, 5. e| e| 6] r|-. You'll get wet if you don't -f- tf «>1 *j afe £ £ take an umbrella. *J.A| &] t>] «]■. You can't stay here if you -^ jafe ^3j §{•§ -f*-7|. cry. Even if he had known how *)l^^r ff" ^St'S *1 to swim, , he prdbably *fr3t *£*1 •£ f^ ^ would not have been "§".&.■ saved. Even if I explain it he pro- *£t| 2^t>] X *£*] Jg- bably will not under- 'fj'x "§*.£.• stand it. He probably wont come, ^«]-j1 "§"<£ MS. A*] even if he said he would. *>\<\ % ~% 1T£l- Sec. 9. — Because. Because, may be rendered by any one of the Korean conjunctions having a causal effect. It is quite often, however, expressed, by the use of the verbal noun in 7] with the postposition *f| ; or by the use of a noun such as >t?^ or JL, expressing reason or cause, with a postposition ta] or I perfer Kumipo because it's 7-a]5L7]. M^: t?]^ cool. X.3- TA. I waited because I thought \H ^l|J^ ftJ: *M it would clear. 7] --= 5i&- He went because he had *7V£ # *|« AS. to. a &. Chap. X. Sec. 10-11. THE CONJUNCTION. 403 It's colder to-day because it .£.{§.£. ■gr«>} ii.\S-SiM has snowed. -e| jy 4., Sec, 10.— Then. In that case— aaf % a«i-^-, JL^?]&. Then I don't think you will aSf^ tfittf "^M-S. -3?- will find one in Seoul. &J-§- ^ *$■.£.. Then he may get well. •. a«J -^ ^ ^ ~$JL- Then you must give up a^J 9\^ Qi\ H <&*|ej: smoking. "tTJiTji. Then don't go. aaj ^^- 7j.;x| oj-jj^. Sec. 11.— That. 1 Introducing a statement — .iL "§"£.. See Part I. 228. ff. 2 So that, in order that, — future verbal participle. 1. J told Mr. Kim that it ^Af^f- -c^ JL6>JE ^it would be all right for him "$"c'hsL ^SJA... „ to read it. Did not the doctor say that SJ^|o| -&^-§- "§"Gs|6}: 5, he would have to try the -ej'.aftj-vj •§" g -c-f v| hot springs, to get well ? 3$ y\. ? T heard from Mr. Pak that jx ^^lfe $J^1 S|-5f some foreigner wrote that Af^ oj #$-c} ji «J-Af* letter. ^aj c ^ 4.. 2. Open the door so that I can ^ 7& *£ %flr]- j^^j J£..g. see out. HA- ^Please open the door, so that Wf-U-o] S.SJ .&7tt ■*£■ ^. the air can come in. *f &^ -^-jSL. 404 THE CONJUNCTION. CHAP. X. Sec. la floll up your sleeves so that *$*1 tfflj 4i?l f 7& SLSL- they wont get wet. Please arrange the net well 3.*\ S.3f.&.*l -£ "$"7ff so that the mosquitoes Jg.^ *$-& ^ *1A- wont get in. Take care that you don't Sja^^l ^^1 £.% t* slip. °451-- Sec. 12.— Than. 1 With the Comparative Degree,— jfch, *ij>^. See' also Part 1. 1 250 ff. & Part II. Chap. VI § II. 2 Rather than,— 1^^ or the verb %&. may be used. 3 More than, (of quantity or number).— (a.) In affirmative sentences— ^ &| . (6.) In negative sentences — 0.^- 1. A mule is stronger than a &.tf7\ 1 ir> ^\iL- horse. Korea is more healthy than £.*&<>] ^J-£ Jt^ -frie.7V Japan. 5. Ji lt rains more frequently in £.*& jf=h ^-&4r ^1?!- Japan than in Korea. *l-i£. iA- 2. I had rather walk than Sfe^J jt^ £«}e| ^JJJT ride. /?.. I had rather write to him jtJt ttfe 3d -S-*h than tell him to his face. ^*M ^l^- "^3!4t- I had rather smoke cigars T^*! 2L*} £*M 63 than cigarettes. tltL °-J 2!4i- I had rather die than go to 5} ^-§- Ji^ 7>fe ^ -SL*h see the doctor. ^ *> 5I * fe ?J *i Chap. X. Sec. 12. THE CONJUNCTION. 405 That fellow had rather js. ^*. ^ -§-7] _£-cJ- starve than work. i^fe Tj-*] t-rJfe. -5-i. I had rather live in Korea a|.g. _£cj- ^*J-ej ^M than Japan. ^fTfl^.. 3. (a.) It will cost more than fifty ^^ ^ ^x^aJ a^T^.. !'•' nyang. I have waited more than an ■*/.] ;$ \£b] 7) -c ^ j.. hour for you. We have more than an &]-*} j£ *a| ^J- ^a-j V hour yet. 5t A.- You must put in more than "£ ■§■ \£a] is| *j 6): -$- a handful. 2?4i- There were more than a 7]zt\ SJ^J ^ «>} §J>j. hundred there. § -o) o] «]-. That book has more than .2. *1 **] «J *J *eI M 3*1 4x- a hundred pages. It is more than eighty ri to ^-SriE. /*?*] &£J$ e| ^ &J Chemulpo. sjii.- I want more than ten 3. (6). I shall not want more than THE END. APPENDIX A. PHONETICS. I KOKEAN PHONETICS. Introduction. Definitions and Notes. 1. Phonetics. Phonetics is the science of position, move ment, tension and action in speech sounds, and the art of making these sounds. 2. The ground tone. The ground tone is made by the vocal cords — the overtone by the cavities above, viz. pharynx, mouth, and nasal passages. 3. A consonant is a speech sound made by a complete or partial closure of the oral passage at one or more points. 4. A vowel is a voiced sound made through a fixed oral passage. 5. Syllables. A syllable is the least measure of speech, and is produced by a single impulse. A close syllable is one that ends in a consonant, and an open syllable is one ending in a vowel. It is a matter of some difficulty to know where one syllable begins and another ends, espe cially in English. English often makes a syllable with consonants 1, m, and n, and these are consequently called " syllabic " consonants, but there do not seem to be any syllables in Korean words without vowels. It is worthy of note that the syllabification of the Korean spelling does not always seem to coincide with that of pronunciation. 6. Eecoil. This, the recoil of the organs from close contact, as in English, pop, tip, (use your mirror) is a very 403 APPENDIX A. important element in the pronunciation of English final stop consonants, but is not heard in Korean single words as tl"< ^> e*c> However when these words occur in sentences they usually end in a vowel, so that the recoil must of necessity take place. The glottal catch, which is the very opposite of a recoil is frequently heard in the midst of Korean sentences. The glottis is the " mouth " between the vocal cords ; we close it in straining, and in coughing. If one will lay the fingers of one hand on the side of the throat about the larynx and snap against the finger nails with those of the other hand as he breathes, it will be noted that the pound is rather dead. Now inhale and " catch " the breath, and then snap. At once there is a change in the sound. The pent-up air, held by the shut glottis, has made the difference. One must learn to control this at will, and in combination with the stops p, t, and k. It occurs also with 1, n, ng and between vowels, as H^f ij*}" ^l^j4i (I rose and sat down) . 7. Glide. If you pronounceihe English vowels o, oo, as you look in the mirror, you will see the lips move slightly to a closer position at the end. This is called the w glide. At the end of the English " long " a and e, there is the y glide; Perhaps this is why we spell day and they and bow, and wrongly explain the y and to as " silent." It is difficult for English speaking people to pronounce a vowel without a glide. 8, Personal and National Difficulties. — Occasionally a person comes to the foreign field who is tongue-tied. Such an impediment must seriously interfere with ease and excellence of articulation. Inability to run one's tongue well down on to the lower lip may lead one to suspect this APPENDIX A. 409 defect. If so, a surgeon can easily remedy it. There are some who are accustomed to slur over their " r ' s ", and consequently inclined to import this same pronunciation into Korean but perhaps the greatest difficulty comes from assuming that the Korean letters are the same as the corresponding sounds in English. Almost no Korean letter has the identical sound of the corresponding English letter. Special attention should be given to the point of contact for forming 1, and to the shape of the rest of the tongue, during its formation. This will remove the difficulty that many Koreans have in undersbmding foreigners when they use words ending in 1. Our American 1 has a glide in it that is very confusing to Koreans. 9. Analysis of Sounds. — It is very important that these suggestions as to the manner in which sounds are formed be reviewed again and again, and the sounds thoroughly analysed. To go from the analysis of the known English sounds to the unknown Korean sounds is the only practi cal way to accomplish this. Whispering Korean sounds will often lay bare the secret of their formation. Or it may be better to sing them with a (ah) before and after the consonant. A halfrinch stick between the jaw teeth of the teacher will often facilitate the investigation. Sometimes the best way to discover the difference between the Korean sounds and our own is to make up a sentence in which the sound under investigation is prominent, and then get a Korean who knows no English to repeat these words. His departure from the normal English pronun ciation will reveal to you the degree in which you ought to conform your pronunciation to his that you may speak Korean acceptably. 410 APPENDIX A. 10. Intonation — Intonation is the peculiar melody which forms an integral part of a language, and may differ in different localities, even where the language is the same. Korean intonation in some sentences seems very much like English, and again it is absolutely different. It might be called the language " tune," and the mastery of it is more important than the correct pronunciation of an individual sound. It is never learned by those who follow the book, or the word method. It exists only in sentences in nature, and should be watched for at such times as you have opportunity to listen to the Koreans as they talk among themselves. Failure to give the proper intonation makes the foreigner always remain a foreigner in speech , and his best efforts may cause the soul-saddening remark", "We do not understand English." It is because our fellow countrymen retain our own melody that we are able to understand their Korean so much easier than that of •the native ; and for the like reason when the native speaks English to us, we often mistake, and think he is speaking his own tongue. 11. Articulation. — Articulation is the uniting of con sonants and vowels, so as to give to each its proper value. Many students of Korean will need to cultivate a better articulation in Korean than they have in their mother tongue. A valuable exercise to this end is the reading in a whisper, in either language, to some one at a distance of twenty-five or thirty feet, with such distinctness that they can understand what is read. To do this well and easily, one must know the exact position to be taken for each sound and then assume such positions clearly and as soon as the sound is made, release the position just as clearly and decidedly. APPENDIX A. 411 PHONETIC ANALYSIS. ""K The various positions of the lips, tongue *\ and other parts of the vocal organs, may .be ~7 — represented by the above diagram. No. 1, represents the lip in contact, No. 2, the teeth ; Nos. 3, 4,. and 5, the roof of the mouth; No. 6, represents the posterior portion, of the mouth closed ; and No. 7, the floor of the mouth. If the sound is a surd, i, e, unaccompanied, by a vibration of the vocal cords, this line (No. 7) is a light line, if a sonant, i. e. accompanied with a vibration of the vocal cords, the line is heavy, thus . The position of the tongue is indicated by a line to any point where the tongue may be in contact. If the tongue lies in the floor of the mouth it is not indicated in the diagram. A mirror should be used for determining the- various positions. Let us first indicate The English Consonants. Which must always precede an intelligent study of the correspondiug Korean sounds. The labial position is a cardinal position in English and is represented in the following ways, r— -v j The letter p being a stop sound, the lips are (1) in contact, the posterior portion of the mouth (2) is- closed and there is no vibration of the vocal cords. I — v B differs from p only in that it is a sonant or in other words there is a vibration of the vocal cords and is therefore represented by the heavy line, r — -y P ' aspirated is represented the same as the- unaspirated with the addition of the dotted line to- show the explosive factor in producing the sound. 412 APPENDIX A. .3 fl- ft- I<- o p* -< fc fr ^ < >4 fc> 2 fH" rt; ffl- h H■a - o tfH rt- 35 i C/3 ►5 f\> :^J- a* * fit ft* CJ- -J ■ i 33 <: I g (No pLc z 5 3 M &* s s .; H s l z I5 o i i _ . _ s " r " i Q. K H «l OS ! ! s &J-- a* i , \Q-\ ! ■&- a- a- qA m & i j&- i ■g-a 5 i>l ' != « '■&■'. £ =S i ii? , -g.3 ; _S € 3 cS Q_J i Q-Q- 0OQ- | > j O APPENDIX A. 413 <*-_ M° voiceless is uncommon but is found in the — final m of word rheumatism. C*_ M is a nasal sound being a combination of •" a stop and continuant. The lips are closed but the posterior part of the mouth is open enough to allow the current of ait- to go through the nasal passages. With this there is a vibration of the vocal cords which is represented by a heavy base line. The common expression that a person talks through his nose when he has a cold is not the true statement of fact, for it is just the opposite. The air in such a case does not go through the nasal passages and the in becomes a b. For example we say " good bordik " for " good morning." m becomes b, n becomes d and ng becomes h. »— v g-^ The wh and w are made by a continuous °~~ ' *"*" " current of air coming through the rounded lips and back of the mouth, wh being voiceless while w is a vibritting sound. The dental position is uncommon in English being repre sented only in th and dh and by some persons in the letter r. —^ -y^ In " th " the tongue is against the teeth ■2^ "^=^ the current of air coming out at the sides of the tongue. A vibration of the vocal cords in the same position produces dh. The r is formed by a flap or trill with the tongue against the teeth and the sides rounded out. There is occasionally a voiceless r as prey, but usually it has the accompanying vibration of the vocal cords. -_~ — / and v are the only consonants in the -=^ ""s^*" dental labial position. They are made by placing the lower lip in contact with the edge of the upper teeth and allow the current of air to escape at 414 APPENDIX A. • either side. The / has uo vibration of the vocal cords while the v has such vibration. The prepalatal position is a cardinal position. trp^ T is made with open lips. The tip of the tongue in the prepalatal region i. e. there is a break in the middle of the tongue, and the throat closed. It is a voiceless sound, r— >^_ D is made in the same way with the addition of a vibration of the vocal cords, ir^ T' The aspirated t is indicated by the curved dotted line. , — ^ -Tyi. The voiceless and voiced ' r ' are made -*-— as above indicated except in this position the tongue is farther back, i. e. in the prepalatal position. 1^ In the blade palatal position we have first *—*— the stop ch. This is produced with the lips open, the posterior position of the mouth closed and the tongue arched so that it is in contact with the palate. It may be noticed here that while in the letter t there is a break in the middle of the tongue in ch there is no break. This is a voiceless sound. fjifr. J is produced in the same way with the addition ^"^ of vibration of the vocal cords. lOTV Gh aspirated is indicated by a dotted curved line, ci- N. This sound may be represented by ny. It ^-^— is the n in canon or onion. The position is the same as ch except that the posterior position is open enough to permit the air to pass through the nose. •». Sh is a voiceless sound made by a continuous "*-*— current of air. The sides of the arched tongue being in contact with the palate the air comes out centrally. -^^ Zh is produced in the same way with the addition of the vibration of the vocal cords-. r in this position is made as the r in the prepalatal and dental except the tongue is further back. The velar position is represented by, nr-y^ K is a voiceless sound. The lips are open and ^^ the tongue is pressed against the posterior position of the mouth. 416 APPFNDIX A. G is produced in the same way with the addition vibration of the vocal cords. |57rw K Aspirated is represented the same as the "-*— voiceless k except for the addition of dotted carved line to show the explosive quality of the sound. c3- Ng is the nasal correspondent of the velar stop. "^"~ It is produced as indicated in diagram by leaving a position of the posterior part of the mouth open so as to- allow the air to pass through the nose. H is a glottal voiceless sound produced by a continuous current of air passing out through the rounded portion of the posterior part of the mouth. Let us next consider The Korean Consonants. The labial position is a cardinal position in Korean as well as in English. ■ — ^ y is a voicele-s sound i. e. there is no vibra- ^ — tion of the vocal cords. The lips and the posterior position of the mouth are closed. It is the same as the unaspirated English p and many make the mistake of giving it the same sound as the English aspirated p.* There is no recoil to the lips when it is the final letter. To demonstrate this, watch the lips in a mirror and pronounce the English word " pop " and the Korean word >$■. I— v *W is produced with the same position of the lips as H except there is more tension of the lips which we may represent by a heavy line. It is * '1 he same criticism applies to all the stop sounds which beginners are liable to give as aspirated. APPENDIX A. 417 1 3 Hi o ^ (n Eh K ■4 rtii 5 ■<>4 k 3 g /> fl* ^* if« GO o« fil* u* a* (4* OP. a* a « a« k- GQ ck a- *|2f fr C9 ^3"e3 03 J2 re c "2 « PS —1 Q £J3 Q.O. CQQ. y 418 APPENDIX A. not made with a vibration of the vocal cords as is the English b. * ; ■ . . ; p-^. Jt differs from the unaspirated W in that there is more tension of lips and it is immediately followed by a sound originating in the glottis and is made much like a roughened h sound in English. This we represent by the curving forward of the posterior line ) . £• a is formed in the same way as the English ■ — ' m except there is less vibration of the vocal cords. It has much the sound of the final m of the word rheumatism. O final has no recoil to the lips before a vowel. •— vl 3L before the vowel *>\ is like the Englsh T * wh except for a slight roughening of the sound. Korean has no equivalent of w because he does not vibrate the vocal cords. ir final /. . The lips are open and the tongue slightly raised posteriorly with its tip against the teeth and the posterior of the mouth closed. A final has no recoil. r-~ /G is formed in the same way as "C except there ^^ is more pressure of the tongue against . the teeth and more tension of the tongue, which we may represent by the dark marking. No vibration of vocal cords. _^ ■£■ is made in the same position as "C with more tension to the tongue with the addition of the roughened h sound explained above. — -v Initial 5 is formed the same as the English n except the tip of the tongue is against the teeth and there is no vibration of the vocal cords, being a * There is no exact equivalent of the English b in Korean. APPENDIX A. 419 voiceless sound it is sometimes not pronounced at all or may have the consonantal y, sound as in ft| . —v Final e is formed by having the lips and the "2— \"; posterior position of the mouth open and the tip of the tongue against or just behind the upper teeth — the current of air coming out on either side. It differs from the English final I as follows : (1) With the English I, the tip of the tongue is in the prepalatal region, whereas in Korean the tip of the tongue is as above indicated against or just above the upper teeth. (2) The English final I has a recoil whilst the Korean has not. (3) The English final I is usually accompanied with vibration of the vocal cords while the Korean • final has little if any vibration. — y. H medial is produced by placing the tip of **■ ' the tongue against or just above the upper teeth and with the sides of the tongue not as full out as the English r in this same position and making-a flap, i. e. bringing the tongue down to the floor of the mouth. Occasionally there is a slight trill instead of a flap. The sound is not accompanied by a distinct vibration of the vocal cords as is usual in English. It may be noted by the above table that the Korean has no consonant sounds in the dental labial or prepalatal positions. The change of the prepalatal position in English to the dental position in Korean is one of the most striking changes. Y\, The consonant /. (except when final see above) — occupies a position midway between the prepalatal and blade palatal positions. 420 APPENDIX A. It is made by a continuous current of air coming centrally through a space left by the edges of the tongue coming iu contact with the roof of the mouth at the midway point above mentioned. This point may be ascertained with considerable ex actness by pronouncing in English the following, sin, syin and shin. In other words in the Korean the tongue is midway between the English s and sh and has somewhat the sy sound. Furthermore, it should be noted that the Korean is more subdued than the usual English s. -y^. M> The position of the organs are the same — as in /- but there is more tension. There is not however the vibration of the vocal cords which would give the English z sound. ry^. 7\ is in the blade palatal position, It is a voiceless sound made by the arched portion of the tongue coming in contact with the roof of the mouth at the point indicated in the diagram. The lips are open and the posterior portion closed, r^. &> is produced in the same manner except \ZB__ khere is more tension of the tongue. It has not the distinct vibration of the vocal cords as the English /, r^. 5^ is produced in the same way as 7. with addition of roughened h. It is nearly like the ; English ch. ^ There is in Korean an ny sound which is *^-~ the same position as A except that there is an opening posteriorly allowing the air to go through the nose. This sound is not accompanied by the distinct vibration of the vocal cords, in other words APPENDIX A, 421 the \s is almost voiceless. This probably accounts for the differences in pronunciation in some parts of the country the U' being distinct, and in other parts it is left out entirely, e. g. \^ $!• gr\^ 7 occupies the velar position. The lips are ^ opened the posterior part of the mouth is closed off by an arching back of the tongue as indicat ed. It is a voiceless sound. There is no recoil to the final "7 • j^- A7 is produced in the same way as "J with ^"~ the exception of more tension of the tongue. It is not accompanied by as distinct a vibration of the vocal cords as is the English g. jry. 5? differs from ~) only in more tension of the tongue and the roughened h sound following. By referring to the Table it will be noted that ~J is a velar, stop, voiceless sound and to change from this con sonant to \s would require two movements, viz. opening the posterior portion to allow the air to go through the nose and placing the tip of the tongue against the teeth. 6 is in the velar position, but is a nasal sound and requires but one change, namely the changing of the tongue to become l^. Therefore to facilitate the ease of speaking ~J becomes 6 because one change is easier to make than two, i. e. euphony is ease of utterance. As nasal sounds are stronger than stops so the laterals as H (medial) are stronger than nasals. The change of I to r between two vowels is because the position of the Korean tongue makes it easier to say r than I. Phonetic changes are not infrequently a good • clue to the organic positions. NORMAL POSE. As a preliminary to the discussion of the vowels it will be well to note what is meant by the term, normal pose, or, as it is sometimes called, " organic basis," or " basis of articulation." These all refer to that characteristic attitude of the vocal organs, as produced by their positions and tensions, which prevails among any given race, while they are in the act of speaking their language. It might be termed the musical " key " of the language. The points to be observed in determining this are, whether the lips are forward, back, or neutral, whether the throat is open or rather shut, the tongue high or low, front or back, and whether the organs are tense or lax. The imitation of the involuntary grunt, "uh," which occurs between the words of an unready speaker, is the APPENDIX A. 423 best key to his normal pose. So too, if one will make a Korean open his mouth and give with open jaw the vowels *>\, b], .£., and compare the position of the tongue in saying the English " a " (ah), it will be a great help to securing the correct normal pose. The high back tongue and shut throat which is, with high tension, so character istic of Korean speech, makes one wonder that any one can speak Korean without getting a '• preacher's sore throat." VOWEL MODIFICATIONS, j These arise from the changes in the oral cavity, made by the varying shapes and tensions of the softer organs, as when the lips are spread or passive or rounded ; when the tongue is highest at back, mid, front, or tip ; or when the velum, the soft palate, is open, neutrally shut, or rounded. Further, all these organs may be lax or tense, which are also termed " wide " or " narrow." Eounding. Eoundiug is the making of the oral passage round at one or more points. It is distinguished as outer, between the lips ; inner, between the back of tongue and the velum ; and medial, between the front of the tongue and the hard palate. English has only inner and outer rounding, while Korean, with French and German, has all three. Vowels Triangles. Korean has two complete triangles, though one or two of the vowels are not found everywhere in the peninsula. It has but one or two diphthongs. Triangle " A " is formed, where the lips are either spread or neutral, and " B " is composed of rounded vowels. If you take any of the Arabic numbered vowels, and round it, you get the corres CO w 0 < i — i H >-) O > APPENDIX A. 425 ponding Eoman number, unless it be for I. If to these ten vowels we add the one unclassified vowel short a Jj , not written in the diagram, you get eleven, the number of vowel signs in King Se- Jong's alphabet. It raises the question as to whether the symbols, constant in number, may not have changed in signification, as have the vowel symbols of English. Vowel III -^ is pronounced in some places as 3 e>], and in some as a consonant and vowel, wi. The symbol S\, ui, is often pronounced as 3, t]. It offers a field for investigation especially if any old rhymed poetry might be available to help to determine what the older sounds really were. As we take up the A vowels and say )) d -fl e ] 1 we note', how the tongue comes to the front of the mouth and raises higher and higher toward the back. The tongue positions of the B triangle cannot be observed by the mirror, owing to the closed position of the lips. While both a' s 6 and &]• are now sounded alike, yet it may be they had this same difference of rounding, as in our English a, in father, and a, in all. If so the triangles would be complete at the apex ; and if the pronunciation of the German ii, as now heard in Southern Korea, is the original sound of the symbol $\, then the whole triangle agree, part for part. The vowels frequently have two pronunciations, one a long, which occurs in syllables that have the stress ; and the short, which occurs in both stressed and unstressed syllables. This short sound may differ in quality from the long, but it often differs only in quantity, that is, sometimes you may hear a short i, as in the word ^J , house, where the vowel is not the same as our English 426 APPENDIX A. short i. but a short e sound. So it may be with short a, e. o and u, Short a is often like the final a in " America." The chief difference between the sounds e and i, as distinguished from English ey (long a, so called) and i (long e) is in the final glide that is characteristic of all our English long vowels. Take a mirror and say a, e, i, o, u, (ah, ey, ee, o, oo) and note the movement of the organs, as the sound comes to its finish. That is the " glide." Have a Korean give the similar sounds and you will see how immobile his lips are, and how his glide, if he does make one, is in his throat. In speech he really makes none though in giving the syllabary he frequently does. , |. The easiest way to learn the sounds 6 and n is by unrounding Korean o and u. They are also a trifle more lax than the rounded sounds. It is for this reason partly that I have concluded that the Eoman symbols short o and u had best be used to designate them. Another reason, however, is that the symbols 6 and u in German have these same values, and as many study German before they come out it would seem better to retain these symbols with their former signification. The differences in sound of the two are all made by rounding the vowels of the corresponding position in triangle I, save the bottom vowel, a, A rounded throat, and the lip give an o, -*» from an o ■] , and a rounded throat and lip give an u, T from an U, — while rounded throat, lip and tongue give 6 u from e and i. Any difficulty in mastering the sound 6 will arise from failure to hold the front of the tongue in rounded shape against the hard palate. Difficulty in mastering the sound APPENDIX A. 427 u, misnamed French eu, arises in failure to unround the organs as they are in position to say u. The fact that the symbol w, 6,, has different sounds in words now written with this vowel, only shows phonetic decay, and means Korean like English should have a reform in spelling. Careful copying of the teacher's organic attitude and action in the pronounciation of. these vowels will enable one to reproduce the sounds. Like begets like. To unround .$. or -f-, J>. or u, prolong the sound and at the same time insert the little fingers in the mouth and pull the lips toward the corners. The study of phonetics is now recognized as an integral part of the study of any language and we had hoped to have been able possibly to add a Part III to this book that would have dealt very thoroughly with this subject. This however, being impossible we are very glad that the above digest of what Prof. Cummings prepared for the student of Korean is able to be presented at this time. It is due to Dr. A. I. Ludlow, to say that he kindly consented to undertake its preparation and we sincerely hope and trust that either he or others interested in the subject will elaborate the same so that a student of Korean may be enabled the more speedily to attain a good working knowledge of this language. There have also been those who have desired that something on the I ne of English phonetics for the use of Korean students of English should be prepared and Mr. Sangkyu Pack, Ph. B. of Brown University, U. S. A. has kindly prepared Part II for such purposes. 428 APPENDIX A. II ENGLISH-KOBE AN PHONETICS. ■a ^ A *»]*! jlfc^te rt.Btsi##»l*f1M (1) a «l*l afcg=:W|6j C. (2) a «] sen'at6!=||J*»]e. (3) a rAj»rMjS|lffl#6lH 0) a=o was +J|}*i (5) a >\ arm=6^n(Q-) (6) a ask=*jki.a (7) a=e N|— care=?t|-w (8) a «H at=e|f e. (9) a H about=^«)-f-c. an'imal=«rf]v»|ig E 611 T*!-b»*l3prH (1) e=i ") J He=,*l 1 (2) e ftl Egmain'=K|»1] appendix a. 429 (3) e=a «j6i Eight=*)|6je (4) g=a ' «>}|~ Where $fl^ (5) e=I=u t>\~ Her=*f^ (6) e <*] (£) M8n=^! (7) © H &%m) JHsteJfct|S#« Mo'ment=S 1 "Jj S. 6H ra®s]w6l^^H (1) i=y f\c) ice=6H** (2) I=y o| m=*l (3) i=e o] 1 P5lice=^e] 1 ** (4) i=g=u *>\~ Bird =:#)-%•.£ 0 A* AWMJfTTH (1) 0 JL* old=£.*;= (2) 5 sl jb©#«q*t»i*rar-tH'**i* o He'r6=-*f 1 S. (3) 6 StM F6r=-fr£.** (4) 8=a r«WA]*IIW#»l«i- <6) 6=u H come=^ (iSffify (7) o=u=:oo -f- I do^-sf1 (8) o=u=ob -J- * good=4j1H 430 APPENDIX A. (i) u -^ l m=-fr 1 a. ; (2) u -fr aura'tion=^ai| 1 & ; (3) u=o »i «s=»i&, ; ef da'tum=ACi| 1 ^ (5)u=I=e *.«i urn=o.y (6) u=0 -^ 1 rude=sp- 1 j= (7) u=o -?- Put=3£* W Y (1) y=f el ci^ty=^«] (2) y=I *>W 'by=<"M oi=oy A*! Boy=#6l ou=ow *f? 0ut=«>H-3. B *|i %MX^*W*MMt>Wt* Boy=^ie] C6mblna'tion= S } im & APPENDIX A. 431 C Can=^[ mu'sic=Jft J X\^ (2) r/j^jSJug^ejv} Ace= **]*)£. Ch rcj ij-rHj sj -^7f^^f ^51 (!) JL*] §&"£ C=K s^ £ jg-g €h6mistry=?1J a| ^ *l^J Ghrist=3e|-6] ,a^ (2) r^j^6|^*^jg Chest; = *)j .a (3) rshj ^#4|p] £ Ji® H ift^sj # - Cheroot' =4*}-^-^, 5^ MftchiW=o?]*f|$l Hi G6d=^ | s P 432 APPENDIX A. Fiance=jael;4s. G Germany =^ Jim Gh F^^#4IPJ^ Eni3Hgh=:6]ir|if H He=*| 1 rHj i^b: rOj rGj rpj rsj rTj rwj -TVHJ£Lt«J fChj^rGhjfe i*«HH4 r^J fShj fThj rwhj fe rpj rsj rTj rwj ^r j Jew={f ' l^l Jack=l^ APPENDIX A. 433 K Klng=?J f2) ^fef7j^llftVH Handkerchiefs *J 7] ^ if L (1) a«rej^|Ri^«a *(2) FLj ^#^#a^f ^^JS^n Lace=esfl ] ^ M °g rOj*].|iiJ-rM NI MBUS •*! Ham=-g (£*JSJ Taj N Man=^ («J;*j SI r^j (2) £*| roj *HHl£Jftffl3E*frH Hiinger=2g7i~ 434 APPENDIX A. Ng TN) tff- TGj S\ZL^7\^^ *>#*} T6j »ls|VH Smg=4g Slnger=^6^ F ^1.5 A^feffit^tH^SIftt B$k'Eimm#ftl^S^s. rjij fMftfJMM&SWte r«j 7*s| VH #!■§•« "T^l Pie.=3).6] Map=lJ rPj ttWM&t* fnJ rsj r*J 3s t&^^fejsa^ifefpj fe^ie *^i^#6lslVH^ Ph fFj wr . ft #1 jft^feHftW-T^iSS rUj ^Sfjj£ a) fKj^5figj-§r IjIquor=Ea|^<->^ Piqu'ant=.o|^£j= (2) rxwj s\ #BD r^j r^j-j r^ j r^ j &) (3) Leisure=K| 1 ^-^ Sh r€hj Bp r^j r#j *]. jRj^^a T -en Jft^-grHSSI^^^-TH (1) tp=«. (2) NstQnj=i4| | $.~ (3) BBr-i-j#6l%-$-H*F Nation=^J | ^ Th a): 436 APPENDIX A. Thln=4Ei (2) $JB-&_LTSllBI*'l »***#»? The=4s) | Vass>=«nf j 4* Wh jttsft^SI#* rHwj M rjj-j r^j^ What= $ ] £ X jjfc^si^^rGj ^rZjSiis^s 3}»r7j4rx7j 0W9 4* W61#S r>j ** r«h «Hl£ fH^ Axle=§JS# Example =S?$ili& (2) TKj ^ 4J. rsj ¥&&W r 7 J *f r> i si#*.SS#wslVH rHJJa z **n JttfrSiCIf -§-M fSj BH TMj ft **H 1 Zon$=i& APPENDIX B. 437 APPENDIX B. PECULIAE FOEMS. While we have given in the book itself rules from which we believe almost every form of the spoken language can be derived there are certain forms that have come over at times from the book language and also other forms derived from the how obsolete verbs and 'also certain other forms that are almost restricted to Korean poetry. While it is impossible to enter into a discussion of all these forms at this point a few words may possibly aid the student in the study of the same. We will therefore, •consider briefly a few of these under three heads : — I. Peculiar forms. II. Poetic usage. _ III. Book forms. I. Peculiar forms. There were originally in Korean a number of honorific forms of the verb in which in a peculiar way the subject of the verb was honored by the use of the same. These verbs in most of their forms are now obsolete so that the dictionary will hardly record them and consequently there may be, naturally, difficulty in finding certain forms still remaining over from the now obsolete verb. Notably among these we would mention "§"•§• 'cf (already referred to in the body of the book) $■§«]■ for %•€%■ to hear. ^^■e}- for yft-c]- to receive. The following forms may be derived from these : 438 APPENDIX B. which are all declarative; -$■*£©]«]•, imperative; ^l*}^ a verbal participle, and «£ *if *1 > a negative base. This might be carried out almost indefinitely but the above will show how such forms are derived . II. Poetic forms. In Korean poetry which has at times both rhyme and rhythm and which to no small extent inclines to what might almost be termed Oriental Antiphonies ; many of the regular forms will be found with slight divergencies from common usages. In the desire for rhythm the form in *1] marked No. 2, in both the declarative and propositive terminations is very largely used and when so used the fact that it is not a polite form is lost sight of entirely. Thus in poetry -§"M] (declarative) -§"7l] (im perative) "§">M| (propositive) will be freely used and implies no inferiority at all, in the person addressed or spoken of. In their antiphonies the verbal noun in "g* with «>] ««J in the first part and t>] «£.«]- in the second part will be very common. Verse after verse of their poetry will continue down with "ff 6] <^ for the end of the first half of the verse, and "g" t>] S."6? for the second half. Questions and soliloquies are poetically put with forms of *$"fe jL, ITjI. and the ending in y\. Exclamations are not unfrequently given with the forms $lr^ and >Qt^ . It is a pity that in most of our hymnology next to no attention has been paid to proper poetical forms, but this of course, will come in time. It should also be borne in mind that Korean poetry does not commonly follow the foreign plans of four lines following each other but as a rule has two lines each, two lines above, and two lines below. Whether this should be introduced in our .hymnology time alone will show but it is to be hoped APPENDIX B» 439 that some of the students of Korean will make a special study of the poetic forms. III. Book forms. It may possibly be in the book forms that the student will find his greatest difficulty especially as he will have considerable to do with these in his reading and prepara tion of Korean books. One of the greatest difficulties in the reading of Korean is the lack of punctuation points, capitalization or any thing whatever, to mark the breaks in speech and consequently, as we pick up Korean novels or other books that record conversations and describe scenes we are constantly met with what seems to us an absolutely unnecessary repetition of " he said " and " said he," etc, etc through the whole book. It seems almost necessary for the Korean. Attempts are being made to introduce into Korean certain forms of punctuation, capitalization, etc, etc ; to enable us to have a more intelligent idea of the page of printed matter almost at a glance than can be obtained now. While there are tho3e that claim that there is no punctuation in Korean it should be noticed that the verbal endings of the paragraphs may be said to be the equi valents of punctuation. The endings H > 7? Si are said by some to be the equiva lent of commas ; •$■$£*] 9} and "£*] ej- may be said to be the equivalents of a colon or semi-colon, while -§■ V v| ej- and "^r«J 9} mark a complete ending. When there is a series of quotations marking answers back and forth in a conversation -§"H and "$*7|Ss are very commonly used alternately making the statement and the reply. The honorific verb in A) gives us quite often in book 440 APPENDIX B. form the verbal participle in />} which naturally is the honorific form of a participle in "tf^. The following list of book forms should therefore be carefully studied with the teacher: — "f^ef "f"H«f -^-tijAjisJ- "^rfc^f- 6]S^ g]3^ all of which are declarative, and may mark the ending of a complete sentence. In addition to these we should also make a careful study of such forms as these; *§"7flS, "§"H •fH6|-c|-, etc. IV. Letter writing. In the matter of Korean letter writing all students should endeavor to attain efficiency and the following forms have been prepared and a careful study of the same will we believe be of considerable benefit to the student. APPENDIX 0. 441 *J T4 2 ^ *| M- ^ Af | * „i" s* i■* « *tf „^ j*g « f mi ^ 2 * % 3 * s I 3 3 5 ? 1 1 ? * " I i ? ■f ^! * tr ^ * *} *"• ^ & . | * 7J A] « S) J i * s * : £ i ; I 2 * 5 * 2 * ? 4 I *» v * * * 3 61 i a 4 * f 374) * -r *r 3 *| Si* 5 2 2 « J I * I t -i 1 T 5m 3 *^ 6J * ^1 -4- *fr y 442 APPENDIX C. ^ -r # 7> «■ ^ 5t * **■ * H I q f f *1 7> *1 3 ^ ti ^ 5 tl *J -k ^ a J 3 3 * * 3 ? 1 4 3f $ * * « 1 1 s x 3 *; * -? * 3 # 1r 5 3 i. *l 7> JL s 4 1 *' -i * * * * i i« ? i 5 1 j i% « „ ■£ * ?! *' 3 ^ ^ 4 pJ *f I * * $ J * IJ * # I ? * 7' 61 I * 5 2 * * n *i ^ * ^ *f 3 « J ^ -5 *> ^ -fe ** *l *+ 5 "» ti -r * * ^ * I °t i| <* ^ ^ # A * * ^ | H- 2 *1 ol * if ^ «1 Ml -?• ^ tt * 1f APPENDIX c. 4 18 b: *| 6> * *1 n * •$ Bfl ^ *\ M H ^ f- * t \t 3 «1 1 -§- * *l * * a ^ i st XJ a ** 71- _1- 7]- e ^1 ■^ T* VJ " 1 ^ *1 ^ * 71 S 7t- 3 # f -1 J JU XT # 1 * 3 3 JO. * H 4r ja. A) o ol -¥- . 6f ^ e # # t ■51 f ti- J y ti -a 3 3 £1 5-5- E 3 H A fl 4- 3 i ■4 . si 7] 3 *3 M ■i -l- J5 «>1 St ^ St 6> * •*■ s * 4 si ^ ^ 4: 61 «q 2 •§- # ?i J 1 n3- «i fi t ^ s «i *J # -51 *1 ? *i ^ ^ ^ CI £ ■s. 61 61 SJ ,444 APPENDIX C. f d ^1 t t 61 * * t- M ^ 4. 2 *1 ■$ ,| jr v u, 2*. 1} * * ^ *« i * * & $ 3 *h -r | J J « fe 4 « « 3 71 1 t *i S * 3 12 -=H _, T - ^ T* a] S £) ?| J2. «i £ Al « T*- 7> * 1T * * # ^ i "^ A] •4 I "8- 44 H 3 2 I J - i P$ * 1 I *" *J ^ «+ Vf 6> *!• jl ^ •% z: ^ s. 1 £"V * J 5 * AJ i7 ^J^ " *f4 2Wl *^ ti ^^ tt .1 *I III 3! BK «f e)tv t 2 ** *tt 5 2 *^ ^* ^* I - ** *** **4 ^* S ' 5 ^ * * I s f * ^ ■# -i * 5i * ill? ~ »H**3*S M *J 2 6' I * ol * *] | ^ ^ *i J * * £ -a * sa s *l ir *' jj 31 H- ^ -1*1= fe m 5 i ■» ** *• 6i * tA *7}" $A I^ 2*3*jii * * 3 *"*■ * * ? -a « 3 * ? x= * *l - 3! ^ TS| ^i *} 5JJ- «| 4 ji. £. ,* 446 APPENDIN 0. *) tf # *i sj h 7] ys- ^ |xt^>dJL 4 "^ ^ 3-*i ^?*i ^*? ia *i*J-^| * * * x] i <£ r* *" f * g . >£ 1 « 2 * s f i * i a i ■«! ? * i *s 45 i* 7t3 ?s *'Jf^M A> *1 ? ^ ** *A S7j *•! a5 ^*i *t°f $s. .s.^ ar * ^ 4 * g * * * £ 3*13 *u* *f o> A *| *1 H ^ 1 a 4* 4«! "«ftl J.oi *SI *tft 8oj ^ a *»1 1sj 3 r *vj si * -r* *^ D J ^ f a £ oj -r *f «J *I $4 &1 £ APPENDIX C. 447 *& H 3 *1 <>1 5 *1 % & ^ 2" ^ ^ s * ■*■ 4 ^ J, ^ 5 « a » g ; $ I 4 1 2 S <3 * * 5 * P «f ^ -nl tf * * * ^ 3 ' 5 * *i *i s *as i ** t1 *«3 t^3 « 7] ei T 3xi *-r ^.i *i % J S * » * 3 * * . * *' ^ -g- | ^ * ^ SI 71 ^ -ST el £ 448 APPENDIX C. ^ *> H 4 *]■ *J -T ^ tfl f £ ^ >g -r m * ^ & * m 71. « ?ij »l * 6j c> * S ^ *!- t 2 * ? * * * ? * ! ? % t jt 3 * £ ■* M 1 M 3 *] * * 3 ;{ « jj li * 3 I ta;ie M Iff -r * *] s * vq 2 ^ »i *t« ji* Ml + ± = ^«1 Sa| * Al5 9 rf SS S q « $ * *■ *] *I ** 1# *a. *£ ** *6f 32 *i $7' ** J3 * $ Si* * 5 * * « * I ^ * *J A S. ^ . *\ V ^ * "f APPENDIX C. 449 3 *l ^ «fl 7j # H -# ^ 4? * T 71 7> th Tg § ti> -^ 5! V * 71- ° * ^ 71) S -f 7f *| * * " ° *1 -ei -si 7r 7t *- a h- <* H A ^ * # M &I *j 2 2 rd 5 5A jjJ *d"d 717l ^ «1 i t 71 - .5 s | 3 * 5 * I * * 61 *d * 3 ^ h M 7i * H 2 » * 3 S i * * s « t * * * ^ * h * i : $ * t> *1 # # e^ ^ 5 -J ^ J * | 1 * 4 2 x4 -r * *i ^ ^ * "«t ' f *1 f- 7!- tf *] 450 APPENDIX C. -6,] ^ ft] tjj ^. •% »t * ' # ^ * 3. 4: ^ * 2 * 7> 3 i * * * * S 6T °\ * 1 h 4 I *1 ** M 1 * * 4 *i f •$- ^ ^ 5 * * a} 'nip ai s u t} a * y\ 1 s « of 3 J « * J ■*. ■« ft * I * \ 1 $ »1 £ X *1 xj- f *> H « <* # *J Jl 61 *fr 71- 3 .g. s ^ H ¥ I * 2 S * c' *t I a I " « 5-1© 7V ^ fe 3| 4 ?j ^ ©i ■$■ ^1 £• , 3a ■*• ^ C4 ^ rt » -r ^ ^i ^ f ^3 3J & «i 2 3 * * * ? 1 ^ .», ^ *• & 7\ X "TT ' J 5 1 1 si ^ tc 2 4 f I A "* 2 fc *1 * 4 1 ? o D4 ^ S « 7}- 5 ^ -r > ^ 5 7l * tt «9 ? ' 5! 5 MI 2 § 7* * * * O ' Oil 52 M. "S* S A 4 .3 # * e? £} I ^ 2 -?• ^ >M 3 *J ^ g ■ 452 APPENDIX C. X] £f f ^ 3\ Ml ^ *f- ^ ^ *]■ « «j A A «1 7f $ 3J # ^ * S •£ *MI "tf *l *S Zf * r M- f 4| \ * f *1 * a ^ 1 xi 61 ^ 3. *]= m ill A, ^ ^ ^ ^| X ^ 1 . ^1 * f T * * M 4 « 3 « s - * 3 # ^ 3 » 5 = * *i 2 <§- * * 2 * ^ cl 7. a * « ,* tf * ^lvf-f- 51 » xl ^ ? J 3 5 5 6^ A| ^ ^ ? * 5 * 1 a H * ;r *> ,-st jl -fe *i h SJ ENGLISH INDEX. N.B.— Numbers in ordinary types refer to Paragraphs iu Part I. Heavy faced types refer to Part II. Ability, Expressed by — Predicate form of 244, 245 «J*, 'S with f]&, 222 Chap. VI. \ I. Sec. 2. ^V with ti 222 Pronominal 59$ Chap. I. \ III., Sec. 7. Chap. V. About Sinico-Korean 243 Chap. VII. I III. Sec. 11. Use of !£<=)•, 2."3, dM in Above, over 113 comparison 252, 253 Chap. IX. Sec. 2 and 20. Chap. VI. I II. Sec. 1. Abstracti nouns in f 53 Wrong use of «.«),£. «J ...233 Chap. II. Adverbs Chap. IX. 265 Accordingto, inaccordancewilli — Chap. VII. Chap. IX. Sec. 22. Classification of 255 Accordingly — Comparison of 261 Chap. VII. ? III. Sec. 2. Chap. VI. I II. Across 113 Derived. Chap. IX. Sec. 11. from Verbs...25G, 257, 258 Adjectives Chap. VIII. in 7)1 and «>1 258 Chap. VI. „ from Nouns 260 Comparison of 250/ Position in Sentence 282 Chap. VI. § II. Primitive 255,262 Avoidance of 250 Kesponsives 265,266 Chap. VI. I II. Sec. 1. Verbal Participle used as ... 259 Comparative 251, 252, 253 After, Since 111,260 Chap. VI. \ II. Sec. 1. Chap. VII. § II. Sec. 26. Superlative 254 Again 255 Chap. VI. I II. Sec. 2. Chap. VII. § II. Sec. 8. Classification of 243 Agency, Nouns of 52 Chap. V. Ago 255 Neuter verbs 244 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 18. Nonns as adjectives 249 All 70 Position in Sentence 282 Chap. V. Sec. 8. Chap. VI. U. See, I. Almost 224 454 ENGLISH INDEX. Chap. VII. I III. Sec. 10. Chap. V. Sec. 12. Alphabet, Korean 13/f Any 69- Consonants 14, 28, 38 Chap. V. Sec. 5. „ Aspirated 39 Around I ~~ „ Names of 40 Chap. IX. Sec. 13. Sounds; its 15/ Article : Vowels 14-22 Definite 43" Already — Chap. IH. Chap. VII. 3 II. Sec. 14. Indefinite — Also, too 267 Chap. X. Sec. 3. Chap. III. Althougb..l82,139,190,196, 198, 270 As — Chap. X. Sec. 5. Chap. VII. 2 II. Sec. 11. Always — As, like Chap. VII. 2 II. Sec. 1. Chap. VII. 2 III. Sec. 5. Am, are — At 94,99,101,104,111 Chap. 1. 2 III. Sec. 1. Chap. IX. Sec. 1. Among — At once, directly — Chap. IX. Sec. 12. Chap. VII. 2 II. Sec. 24. And 182, 194,200, 207,268 Chap. X. Sec. 1. Auxiliary Verbs 210, 219- Another other 70 Chap. 1. 2 III. B Basal conjugation 127, 179 Behind .111 Bases. Chap. IX. See. 15. Below Hl> l12r „ Desiderative 176 ,, Negative 177 Chap. IX. Sec. 21. Be, to, Verb. Besides - "" Chap. IX. Sec. 18. Auxiliary 211 Between — Chap. I. 2 I. Chap. IX. Sec. 16. Because HI, 113, 182, 186, 187, Beyond 113,259 188, 270 Chap. IX. Sec. 11. Chap. X. Sec. 9. Book Language. Before (place) 111,112 Diff. Verbal Termination of. 6- Chap. IX. Sec. 15. Appendix B. III. Before (time) 111,260 Both, either, neither — , Chap. VII. 2 II. Sec. 25. Chap. V. Sec. 2. ENGLISH INDEX. 455 Both, and (conj.) 267 By and by ... 202 Chap. X. Sec. 2. Chap. VII. i II. Sec. 22. But (conj.) 182, 191, 267 By, through 94. 10,« 102 Chap. X. Sec. 4. But (prep.) 94 Chap. IX. Sec. 6. Chap. IX. Sec. 18. Can, could 221, 222 Classification of 267 Chap. I. i in. Sec. 7. Co-ordinate 267, 263, 269 Cardinal Numbers 76 Chap. X. Sec. 1, 2a. Case Endings. Distributive use, of SL, •>(... 184, „ Lack of 42 200, 268 „ Postpositions as 44 Chap. X. Chap. IX. Phrases as 270 Causative voice 121, 122, 123 Position in Sentence 282 Chinese, Relation to Korean ... 7 Chap. X. Classifiers, specific 77 Conjunctions (Cont.) Chap. VII. Subordinate 270 Comparison of adjectives 251 Chap. X. Chap. VI. in. With verbs 181/7 Comparison of adverbs 261 Chap. X. Composite Postpositions... Ill, 112 Meaning and uses with verbs Chap. IX. see verbs with conj. Compound Nouns 51 Consequently. Compound Verbs 158 Chap. VII. i III. Sec. 2. Conciseness 10 Consonants 14 Conditional Sentences 183 „ Aspirated 28 39 Chap. 1. 1 VI. Chap. X. Doubled 28 Sec. 8. „ Euphonic Changes in 29 n ■& with verbal participle 105 „ Names of 40 Conjugation, Basal 127, 179 ,, Pronunciation of... 30-39 Conjunctions Chap. X. Continued future tense 135 Chap. X. Contraction of verbs 230-241 Days of month 83, 84 Declension, lack of 42, 44 Declarative Terminations 138, a form of J39, 140 „ for nouns 44 456 ENGLISH INDEX. a form for pronouns 62 Directly, at mice. Demonstrative pronouns ... 71, 72 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 24. Chap. V. Sec. 1. Distributive Pronouns 69, 70 Derived adverbs. Chap. V. Sec. 2ff. „ from Nouns 260 Do,did 211 from Verbs 256-259 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 3. Desiderative Base 176 During. Dipthongs 23-27 Chap. IX. Sec. 17. E Each 65, 70 J Appendix "A" on Phone Chap. V. Sec. 3. tics. Either, neither, both. „ Adverbial changes... 256 Chap. V. Sec. 2. „ Consonantal 89 Either, or (con.j.). 182, 189, 192. 267 j „ Postposition?, effect Chap. X. Sec. 6. on 42 Elliptical forms 230ff 287 Euphong Pronominal changes. 29 Emphasis. Even — Change of Order, by. 283 Chap. VII. § III. Sec. 9. „ Postposition £ by Ever, never — use of 105 Chap. VII. * II See. 7. Enough — I Every 70 Chap. V. Sec. 18. Ernmun. Chap. V. Sec* 6. (see onmun). j Except — Euphony — Chap. IX. Sec. 18. Few — I Fractions 86 Chap. V. Sec. 10. Frequently, often — Finally, at last — Chap. VII. I II Sec. 4. Chap. VII. $ II. Sec. 29. From, out of , off 94, 104, 106 For 94, 102, 111, 112, 113 Chap. IX. Sec. 5. Chap. IX. Sec. 10. Future past tense 134 formerly, used to — Future tense 134, 140 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 15. Chftp. I. ? III. Sec. 5. ENGLISH INDEX. 457 Gender 45 Generally, usually ,, Exactness, lack of ... 43 Chap. Vn. I II. Sec. 3. Get „ Expressed by Specific „ Causative Particles 45 Chap. I. $ III. Sec. 9. Half-talk ... 138, 140, 141, 144, 145 llonorifics, Importance of Use Have to, Verb — of 271. 280 Chap. 1. 1 II. „ Specific Hon. Nouns 278 „ Specific Hon. Verbs. As Auxiliary — 274, 275 Chap. I. ? III. Sec. 4. „ Terminations... 138ff 276 Causative sense — „ Terms for Servants ( Chap. I. ? III. Sec. 9. etc 280 IChap. 1. 1 II. llonorifics Verbs Honoring Here 262 Object 275 llonorifics Verbs Honoring Chap. VII. 1 1 Sec. 1. Subject 274 Hitherto — llonorifics Two Combined 276 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 16. Hope, wish 217 Honorific 12 Chap. XI. Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 15. „ Construction of Hon. How — Verbs 272, 273 Chap. VII. ? III. Sec. 3. If, unless 182, 185, 267 I Indicative Mood ... 147, 179, 180 Chap. X. Sec. 8. Indirect Discourse — Imperative 148 „ Verbs in 228, 229 „ terminations 145 Infinitive — verb 229 Chap. I. § IV. Impersonality of Verb 115 Instead of Ill, 112 In 94, 101 Chap. IX. Sec. 19. Chap. IX. Sec. 2. Intend — Indefiniteness of Speech ... 10, 285, Chap. I. \ III. Sec. 13. 288 Interrogative Pronouns 66, 67, Indefinite Pronouns. 66, 67, 68, 69 68, 69, 70 Chap. V. Chap. IV. I IH. 458 ENGLISH INDEX. J Just now . Chap. VII. i II. Sec. 19. K Korean, Adjectives 243 I Korean, Money 79, 80 Korean, Calendar 82, 83, 84 | Korean, Relation to Chinese ... 7 Last at; finally — Little while, a — Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 29- Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 29. Late of; recently — Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 17. Long time, long — Let 144 Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 27. Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 9. Look, seem 221, 225, 226 Like, as — Chap. VII. § III. Sec. 5. Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 17. M Make (causative) — Months, names of 82 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 9. More 231, 232, 253, 261 Many — Chap. V. Sec. 16. Chap. V. Sec. 15. More — the more 227 May, might — Most 254 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 8. Chap. V. Sec. 17. Measures 90, 91 Much — Memorizing, necessity of 5 Chap. V. Sec. 14. Money, Korean 78, 80 Moods — Multiples 87, 88, 89 Indicative 147, 179, 180 Must 153, 154 Volitive 117, 148, 179, 180 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 10. N Names, plurality of 55 Negative. Native, grammarians 11 Base 177 Need — „ Difference between $1 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 16. and £ 206 ENGLISH INDEX. 45 9 Negative Formation of Neg. Nouns (cont.). Verb 207 „ Proper 54, 55 Negative Response to Neg. „ Reduplication 48 Quest 265 Verbal in £ 53, 171 Negative Use of Double Neg.... 286 „ in til ... 33, 172 „ Verb "IS. 208 „ with p.p. £.. 173 Note. — For negatives of English „ „ with p.p. ofl.. 174 anxiliaries see desired verb under „ with p.p. S... 175 auxiliary Verba. Now 255 Part II. Chap. I. ? III. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 13. Neither, either, both (adj.) — Number 43, 46, 47 Chap. V. Sec. 2. ,, Distinction, lack of... 43 Neither, nor (conj.) — „ Specific Words for Chap. IX. Sec. 7. Plural 50 Never, ever — Numeral Adverbs 263 Chap. VII. ? II. Sec. 7. Numerals 74ff Neuter — Chap. VIII. Verbs as Adj... 119, 120, Numerals Adjectives, as 74 244 Cardinal 76 Chap. VI. 1 1. Sec. 1, 2. „ Classifiers, Specific. 75, 77 No, none, nobody .• — Chap. Vm. Chap. V. Sec. 7. Numerals Fractions 86 Nouns 42 „ Korean 74, 76 Chap. II. Chap. VIII. Nouns Abstract in n 53 „ Measures 90, 91 Chap. II. Money 79, 80 Nouns As Adjectives 249 Multiples 87, 88, 89 „ Agency, of 52 Ordinal 81 „ Compound 51 „ Sinico-Korean 74, 76 „ Gender, in 45 Chap Vm. „ Indeclinable 42 Numerals Substantives as 74 Nouns (cont.). Times and Season ... 8 „ Number 43 82, 83, 84, 85 „ Position in Sentence. 282 Weights 91 Of 94, 98 Often, frequently — Chap. IX. Sec. 9. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 4. Off, out of, from 94, 104, 106 On 94, 101, 111, 112, 113 Chap. IX. Sec. 5. Chap. IX. Sec. 3. x 4(50 ENGLISH INDEX. One, ones — Ought, should 221, 223 Chap. V. Sec. 2. Chap. I. i in. Sec. 11. Only 94, 108, 255 Out of , off, from 94, 104, 106 Chap. Vn. 2 III. Sec. 7. Chap. IX. Sec. 5. Oomum 7, 8 Over, across 113 Ordinal Numbers 81 Chap. IX. Sec. 11. Other, another 70 Over, above HI Chap. V. Sec. 12. Chap. IX. Sec. 20. Paradigm 179, 180 Postpositions Case endings as. 44, 94 Participles. „ Classification of 93 Classification of 146 „ Composite Ill, H2 Distinction between part, in „ Euphonic changes in. 95 6^ and Q\ non-existent ... 151 „ £ with verbs giving Participles Relative 160-169 Condition 105 Verbal 150-158 Postpositions Position in Sen „ „ with post tence 282 positions 153, 154 Chap. IX. Introduction. Particle — Postpositions Simple ... 94. 96-110 „ Progressive, in *=) ... 132 Verbal H* Parts of Speech. Prepositions „ Classification of 11 Chap. IX. Passive, construction. Present tense 134 Chap. I. § V. Primitive Adverbs 255, 262 Passive, voice 121, 122 Chap. VH. Chap. 1. 1 V. Principal parts of verb ... 178, 212 Passive Avoidance of 124 Probable fut.-past tense 135 Chap. 1. 1 V. Probably 226 Past tense 134 Progressive tense 135 Perfected Past tense 134 Pronominal Adj 243 Persons in verb. „ forms in X5h n\ • •• 118 Chap. V. „ non-existence 115 Pronouns ""J Phrases as Conjunctions 270 Chap. IV. V. Pluperfect tense 135 Classification of 59 Possessive 94, 98 Demonstrative 71, 72 Chap. IX. Sec. 9. Chap. V. Postpositions 93/f .Distributive 69, 70 Chap. IX. Chap. V. . ENGLISH IHDEX. 461 Euphonic Changes in 62 Relative 73, 164 Indefinite 66/ Chap. IV. I II. Chap. V. Interrogative 66/ Eestricted use of 64 Chap. IV. ? HI. Third Pers. Untranslatable... 63 Personal 60, 61. 62, 63 Pronunciation — Chap. IV. \ I. of Consonants 30-40 Personal 1st Person 60 of Diphthongs 23, 2» 2nd „ 61, 62 3rd „ 63 To be learned from native... 2 Pronouns (cont.) — of Vowels 15-22 Reflexive 65 | Proper Nouns 54, 55 Chap. IV. 1 1. Sec. 2. Propositive Termination 144 R Recently : of Late. Should, would — Chap. VII. i II. Sec. 17. Chap. 1. 1 VI. Sec. 6. Reduplication — Should (conditional) 185 „ Effects of 48 Chap. I. \ VI. Reflexive Pronouns 65 Simple Postposition 94, 96-110 Chap. IV. 1 1. Sec. 2. Since, after — Relative Pronouns 73 Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 26. Chap. IV. i II. Sinico-Korean 7, 243 Sinico-Korean ad j 243 Responsives 265, 266 So _ s Chap. VII. 2 III. Sec. 4. Same — Some 66, 70 Chap. V. Sec. 13. Chap. V. Sec. 4. Seem, look 221, 225 Sometime — Chap. 1. 1 in. Sec. 17. Chap. VII. ? H. Sec. 28. Seldom — Chap. VII. ? II. Sec. 6. Sometimes — Sentence Structure 281/ Chap. VII I II. Sec. 5. Several 70 Soon 253 Chap. V. Sec. 9. Chap. VII. an. Sec. 23. Shall, will 134, 140 Specific Classifiers 77 Chap. I. i III. Sec. 5. Specific Honorific Nouns 278 Should, ought — Specific Honorific Verbs... 274, 278 „ obligation 221, 223 Still... 162, 189, 190, 196, 198, 270 Chap. 1. § III. Sec. 11. Chap. X. Sec. 5. 462 ENGLISH INDEX. SKK, yet (adv.) 255 Chap. VI. ? II. Sec. 2. Chap. VII. \ II. Sec. 20. „ . of Adverbs < 261 Subordinate Conjunctions 270 Chap. VI. ? II. Sec. 2. Such, this, that - e m Chap. V. Sec. 1. Superlative_ ... degreej — Suppose, rr think. Superlative of Adjectives 254 Chap. I. I III. Sec. 12. 72 Teacher 2 There Tenses — Chap. VII. ? I. Sec. 2. „ Classification of 133 1'lierefore „ Definition of 134, 135 Chap. VII. I III. Sec. 2. Tense roots 129, 133 Terminations. Think, suppose „ Classification of 137 Chap. I. § III. Sec. 12. „ Declarative 138, This, thit, such 71 139, 140 Chap. V. Sec. 1. Definition of 136 „ Imperative 145 Through,by "- 94, 101, 102 „ Interrogative 141, Chap. IX. Sec. 6. 142, 143 Times and Seasons ... 82, 83, 84, 85 „ Propositi ve 144 Till, until, 107 Terms for servants etc. 280 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 21. Than 250 Titles 56 (Chap. VI. I II. IChap. X. Sec. 12. To 94, 99, 100, 101, 102, 107 That 270 Chap. IX. Sec. 4. Chap. X. Sec. 11. Too (adv.) 259 2%en(adv.) — Chap. VII. I III. Sec. 8. Chap. VII. ? II. Sec. 12. Too (conj.) also 267 Ken (conj.) 270 Chap. X. Sec. 10. Chap. X. Sec. 3. u Under HI, H2 1 Vntill, tilt 107 Chap. IX. Sec. 21. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 21. Unless, if 267, 112, 185 Used to, formerly Chap. IX. Sec. 8. Chap. VII. ? II. Sec. 15. ENGLISH INDEX. 463 Usually, generally — Verbs (cont.) — ' Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 3. Moods — Verb Chap. VII. Indicative 147, 179, 180 Chap. I. Volitive... 117, 148, 179, 180 Neuter 119, 120 Active 119 Paradigm 179, 180 Auxiliary 210-219 Particle, progressive in c| 132 Bases — Participles — Desiderative 176 Classification of 149 Negative 177 No distinction between Volitive 177 participles in *} and*f. 151 Causative 121, 122, 123 Eelative 160, 161, 169 Compound 158 Future 166 Conjugation of — Future past 167 Basal 127, 179 j Imperfect 168 Stem 128 Past 163, 164, 165 Tense Boots 129-133! Present 162 Future 131 Verbal 150-154 Past 130 Future 159 Conjunctions with 131J? Past 155, 158 Euphonic changes 183 Postpositions with 153, 154 Meanings and uses of 183J? Passive 121, 122 £.;196; =1 199; <%H- 202; a) Chap. 1. 1 V. 197; *1 s>S. 198; i\- 197; Avoidance of 124 71M- 192; 71S 193; 7^ Chap. I. §V. 185; 71HSJ- 190; 3.^1, Jltf, .Htf 195; Jt 200; Persons in — found in i^ej-, oj. 118 J0.H, 3.215.201; ^ VI 188! Dr£ 191;?! 185; a*! 203; lack of 115 H- 189; v) 186; y^ 187; Position in Sentence 282 Principle Parts 178, 242 «H 191. Contractions of 234-241 Supine 170 ti, SIdt, o] 2. with cer Verbs (cont.). tain nouns 222, 227 Tenses — List of above nouns 221 Classification of 133 Half-talk 138, 140, Continued-Fut 135 141, 144, 145 Future 134 Imperative 115 Future-Past 134 Impersonality of 228, 229 Past — indirect Discourse; in 1460 Pluperfect 135 464 ENGLISH INDEX. Present 134 Propositive 144 Probable-Fut.-Past 135 Verbal Noun. Progressive 135 „ in til 53, 172, 173 Tense roots 129-133 „ with pp. £ 173 Terminations — .. PP. "A 174 Classification of 137 . .. » PP-S 175 Definition of 136 „ T 53, 171 Declarative 138, 139, 140 Verbal Postposition 113 Imperative 145 Very 255 Interrogative 141, 142, 143 Chap. VII. I III. Sec. 6. W Want 211, 217 White 182, 202, 203, 227 Chap. I. § in. Sec.114. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 10. Was, were 211 Why 255 Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 14. Chap. VII. I in. Sec. 1. Will, shall 134, 140 Weights 91 Chap. I. \ III. Sec. 5. When 260 Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 9. Wish, Jtope — Chap. 1. 1 III. Sec. 15. Whenever — With 94, 101,"J02 Chap. VII. § II. Sec. 2. Chap. IX. Sec. 7. Where 262 Without - Chap. VII. 2 1. Sec. 3. Chap. IX. Sec. 8. Whether ... 182, 189, 192, 197, 267 Would, should — Chap. V. Sec. 6. Chap. I \ in. Sec. 5. Yet. still.. Chap. VII. I II. Sec. 20. INDEX OF VERBAL FORMS. Numbers in ordinary type refer to paragraphs in Part I. The heavy faced type refers to Part II. tSi7\^ 134, 185 *5321!Vii: 134, 141 (2) "faf, Verbal Participle 150/ tSd3!t7h 134,109 •ta^t^ 215 -$■«>*! 153 tS331tJl 131,197 tfMBli-:*! 134,197 ■*■»)=£. 196 t"S2H 134, 141 (2) f *!, Verbal Participle 150/ tTSajlX 134, 141 (5) **!«> 153 ■$5ajU"Stl<} 134, 138 (7) ■S«H*IC|-, Appen. B. I — fSsM-Svy* 134,141(8) ■& -SSt^oil 1187, 227 tit! 137, 185 fS^lsJ-H 167, 198 -?■■£■ 137, 163 ■frSi.'Sl 134, 190 ■frSJA 139 (3) 1 2-H 137, 189 itSm 137, 186 "frS1* 139, (1) -S*y^ 137, 187 * St* 134, 202 t&H- 137, 197 •fr$3«*Jl 134, 228 f*^l 137, 199 "frSH^fe 134, 191 t-g-3- 1*7, 187 t S3 4°I H . for t S3 <*t*\ H •*33°II 134, 138 (2) t £*l 137, 197 ■SS^K, for trSttYil**, -frS-aiSV6)'* 137, 134, 141 t&3t 137, 200 ortejcfS-^^Jci. 228 -fr4M«* 138 (6) *SJ^»I«+ 135, 140 t-S-V*l^ 138 (6) t^H 135, 185 1F-£VS4* 141 (8) *53"a 135 •$"•§•*!£ 145 "half talk" for f 3j niv* -fr-S-M-a 137, 200 -frSS^i* 135, 141 (1) t&4i 137, 163 *3HH 135, 186 *$ * fct'i 221 tc\-t^ 229, 138 (1) II, Chap. 1. 2 IH. Sec. 6 a. S^Jl 229 IrfetX 221 £4ar-fc 138 (1), 191 II. Chap. 1. 2 III. Sec. 12. t^Hl 229, 138 (2) f VS. 211, 214 S3M"* 229> 138 C*) ■ "? VHI Couversataoual form J^|=I- 229, 140 among equate from tTY -frcj-c-Je). 229, 140 S^V 229 trVSLt 214 £<=HH 229, 186 *4] 138 (2) *fl 229, 199 "gal 163, 97 |c^| 229, 167 f H 186, or 143 (1) £5 163, 225 t."]7]- 163, and 97 *S- 163, 190 ■£%■$** 225, 139 (1) f MM" 182, 187 f MMH 182, 187 S^tt^ 234, (d). f HSlHS. 182, 187 t# 163 f HDM , 232 with *|= (;# ). .trHej- ho £3L , 187 fy 7r 182, 187 $3=-* 187 tt 142 (B) SA ..' 197 ■&x\?l*\ • 231 "frXH 118, 186 * X.e\ 118, 140 £x| a)- book form of past. fi^ "$".» 228 -£# 221 •~ti2i.^\SL Contr. for above. tt-§ 221 fit, =? Vis: 141 (2) tti 2»1 t7h 197 II. Ch. I. I III. Sec. 6, 2 tT7|-S1), Conversational form from (a) and Sec. 12. I ; Ch. '■£7ML«* • 214 VIL2IH. Sec. 3 (note). ty]*]^ 220#, 193 1 V] «fr for ? $ y oj «*■ ... 138 (7> ^7lA|i 221, 223 I VSlTr for ? § YSJtf ... 141 (9> -£7}AIM 223, 186 IHI 138 (2> S3! ..- 163/ m|4 138 (6> P.B. Part with 2J. £41 144 (2) tJL 197 f xfl=V 144 (5> "gjlS. 193# ^|£ 145 II. Chap. X. Sec. 9. ?A\+ 144 (4> *ar 165#, 73 %&=■$&*. 135, 145 S=r • 138 (1) " half talk " much used *«H 163, 226 among women. S^r-gS 229, 190 £=«<=F=*SC-Hcr 14» INDEX OF VERBAL FOLMS. 471 S^h for -fr§c161*r 140 t a>fc 204, 162 ■&«*M«* 140 ■$aJ=r. for -fcs>-g<=r 204 t^Tr, 13!* 143 (3), (4) Stf^S 225 "S"9 3!7h same as above. -g<-W& 226 % 166 f e>c1M 204, 186 tfeV contr. for tT*^r ... 145 tSt^. forfzKfrSa"* 204 fell eh 229 to inferiors ■$■ =|a]-, for ■far-^t'^eh 229 ■%*}£■ 229 S«Whfor-*al7J.«fr 170 t5rt<>47flAl<:|- 229 supine with 7\-c\- Verb, Part, form with 7fl.*l cr q. v. t^H 176j? ■feVf^Sr 229, 145 fe4f Hsr 204, 145 ^3r"$"ah contr. for above. ■$<*!£§ 204, 190 ■$-srf^f ch 229, 204 -^g^ -$c|. 204 tts}t cr 229 (indefinite) fe^f =h • 204 •$Hrcr7F 229, 202 *3» 240 -£efj!l=r 229 fM ■«f^'aS!^,forfeh'Sc1MSJ7|- -£2| 1!0 143 (4) ■go] 166 •£afc-|v.) 229 F. Pel. Part, with <>] with tfc)H q. v. " person who." ■tfe> 176 fel6I4 140 fsl=i 204 for f zYtSL -fcelSlTr 143 * er- -*al=h for tt 61*14 HO He appears as though he *%*, formal SI* H3 will. t SL, for t=liq.v - I ■$ + 3. 4, for above. t 166 1^ 221 *7h £*t 166, 197 I ^134 221 SH-V* 197, 231 1^214 221 1*24 214 I«( 226 ^ 7J-a|^.=j. ... 217 to inferiors. IS 220jf, 225 Slg,for£7l# 223 ■JStTfl 225, 159 -J7l*| 223 t^t 4 220, 225 l7H*1^ 223, 193 S^-M-^.for-y^ 217 -g7WH. 223, 189 If-*?- 234, 241d I7WH 2i3, 1P6 1^ 221, 223 TE7WH4 223, 140 l*I*l.fi>| 223, 138 (note) l7MeV 223,140 £c]6loJ 223, 185 " i-J " is omitted from above. I«]olH 223, 186 171^4 223 1 *| 34, Fut. Bel. Part, with la 167 1M &o)i 138(9) tilt** 222 I# 221 -Jvj. 237 lt£ 221 144*. forts** 4 4 ...... 204 ItX 221 -gH-fc, for -ti^SL 204 II Chap. 1. 1 III Sec. 6, 2, Itf*4t4 235, 241(c) (a) and Sec. 12. 1. tffc:*! 197 Chap. VII § in Sec. 3 1MH 239, 241 (i) (note). l^a)', ending a)- on above. f*>, hon. from t*]SL. for I'd*) 197 -$•*) 153 14 166, 73 "$'*<>ICF. Appen. B. I — 1 -$i4-§*l £...134, 139 (5) or 142 ■frfl a. 197 (7)fr.**l£. fr 200 "]s] Er, See above and «^ar ... 140 194 615l5r • 134, 140 185 alSjl, Usage ha3 allowed the 189 introduction of a connective »W • • HI (1) 3. between the stem and a]v] , 186 termination or parlicals d]v]e)- : 140 with the verb gj cj-. This 6ia7F,for«>lvHS!7h } then equals &]$L or §.a 200 fr. e,]S.. >141 (8) *lSjl4(See'5j£ JOL) 201 "IS**, (See "1Sjl)=a^.. 138 (2> *lit ■ 141 (2) °]3.4.*]<1, (See *]3.3L and tl^- 197 Appendix B. I) — Sl^ji=a^a.i. 2H "]S.s\, (See °]g.3L) 140 ilTf-fll, Conversational form *IS«fc (See f]S.SL) 138 (1> 138(2) Appen. B. II. y7M££ 214, 188(3) «>JS.*l,(SeeS:n) 190 tl7Va.cF • 214, 138 (1) 1M 188 Sla. 197 ■y changed into § from yjlg. 162 verb t>]5L. II. Chap. X.: Sec. 9. UvW 239, 241(1} tl?) 199 S>d*l 197 tlw ••' 190 tJ*» 138(1) S15- 187 84 138(1) tl*l ' 197 Q^x* 135, 143(1) Sit 221 gcIHa). 135, 140 y=!!«t, for6lgi=1w|6)cJ. filler 135, 140 140, 138 (7) WaH- 135, 143 (note) y9l7h for aJ&^SlTl-....,.. 143 (4) g^-£c]. 220, 225 «la> 140 8*l=r5. 198 ajej-.S. 198 S. with c]z\. Uf- 221 *M^ 228, 138(1) 6W H 272, 186 from^>].S>.. 6Ier ., „... 176 o]AIH^^ 272, 140 6Ja1H» The Progressive sign "Wi H; Contra, for «•!*! VVI c1 is sometimes with 6J i $1* 272 141(8) changed to s^ . This then &J;i|er 272, 140 ! ' is 186 or 239 61$ ch l»n. form%of a=r 272. INDEX OF VERBAL FORMS. 475 <>1*I 190 613*1 19,7 e>I«*|?j 135, 185 H. Chap. VII. i 1. Sec. 3, 4. "jcm= 135, 143(1) c]*\e} 135, 140 *>]cly* 135, 143(3) «>JS| 190 e>JOIit 135, 143(2) *WSL 141(7) Wit 197 al^M* 141(4), 191. JUL 1 2 1915JZ{-^ $d5JJx? ion? What does Mr. Yi think ^J/4#«>| §J«j^| V4&1.&? of it? Please explain to me what oj °j- ^^] ^.a^^j 35. is the meaning of this "?s^ ^./]_^? word? What flowers do you in- $J^ ty^.'g ^$] tyQ**} tend to plant in your -S^^A? garden ? By what road did you come? &) y ^ 2c £}- ±. ? In what neighbourhood ^A^aj «^V :g.V| /•[.£.? does Mr. Kim live ? At what time does the boat b] y /qj*H] £|--§-/^ "^vfA? start ? What is the reason ? -Jf •* ^ ^ «>| £. ? What is that man's name ? a A|-|6| >g »j o] J^.frlH:2M,& Sd^l passport has not come? "$".£.?